Home

Spec

1. Non Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors Type particleboard core PC plies and faces as indicated above Fire Rated Doors Mineral core Type FD plies and faces as indicated above with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through bolting Sound Retardant Doors Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to achieve rating specified plies and faces as indicated above 2 4 DOOR FACINGS A Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish Close grain hardwood 2 5 ACCESSORIES A Glazing Stops Wood of same species as door facing butted corners prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws Astragals for Non Rated Double Doors Steel T shaped overlapping and recessed at face edge Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors Steel T shaped overlapping and recessed at face edge specifically for double doors 2 6 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified B Cores Constructed with stiles and rails 1 Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement 2 Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing D Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface mounted hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions February 7 2014 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053
2. A B nmo O See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Shop Drawings Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning junctions with other ceiling finishes and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling Product Data Provide data on suspension system components Samples Submit five full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units Samples Submit five samples each 8 inches long of suspension system main runner Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special procedures 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Fire Resistive Assemblies Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance indicated Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience Seismic Standard Comply with the following 1 ASTM E580 2 CISCA s Recommendations for Direct Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings Seismic Zones 0 2 3 CISCA s Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies Seismic Zones 3 amp 4 February 7 2014 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080
3. 1 Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer 2 Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall 3 Prepare all cutouts accurately to size replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes February 7 2014 COUNTERTOPS 123600 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Provide back end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated 1 Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue 2 Height 4 inches unless otherwise indicated Solid Surfacing Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations and instructions 1 Acceptable means of machining are listed below Ensure that material is not chipped or warped by machining operations Shearing and Punching Acceptable only on 1 16 materials Die Cutting Acceptable only on material 1 8 or less a Sawing Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required b Drilling Drills especially designed for use with plastic products c Milling Climb cut where possible d Routing e Tapping f g PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B C Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared If substrate prepar
4. 230924 BAS Sequences 230925 BAS Input Output Schedule 232113 HVAC Pipe and Pipe Fittings 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232500 Water Treatment 232913 Enclosed Combination Magnetic Motor Controllers 232923 Variable Frequency Drives 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories February 7 2014 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 Table of Contents 000010 2 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University 233600 Air Terminal Units 238146 Water Source Heat Pumps DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260100 Basic Electrical Requirements 260500 Common Work Result for Electrical 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 262200 Low Voltage Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 264313 Surge Protection Devices 265100 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
5. C Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Flexible Tubing Flexible elastomeric 1 inch thick END OF SECTION 230719 February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC amp R systems assemblies and equipment B Related Sections 1 Division 01 Section General Commissioning Requirements for general commissioning process requirements 1 2 DEFINITIONS A Commissioning Plan A document that outlines the organization schedule allocation of resources and documentation requirements of the commissioning process B CxA Commissioning Authority C HVAC amp R Heating Ventilating Air Conditioning and Refrigeration D Systems Subsystems Equipment and Components Where these terms are used together or separately they shall mean as built systems subsystems equipment and components 1 3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A Certificates of readiness B Certificates of completion of installation prestart and startup activities 1 4 CONTRACTOR S RESPONSIBILITIES A Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA B Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting C Attend testing adjusting and balancing review and coordination meeting D Participate in HVAC amp R systems assemblies equipment and com
6. February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 reference 2 Contractor shall be certified by Berk Tek Ortronics to provide warranty for the cabling system 3 Contractor shall provide documentation of certification 4 Contractor shall be licensed by the State of Georgia as a low voltage contractor 1 10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A The Contractor shall coordinate telecommunications work with that of other Sections as required to ensure that the entire telecommunications work will be carried out in an orderly complete and coordinated fashion 1 11 SITE INVESTIGATION A Prior to submitting bids of the project visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project Where work under this project requires extension relocation reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems the existing equipment or systems shall be restored to their original condition before the completion of this project 1 12 PERMITS A Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto Deliver to the Owner all certificates of said inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction 1 13 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A All work that would adversely affect the normal operation of the other portions of the Owner s property shall be done at a time other
7. Hollow Metal Frames Section 081416 Flush Wood Doors Section 084250 All Glass Doors and Frames Division 26 Electrical 1 3 REFERENCES A Standards of the following as referenced American National Standards Institute ANSI Door and Hardware Institute DHI Factory Mutual FM oP ON 6 Warnock Hersey February 7 2014 National Fire Protection Association NFPA Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL a UL10C Fire Tests Door Assemblies HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Regulatory standards of the following as referenced 1 Department of Justice Office of the Attorney General Americans with Disabilities Act Public Law 101 336 ADA 2 CABO ANSI A117 1 Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicap People 1992 edition 1 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Refer to applicable Headings for system description for electric and electro pneumatic hardware products 1 5 SUBMITTALS A General Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections Product data including manufacturers technical product data for each item of door hardware installation instructions maintenance of operating parts and finish and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors frames and
8. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 A A A B C RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Equipment labels Pipe labels Duct labels Valve tags PONS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated Samples For color letter style and graphic representation required for each identification material and device Equipment Label Schedule Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label Valve numbering scheme Valve Schedules For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals COORDINATION Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 1 Material and Thickness Multilayer multicolor plastic labels for mechanical engraving 1 8 inch thick and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Ge
9. OONO 3 04 TEMPORARY LABELS A Provide temporary labels on all outlet cable as it is roughed in The bid documents will not show outlet cable labeling at the time of the cable rough in Replace temporary labels with permanent labels after contract documents have been revised 3 05 TEXT SIZE AND INFORMATION Text size should be as large and as bold as possible Exact text required information is shown on the Drawings Refer to Drawings for all outlet outlet cables and backbone cables labels 0 Oo 9 gt Refer to the Cover Drawing for exact labeling coding schemes where applicable 3 06 LABELING AND REFERENCE CHARTS A Contractor to provide a labeling reference chart s indicating the following 1 Voice backbone termination of pairs at the local telecommunication room TR and main telecommunications room MR February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Voice outlet cable pair termination at the TR 3 Data patch panel outlet port termination 3 07 AS BUILT PLAN amp FRAME A Provide and mount frame with as built on TR wall PBX wall and File Server room wall near the data racks or voice blocks or as indicated on the plans END OF SECTION February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION
10. PRODUCTS 2 1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS TU A Manufacturers Products of the following manufacturers provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents and are participating members in the ARI 880 Certification Program will be among those considered acceptable 1 E H Price 2 Titus Products Division Philips Industries Inc 3 The Trane Company B Terminal Unit Controls The following Controls will be provided under Section 23 09 00 Factory installation of controls will be coordinated by Section 23 09 00 1 Direct digital controller for pressure independent primary air control DDC 2 Damper actuator 3 Transformer Where electric heaters are used transformers provided with the electric heater may be used for control power When unit does not have a heater control voltage power source shall be provided by Section 23 09 00 4 Air flow transducer February 7 2014 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Air terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following 1 Primary air control damper 2 Multipoint Velocity sensor This Section shall provide velocity pressure flow CFM curves to Section 23 09 00 vendor to enable proper CFM calculation 3 Electric heating coil D Air terminal unit manufacturer shall mount all components furnished by Division 23 09 00 including the following 1 Damper actuators 2 Controllers E Primary
11. Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Corning 2 Uniprise CommScope 2 2 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLE INSIDE PLANT A Plenum Indoor Distribution 50 125 Multimode Optical Fiber Non Conductive OFNP Tight Buffered Cable 1 Generic Characteristics a The indoor optical fiber cable shall be available with up to twelve 900 micron tight buffered 250 micron fibers placed in a color coded sub unit bundle with aramid strength elements b The indoor optical fiber cable shall have sequential length marking printed on the cable jacket c Maximum attenuation dB Km 850 1300 nm 3 5 1 5 d Bandwidth 500 MHz km 850 nm e Bandwidth 500 MHz km 1300 nm f Type OM3 B Plenum Indoor Distribution 8 3 125 micron Singlemode Optical Fiber Non Conductive OFNP Tight Buffered Cable 1 Generic Characteristics a The indoor optical fiber cable shall be available with up to twelve 900 micron tight buffered 250 micron fibers placed in a color coded sub unit bundle with aramid strength elements b The indoor optical fiber cable shall have sequential length markings printed on the cable jacket c All singlemode fibers shall be pigtail spliced into a rack mounted optical fiber enclosure or wall mounted enclosure d The loss of fiber shall not exceed 1 0 dB per kilometer 1550 nm and 1 0 dB per kilometer 1310 nm 2 4 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTORS A Multimode Fiber Connectivity 1 The optical fiber field i
12. Where installed in plaster gypsum board etc covers shall be raised to compensate for the thickness of the wall finish Where metallic outlet boxes are to be empty for future use blank coverplates shall be used 2 5 PULL BOXES A C Pull boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel with flat removable covers fastened with plated steel screws Pull boxes shall be equipped with keyhole screw slots in the cover to permit removal of the cover without extracting the screws Pull boxes shall have provisions for grounding 2 7 CABLE HANGERS A J Hooks 1 J hooks shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to comply with required bend radii of high performance cables J hook shall be cULus Listed 2 J hooks shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables 3 J hooks sized 1 5 16 and larger shall have a cable retainer strap to provide containment of cables within the hanger The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces B Adjustable Non Continuous Cable Support Sling 1 Constructed from steel and woven laminate sling length can be adjusted to hold up to 425 4 pair balanced twisted pair rated for indoor use in non corrosive environments Rated to support Category 5e and higher cable or optical fiber cable Cable support sling shall be cULus Listed 2 Adjustable non continuous cable support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 Ib
13. 2 Concrete Inserts Steel or malleable iron slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18 complying with MFMA 4 or MSS SP 58 3 Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements MSS SP 58 type suitable for attached structural element Through Bolts Structural type hex head and high strength Comply with ASTM A 325 Toggle Bolts All steel springhead type Hanger Rods Threaded steel Oop PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 3 2 A A B C APPLICATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article Raceway Support Methods In addition to methods described in NECA 1 EMT IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members as permitted in NFPA 70 Strength of Support Assemblies Where not indicated select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib 90 kg February 7 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 D Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment an
14. 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and Maintenance Data For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency 1 6 1 7 A B A operation and maintenance manuals 1 Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project use ANSI and manufacturers codes QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application Comply with NFPA 70 COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including HVAC equipment fire suppression system and partition assemblies PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the products indicated on Drawings 2 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A Recessed Fixtures Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures B Fluorescent Fixtures Comply with UL 1598 Where LER is specified test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable C Metal Parts Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges D Sheet Metal Components Steel unless otherwise indicated Form and support to prevent warping and sagging February
15. 3 Provide battery size calculations for all existing elements impacted by this renovation and new equipment 4 Provide sound pressure level calculations for all common spaces as defined by ADA and 20 of all other spaces i e offices 5 Provide sound intelligibility calculations for all common areas as defined by ADA and 20 of all other spaces i e offices 6 Provide performance parameters and installation details for each detector verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity temperature and humidity possible when air handling system is operating 7 Provide plans sections and elevations of heating ventilating and air conditioning ducts drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes detector housing and remote status and alarm indicators Locate detectors according to manufacturer s written recommendations 8 Provide voice alarm signaling service control layout grounding schematic amplifier power calculation and single line connection diagram 9 Provide floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device Show size and route of cable and conduits General Permit Drawings And Submittal Requirements 1 Permit drawings shall be prepared and sealed dated and signed by a Georgia State Registered Professional Engineer and approved by
16. 8 Service Indoor or outdoor 9 Substrate Compatible with galvanized sheet steel both PVC coated and bare stainless steel or aluminum sheets C Flanged Joint Sealant Comply with ASTM C 920 1 General Single component acid curing silicone elastomeric 2 Type S 3 Grade NS 4 Class 25 5 Use O 6 For indoor applications sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 7 Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers D Flange Gaskets Butyl rubber neoprene or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 5 2 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments Cadmium plated steel rods and nuts Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments Electrogalvanized all thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc chromate primer after installation Strap and Rod Sizes Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Table 5 1 Table 5 1M Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size and Table 5 2 Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct Steel Cables for Galvanized Steel Ducts Galvaniz
17. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mil 2 PPG Industries 6 2 SpeedHide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mils February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Sherwin Williams High Build Interior Latex Primer B28W08601 Applied at a thickness recommended by the manufacturer Interior Gypsum Board Primers Factory formulated high solids 100 acrylic based primer with mildewcide for interior application over coated glass mat faced panels 1 PPG Industries 17 921 Series Seal Grip Interior Exterior 100 Acrylic Universal Primer Sealer Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 5 mils 2 Pratt and Lambert Paints SUPRIME Interior latex Enamel Undercoater Z1013 F1013 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 5 mils 3 Sherwin Williams Builders Solution Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than Interior Wood Primers Factory formulated latex based primer for interior wood door application 1 Benjamin Moore Fresh Start All Purpose 100 Acrylic Primer 023 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 2 mil 2 PPG Industries Pittsburgh Paints 6 855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mils 3 Sherwin Williams PrepRite ProBlock Latex Primer B51 Series Applied at a dry film thickness of not
18. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers written instructions D After alignment is correct tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place After grout has cured fully tighten foundation bolts 3 3 CONNECTIONS A Where installing piping adjacent to pump allow space for service and maintenance B Connect piping to pumps Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps C Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles D Install check valves and flow manual balancing valves on discharge side of in line close coupled pumps E Install Y type strainers and shutoff valves on suction side of in line close coupled pumps February 7 2014 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure gage tapping or install single gage with multiple input selector valve G Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables END OF SECTION 232123 February 7 2014 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 232500 WATER TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A Section Includes 1 Chemical water tre
19. D Prior to project completion representatives of the lock exit device and overhead closer February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 11 HII 12053 02 25 Park Place Phase Two GSU 080 096 13 Georgia State University manufacturer s shall inspect and adjust all units and certify that all units are installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and are regulated properly and functioning correctly A written report shall be provided to the Architect as to the inspection and shall include appropriate certificates END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE February 7 2014 087111 12 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 088000 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Glass B Glazing compounds and accessories 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 062000 Finish Carpentry Wood components with requirements for glass Section 079005 Joint Sealers Sealant and back up material Section 081213 Hollow Metal Frames Glazed borrowed lites Section 081416 Flush Wood Doors Glazed doors Section 082500 All Glass Doors and Entrances moo 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials current edition B ANSI Z97 1 American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test 2009 C ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Othe
20. Elastomeric hangers 2 Spring hangers 3 Spring hangers with vertical limit stops 4 Restraining braces and cables DEFINITIONS IBC International Building Code ICC ES ICC Evaluation Service PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Restraint Loading 1 Site Class as Defined in the IBC D 2 Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC Ill a Component Importance Factor 1 0 b Component Response Modification Factor 6 0 Cc Component Amplification Factor 2 5 3 Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods 0 2 Second 15 4 Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1 Second Period 6 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data for the following 1 Include rated load rated deflection and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device 2 Illustrate and indicate style material strength fastening provision and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC ES b Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings Show coord
21. Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 8 Indoor exposed oven and warewash exhaust 9 Indoor concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior 10 Indoor exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior 11 Outdoor concealed supply and return 12 Outdoor exposed supply and return 3 7 Items Not Insulated N NO OVP 09 Fibrous glass ducts Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Factory insulated flexible ducts Factory insulated plenums and casings Flexible connectors Vibration control devices Factory insulated access panels and doors INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE Concealed round and flat oval supply air duct insulation shall be the following Ls Mineral Fiber Blanket 1 1 2 inches thick and 0 75 lb cu ft nominal density END OF SECTION 23 07 13 February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A B 1 2 A 1 3 A 1 4 A SUMMARY Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems 1 Condensate drain piping indoors Related Sections 1 Division 23 Section Duct Insulation ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
22. Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F 4 4 deg C 1 11 WARRANTY A Manufacturer s Special Warranty on Laminated Glass Manufacturer s standard form in which laminated glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer s written instructions Defects include edge separation delamination materially obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard 1 Warranty Period 5 years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GLASS PRODUCTS GENERAL A Thickness Where glass thickness is indicated it is a minimum Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated B Strength Where float glass is indicated provide annealed float glass Kind HS heat treated float glass or Kind FT heat treated float glass as needed to comply with Performance Requirements Article Where heat strengthened glass is indicated provide Kind HS heat treated float glass or Kind FT heat treated float glass as needed to comply with
23. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer s instructions 3 3 INSTALLATION GENERAL A Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108 Series A118 Series A136 1 manufacturer s instructions and TCA Handbook recommendations B Lay tile to pattern indicated Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings C Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile leaving sealant joint space Form corners and bases neatly Align floor joints D Place tile joints uniform in width subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size Make joints without voids cracks excess mortar or excess grout E Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed F Install non ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer s instructions G Install thresholds where indicated February 7 2014 TILE 093000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H J K L Sound tile after setting Replace hollow sounding units Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout Apply sealant to joints Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting Grout tile joints Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes 3 4 INSTALLATION FLOORS THIN SET METHODS A Over exterior concrete substrates install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbo
24. Procedure B 0 013 perm at 43 mil dry film thickness 3 Service Temperature Range Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F 4 Solids Content ASTM D 1644 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight 5 Color Black February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION A Surface Preparation Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application B Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation C Mix insulating cements with clean potable water if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces use demineralized water 3 2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A Install insulation materials accessories and finishes with smooth straight and even surfaces free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings valves and specialties B Install insulation materials forms vapor barriers or retarders jackets and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules C Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service Install accessories that do not corrode soften or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state D Install insulation with longi
25. Unit Data a System and air handling unit identification b Location and zone Cc Apparatus used for test d Area served e Make f Number from system diagram g Type and model number 4 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 11 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 h i Size Effective area in sq ft 2 Test Data Indicated and Actual Values a Air flow rate in CFM b Air velocity in fpm C Preliminary air flow rate as needed in CFM d Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm e Final air flow rate in CFM f Final velocity in fpm g Space temperature in deg F J System Coil Reports For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units include the following 1 Unit Data a System and air handling unit identification b Location and zone i Room or riser served d Coil make and size e Flow meter type 2 Test Data Indicated and Actual Values a Air flow rate in CFM b Entering water temperature in deg F C Leaving water temperature in deg F d Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig e Entering air temperature in deg F f Leaving air temperature in deg F K Pump Test Reports Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following 1 2 Unit Data DOSRZTAT TSE OA0TD Unit identification Location Service Make and size Model number and serial number Water flow rate in g
26. Where bottom rods are required for security applications the devices shall be UL labeled for fire doors applications with rod and latch guards by the device manufacturer G Closers and Door Control Devices 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a LCN Closers Division of Ingersoll Rand 4011 4111 EDA 4111 CNS 4111 S CNS 2 Characteristics a b k February 7 2014 Door closers shall have fully hydraulic full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 1200F to 300F without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door Closers for fire rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7 2 1997 and UL 10C Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper proof non critical valves Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed general speed and back check All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms and forearms for parallel arm closers and where specified shall have a spring loaded stop on the closer shoe Spring Cush Where door travel on out swing doors must be limited use CNS or S CNS type closers Auxiliary stops are not required when cush type closers are used Over head concealed closers shall have
27. and structural members G Attach backbone conduits larger than one inch trade diameter to or from structure on intervals not exceeding twelve feet with conduit beam clamps one hole conduit straps or trapeze type support H Where conduits must pass through structural members obtain approval of Architect l Install all conduits or sleeves penetrating or routed within rated firewalls or fire floors to maintain Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 zZ fire rating of wall or floor Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall Refer to architectural documents Provide expansion and deflection coupling where conduit passes over a building expansion joint All other conduit unless specified herein shall be electrical metallic tubing EMT PVC conduit is not allowed in exposed or concealed areas but onlywithin concrete Conduit Installations Within Slab Floor 1 Conduit shall be run following the most direct route between points 2 Conduit shall not be installed in concrete where the outside diameter is larger than 1 3 of the slab thickness 3 Conduits shall not be installed within shear walls unless specifically indicated on the Drawings Conduit shall not be run directly below and parallel with load bearing walls 4 Protect each metallic conduit ins
28. complying with ASTM C 1136 Type II 2 7 TAPES A FSK Tape Foil face vapor retarder tape matching factory applied jacket with acrylic adhesive complying with ASTM C 1136 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a ABI Ideal Tape Division 491 AWF FSK b Avery Dennison Corporation Specialty Tapes Division Fasson 0827 c Compac Corporation 110 and 111 d Venture Tape 1525 CW NT 1528 CW and 1528 CW SQ e lt Insert manufacturer s name product name or designation gt 2 Width 4 inches 3 Thickness 6 5 mils 0 16 mm 4 Adhesion 90 ounces force inch 1 0 N mm in width 5 Elongation 2 percent 6 Tensile Strength 40 Ibf inch 7 2 N mm in width 7 FSK Tape Disks and Squares Precut disks or squares of FSK tape 2 8 SECUREMENTS A Cupped Head Capacitor Discharge Weld Pins Copper or zinc coated steel pin fully annealed for capacitor discharge welding 0 106 inch diameter shank length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 1 2 inch galvanized carbon steel washer a Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following 1 AGM Industries Inc CWP 1 2 GEMCO Cupped Head Weld Pin 3 Midwest Fasteners Inc Cupped Head 4 Nelson Stud Welding CHP B Bands 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a ITW Insulation Systems Gerrard Strapping and Seals b RPR Products Inc Insul Mate Strappi
29. covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents 1 Fuses Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type but no fewer than two of each size and type 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Source Limitations Obtain fuses for use within a specific product or circuit from single source from single manufacturer B Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application C Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses D Comply with NFPA 70 E Comply with UL 248 11 for plug fuses 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F 5 deg C or more than 100 deg F 38 deg C apply manufacturer s ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings 1 8 COORDINATION A Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short circuit current levels PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 2 2 A A MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements Cooper Bussmann Inc Edison Fuse Inc Ferraz Shawmut Inc Littelfuse Inc aPons CARTRIDGE FUSES Characteristics NEMA FU 1 nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages February 7 2014 FUSES 262813 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU
30. e Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class 2 Frame Galvanized sheet steel with bend over tabs and foam gaskets 3 Number of Hinges and Locks a Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square No hinges and two sash locks b Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square Two hinges and two sash locks 2 11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Ductmate Industries Inc 2 Duro Dyne Inc 3 Elgen Manufacturing 4 Ventfabrics Inc 5 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Materials Flame retardant or noncombustible fabrics C Coatings and Adhesives Comply with UL 181 Class 1 D Metal Edged Connectors Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5 3 4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2 3 4 inch wide 0 028 inch thick galvanized sheet steel or 0 032 inch thick aluminum sheets Provide metal compatible with connected ducts E Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric Glass fabric double coated with neoprene 1 Minimum Weight 26 0z sq yd 880 g sq m 2 Tensile Strength 480 Ibf inch 84 N mm in the warp and 360 Ibf inch 63 N mm in the filling 3 Service Temperature Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C 2 12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 8 25
31. in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Where such instructions are not published obtain conditioning instructions in writing from the manufacturer 1 7 EXTRA MATERIALS A B See Section 016000 Product Requirements for additional provisions Maintenance Replacement Materials Before commencement of carpet installation deliver stock of replacement materials to Owner s designated storage space Furnish full size units matching installed materials packaged and marked for identification as extra run material 1 Deliver not less than 5 of the total square yardage as manufactured for installation of each carpet Type and Pattern Maintenance materials are exclusive of material required to properly complete installation a Furnish maintenance materials from same production run as materials installed 2 Package replacement materials with protective covering recommended by manufacturer and identified with appropriate labels PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Basis of Design Manufacturer February 7 2014 TILE CARPETING 096813 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Shaw www shawfloors com B Other Acceptable Manufacturers Tandus www tandus com Interface Inc www interfaceinc com Lees Carpets www leescarpets com Milliken amp Company www milliken com Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements OVR O E 2 2 CARPET TIL
32. motor shall stop 3 In auto position motor operation shall be controlled through the BAS Programming Phased occupancy will require program changes during the first year of occupancy Include time to make program changes at 3 6 and 9 months after Material Completion for no additional cost unless change requires additional points or materials SECONDARY INDUCTION LOOP PUMPS Variable Speed Chilled Water Pumps P 6 and P 7 1 Existing constant speed CHW pumps P 6 and P 7 will be converted to variable speed 2 Provide sensors and points to operate variable speed pumps 3 Sequence a Modulate speed to maintain pressure differential setpoint on the 14 floor Variable Speed Chilled Water Pumps P 9 and P 10 1 Existing constant speed CHW pumps P 6 and P 7 will be converted to variable speed 2 Provide sensors and points to operate variable speed pumps 3 Sequence a Modulate speed to maintain pressure differential setpoint on the 13 floor February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 AIR HANDLING UNITS AC 1 and AC 2 NEW OA DAMPER SECTIONS A Airside Economizer A With outside air enthalpy below 23 btuh Ib 55 DB 55 WB system shall operate in the economizer mode Outside air enthalpy shall be continuously monitored and compared to return air enthalpy When the outside air enthalpy is 5 btuh lb less than return air enthalpy and
33. notify engineer 2 Where actuators are specified to be replaced verify existing normal position Where normal positions differ from specification sequence notify owner s representative prior to ordering valve 3 Submittal data shall clearly identify valve and damper normal or failed positions that differ from specifications or existing conditions EXISTING EQUIPMENT Wiring Do not reuse any abandoned wires Abandoned wiring shall be removed and become the property of the Contractor unless specifically noted or shown to be reused Conduit Existing may be reused unless noted otherwise Temperature and Pressure Indicator Gauges Where existing to remain check and report accuracy PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 3 2 A START UP AND COMMISSIONING See 23 08 00 Demonstrate that all equipment operates as specified in every mode of operation described in the specifications and on the drawings When installation of the system is complete calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on line All testing calibrating adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the installer Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power Provide any recommendation for system modification in writing to owner Do not make any system modification including operating parameters and control settings without prior approval
34. on lower threaded rod February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 8 Self centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil 2 2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES A Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 Amber Booth Company Inc 2 California Dynamics Corporation 3 Cooper B Line Inc a division of Cooper Industries 4 Hilti Inc 5 Kinetics Noise Control 6 Loos amp Co Cableware Division 7 Mason Industries 8 TOLCO Incorporated a brand of NIBCO INC 9 Unistrut Tyco International Ltd B Restraint Cables ASTM A 492 stainless steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles brackets swivel and bolts designed for restraining cable service and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement 2 3 FACTORY FINISHES A Finish Manufacturer s standard paint applied to factory assembled and tested equipment before shipping Powder coating on springs and housings All hardware shall be galvanized Hot dip galvanize metal components for exterior use Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use Color code or otherwise mark vibration isolati
35. patching compound to repair concrete substrates 1 Basis of Design Skim Coat and Patch by Custom Building Products www custombuildingproducts com 2 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com 3 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A Waterproofing Membrane Liquid applied waterproofing membrane complying with ANSI A118 12 for all waterproofing applications indicated Membrane to tie into drain flanges and shall be flashed up perimeter walls and in field penetrations to form a waterproofed area 1 Basis of Design RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane by Custom Building Products www custombuildingproducts com 2 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com c MAPEI Corporation www mapei com 3 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A High Performance Crack Isolation Membrane Asphaltic self adhering membrane complies with ANSI A118 12 for repair of all cracks per manufacturers written instructions Provide full field application where indicated Crack isolation membrane shall allow relaoction of saw cut control contraction and cold joints to the nearest grout joint as per TCNA F125 partial 1 Thickness 30 mils minimum 2 Basis of Design CrackBuster Pro by Custom Building Products
36. rE i _ a i _ _ Ee i La La mal February 7 2014 230925 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 End of Section 23 09 25 BAS Input Output Schedules February 7 2014 230925 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 232113 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A B 1 2 C D DESCRIPTION Section Includes Pipe and Pipe Fittings for 1 Auxiliary cooling condenser water 2 Drain pipe for AC unit condensate water source heat pumps Related Sections 1 Mechanical General Provisions Section 23 05 00 2 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 23 05 00 SUBMITTALS Submit product data for each product specified in this section See 23 05 00 for additional general requirements Prepare shop drawings not smaller than 1 4 1 0 scale showing the piping and equipment in mechanical rooms including air handling equipment rooms include floor plans and sections or isometric views These drawings may be either separate from or combined with the coordinated layouts of air handling equipment and ducts in mechanical equipment rooms specified under shop drawings in the Air Distribution Section but in either case the piping shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work permit access for maintenance and make proper connections to the equipment that is to be in
37. roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length O Install pull wires in empty raceways Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb 90 kg tensile strength Leave at least 12 inches 300 mm of slack at each end of pull wire Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use P Surface Raceways 1 Install surface raceway with a minimum 2 inch 50 mm radius control at bend points 2 Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches 1200 mm and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section Support surface raceway according to manufacturer s written instructions Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods Q Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound For concealed raceways install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70 R Expansion Deflection Joint Fittings February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 3 4 1 Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F 55 deg C
38. standard weight seamless steel pipe with threaded ends D Uncoated Steel Couplings ASTM A 865 threaded E Uncoated Gray lron Threaded Fittings ASME B16 4 Class 125 standard pattern F Malleable or Ductile lron Unions UL 860 G Cast Iron Flanges ASME 16 1 Class 125 H Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings ASME B16 5 Class 150 l Steel Welding Fittings ASTM A 234 A 234M and ASME B16 9 J Grooved Joint Steel Pipe Appurtenances 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Anvil International Inc b Corcoran Piping System Co C National Fittings Inc d Shurjoint Piping Products e Tyco Fire amp Building Products LP f Victaulic Company 2 Pressure Rating 175 psig 1200 kPa minimum or 300 psig 2070 kPa as required 3 Galvanized and Uncoated Grooved End Fittings for Steel Piping ASTM A 47 A 47M malleable iron casting or ASTM A 536 ductile iron casting with dimensions matching steel pipe 4 Grooved End Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated for steel pipe dimensions Include ferrous housing sections EPDM rubber gasket and bolts and nuts K Steel Pressure Seal Fittings UL 213 FM approved 175 psig 1200 kPa pressure rating with steel housing rubber O rings and pipe stop for use with fittin
39. stranded for No 8 AWG and larger 3 2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A Conceal cables in finished walls ceilings and floors unless otherwise indicated B Type MC cable above accessible ceilings February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 i Not more than 6 feet length as final connection to a luminaire 2 May be spliced in overhead boxes dropped into and routed concealed in walls to serve receptacles and other wall mounted devices May be routed horizontally concealed in walls to serve other receptacles and wall mounted devices C Type MC cables shall not be used as feeders homerun branch circuits or branch circuits between boxes above accessible ceilings Cable shall not be routed exposed and or surface mounted 1 Type MC cable may be used as branch circuits below raised floors D Use manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation Do not exceed manufacturer s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values E Use pulling means including fish tape cable rope and basket weave wire cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway F Do not install cables exposed G Identify and color code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems 3 3 CONNE
40. suit application to rigidly secure materials in place PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence Examine areas and substrates with Installer present and including welded hollow metal frames and framing for compliance with requirements and other conditions February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B C Examine panels before installation Reject panels that are wet moisture damaged and mold damaged Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A Shaft Wall Framing Install in accordance with manufacturer s installation instructions 1 Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side using appropriate power driven fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center 2 Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements Shaft Wall Liner Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs 1 On walls over sixteen feet high screw attach studs to runners top and bottom 2 Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant 3 3 FRAMING INSTALLATION A B Metal Framing Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer s instructions Suspended Ceilings and Soffits Space framing and furri
41. types recommended by flooring manufacturer C Moldings Transition and Edge Strips Same material as flooring PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring clean dry and free of curing compounds surface hardeners and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate B Verify that sub floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring C Verify that concrete sub floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710 obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer 1 Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing Perform tests recommended by manufacturer Proceed February 7 2014 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D with installation only after substrates pass testing 2 Moisture Testing Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing a Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes ASTM F 2170 Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75
42. 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 THIS PAGE BLANK FOR PRINTING February 7 2014 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 238146 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of water source heat pumps 1 Concealed horizontal or vertical units 6 tons and smaller ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data Include rated capacities furnished specialties and accessories for each model Shop Drawings Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions weights loads required clearances method of field assembly components and location and size of each field connection 1 Wiring Diagrams Power signal and control wiring CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data For water source heat pumps to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals QUALITY ASSURANCE Product Options Drawings indicate size profiles and dimensional requirements of water source heat pumps and are based on the specific system indicated Refer to Division 01 Section Product Requirements Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable
43. 080 096 13 2 4 2 5 terminal unit of zone damper terminal unit links to corresponding AHU AHU links to secondary chilled water pumps boiler plant and chilled water plant All control logic shall request same as graphic links like zone temperature sensor shall request heat or cooling from corresponding terminal unit terminal unit shall request its source AHU AHU shall request its source chilled water pump Building load in Tons shall request chiller plant to produce chilled water Same as building load and outside condition shall request for boiler plant for heat CONTROLLERS Floors shall be controlled by DDC controllers which shall be stand alone multitasking multi user real time digital control processors modular type DDC controllers shall communicate peer to peer within network level In the event of the loss of normal power there shall be orderly shutdown of DDC controller to prevent the loss of database or operating system software Non volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum 48 hours Upon restoration of normal power the DDC controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention If any reason DDC controller loose memory the system shall automatically reload the DDC controller from database server via network The DDC controller shall have an addit
44. 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 EXAMINATION Examine fuses before installation Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance such as rejection features Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected FUSE APPLICATIONS Cartridge Fuses 1 Motor Branch Circuits Class RKS time delay Other branch circuits Class RK1 time delay INSTALLATION Install fuses in fusible devices Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse IDENTIFICATION Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block socket and holder END OF SECTION 262813 February 7 2014 FUSES 262813 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3
45. 1 Supply Air Ducts Flexible elastomeric 1 inch thick 2 Return Air Ducts Flexible elastomeric 1 inch thick F Elbow Configuration 1 Rectangular Duct Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 2 Rectangular Elbows a Velocity 1000 fom 5 m s or Lower 1 Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0 5 radius to diameter ratio 2 Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm 5 to 7 6 m s 1 Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1 0 radius to diameter ratio 2 Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0 5 radius to diameter ratio and two vanes 3 Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 3 Vanes and Vane Runners and Figure 4 4 Vane Support in Elbows Velocity 1500 fpm 7 6 m s or Higher 1 Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1 5 radius to diameter ratio 2 Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1 0 radius to diameter ratio and two vanes 3 Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 3 Vanes and Vane Runners and Figure 4 4 Vane Support in Elbows 2 Rectangular Duct Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 2 Rectangular Elbows a b C Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1 5 radius to diameter ratio Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1 0 radius to diameter ratio and two vanes Mitered Typ
46. 1 The vertical cable manger shall be double sided 2 The vertical cable manager shall provide support for patch cords at the front of the rack and wire management at the rear of the rack 3 The vertical cable manager shall be a minimum width of 6 a Vertical Cable Manager color shall be gray 2 4 LADDER RACKS A Ladder Rack System 1 See Drawings for ladder rack system details 2 The ladder rack system shall be securely mounted with hardware designed for use in ladder rack systems 3 End caps shall be installed on the exposed ends of the ladder racks channel supports and bolts Protective covers shall be installed on threaded rods that come in contact with cabling plant a Ladder Rack System color shall be gray 2 5 VELCRO STRAPS A Velcro Straps 1 All cables shall be fastened to support structures with Velcro straps a Velcro Strap color shall be black 2 6 C RINGS D RINGS A C Rings D rings 1 C rings D rings shall be used on backboards to support cables patch cords and cross connect wire 2 C rings D rings shall be made of high strength fire retardant material with rounded edges to prevent damage to cable and wire insulation 2 7 LADDER RACK DROP OUT SHIELD A Ladder Rack Drop Out Shield 1 Ladder rack drop out shield used to protect cables as they are routed from ladder rack to equipment rack shall be custom made by Star Sheet Metal 214 438 5056 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CABLE MANAGEMENT HORIZONTAL
47. 1 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Fusible switches Nonfusible switches Molded case circuit breakers MCCBs Molded case switches Enclosures Oi at it DEFINITIONS NC Normally closed NO Normally open SPDT Single pole double throw ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of enclosed switch circuit breaker accessory and component indicated Include dimensioned elevations sections weights and manufacturers technical data on features performance electrical characteristics ratings accessories and finishes Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250 Type 1 Current and voltage ratings Short circuit current ratings interrupting and withstand as appropriate Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices Detail features characteristics ratings and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices accessories and auxiliary components Include time current coordination curves average melt for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device aPonN gt D Shop Drawings For enclosed switches and circuit breakers Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to o
48. 2 1 2 gallon capacity designed to meet the pressure requirements of each specific system Feeder shall be rated for 250 psi service and shall be supplied complete with quarter turn cap 3 1 2 opening fill valve inlet valve air vent cock and outlet valve A separate feeder shall be supplied for each system The feeder size shall be as required based on the water content of each system Each feeder shall be equipped with a filament polyester filter bag capable of removing solids of 5 microns Provide six replacement bags Water Treatment Chemicals Furnish an initial supply of the recommended formula for scale and corrosion protection of the new portion of the closed re circulating condenser water system Formulation shall not contain any ingredients which are harmful to system materials of construction Chemicals shall be in liquid form Testing Furnish basic test kit to test for corrosion inhibitor level in each closed loop system complete with carrying case and reagents PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 3 2 A B C A INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer s and water treatment company instructions See Section 23 05 00 for additional general requirements Provide all piping valves fittings equipment accessories chemicals and service necessary to provide a complete and operable water treatment system and water treatment program WATER MANAGEMENT PROGRAM AND CHEMICAL SUPPLY The water treatment c
49. 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Section Includes 1 2 Close coupled in line centrifugal pumps Alignment of separately coupled horizontally mounted in line centrifugal pumps 1 2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of pump B Shop Drawings For each pump 1 Show pump layout and connections 2 Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages 3 Include diagrams for power signal and control wiring 1 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and maintenance data PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CLOSE COUPLED IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A Description Factory assembled and tested centrifugal overhung impeller close coupled in line pump as defined in HI 1 1 1 2 and HI 1 3 designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically B Pump Construction 1 2 5 Casing Radially split cast iron with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet replaceable bronze wear rings and threaded companion flange connections Impeller ASTM B 584 cast bronze statically and dynamically balanced keyed to shaft and secured with a locking cap screw For constant speed pumps trim impeller to match specified performance Pump Shaft Stainless steel Seal Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless steel spring and Buna N bellows and gasket Inc
50. 264313 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes 1 Interior lighting fixtures lamps and ballasts 2 Emergency lighting units 3 Exit signs 4 Lighting fixture supports DEFINITIONS BF Ballast factor CCT Correlated color temperature CRI Color rendering index HID High intensity discharge LER Luminaire efficacy rating Lumen Measured output of lamp and luminaire or both Luminaire Complete lighting fixture including ballast housing if provided ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of lighting fixture arranged in order of fixture designation Include data on features accessories finishes and the following Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions Ballast including BF Energy efficiency data Life output lumens CCT and CRI and energy efficiency data for lamps a Manufacturer Certified Data Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer s laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products PON Installation instructions February 7
51. 270000 Communications 270510 Fire Stopping for Communications Systems 270528 Pathways for Communications Systems 270553 Identification for Communication Systems 271116 Cabinets Racks and Enclosures 271119 Communications Terminations Blocks and Batch Panels 271123 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Racks 271126 Communications Rack Mounted Power Strips 271313 Communications Copper Backbone 271323 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 Fire Alarm System DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Not Used DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Not Used DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Not Used END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS February 7 2014 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 Table of Contents 000010 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 011000 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 PROJECT A Project Name 25 Park Place Phase 2 B Owner s Name Georgia State University C Architect s Name Heery International Inc 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A Scope of demolition and removal work is shown
52. 66 inches in the rear All equipment racks cabinets shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar E Mounting screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation 3 2 BACKBOARDS A Backboards shall be 3 4 void free plywood Size of backboard shall be 4 x 8 unless noted differently on Drawings Backboards shall be painted with two 2 coats of gray fire retardant paint 3 3 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 270553 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 CABINETS RACKS AND ENCLOSURES 271116 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271119 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATIONS BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B This section describes the products and specification requirements for Telecommunications Rooms TR Blocks and Patch Panels C Product specifications general design considerations and installation guidelines are provided in this document Locations of telecommunications equipment and typical installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document If the bid documents are in conflict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or e
53. 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Sound Rated Door Frames Knock down type 1 Grade Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250 8 for Level 1 16 gage 2 Sound Rating Tested with the door to achieve the rating specified for the door opening Mullions for Pairs of Doors Fixed except where removable is indicated of profile similar to jambs Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights Construction and face dimensions to match door frames and as indicated on drawings 2 4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A Silencers Resilient rubber fitted into drilled hole 3 on strike side of single door 3 on center mullion of pairs and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions Removable Stops Formed sheet steel shape as indicated on drawings mitered or butted corners prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws Grout for Frames Portland cement grout of maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling thinner pumpable grout is prohibited Temporary Frame Spreaders Provide for all factory or shop assembled frames used for shipping purpose only 2 5 FINISH MATERIALS A B Primer Rust inhibiting complying with ANSI A250 10 door manufacturer s standard Bituminous Coating Asphalt emulsion or other high build water resistant resilient coating PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A E Verify existing conditions before star
54. A Horizontal cable managers shall be installed below patch panels in a 1 1 ratio one horizontal cable manager per patch panel or as indicated on Drawings 3 2 CABLE MANAGEMENT VERTICAL A Vertical cable managers shall be installed on both sides of a single equipment rack Where two 2 or more racks are positioned in a row vertical cable managers shall be installed between each rack and each end of the row February 7 2014 Communications Cable Management amp Ladder Racks 271123 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 LADDER RACKS A Ladder rack system shall be installed straight level and perpendicular to walls and ceiling slabs B Ladder racks shall be supported at 5 intervals maximum Provide all hardware accessories fasteners anchors threaded rods and support channels required to provide a complete ladder rack system D See Drawings for ladder rack system details 3 4 VELCRO STRAPS Velcro straps shall be installed around cables at intervals of 12 minimum B Do not over cinch cables 3 5 C RINGS D RINGS A C ring D rings shall be installed on 3 4 backboard straight and level 3 6 LADDER RACK DROP OUT SHIELD A Install in ladder rack above equipment racks to support cables as they are routed from the ladder rack to the equipment rack 3 7 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 270553 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 Communications Cable Management am
55. ASTM C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members 2009a ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 2006 ASTM C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products 2009a ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 2008 ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0 033 in 0 84 mm to 0 112 in 2 84 mm in Thickness 2010 ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2007 K ASTM C1396 C1396M Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2009a M N O ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements 2009 ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2010 GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Gypsum Association 2010 GA 600 Fire Resistance Design Manual Gypsum Association 2009 1 4 SUBMITTALS A B C See Section 013000 Adminis
56. AWS D1 1 D1 1M Fastener System Installation 1 Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured Use operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer Install fasteners according to powder actuated tool manufacturer s operating manual 2 Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured Install fasteners according to manufacturer s written instructions Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments inserts bolts rods nuts washers and other accessories Equipment Support Installation Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints expansion loops expansion bends and similar units January 31 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 G Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying H Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel Install additional attachments at concentrated loads including valves flanges and strainers and at changes in direction of piping Install c
57. Air Control Damper in Insulated Metal Casing Volume regulation within 5 percent between 0 5 and 6 0 inches static pressure water gage The primary air device shall provide shut off with a leakage rate not over 2 at 1 S P or 4 of the rated CFM at 3 S P for 1 800 CFM and smaller units and not over 6 at 3 S P for larger units F Unit shall be double wall construction with 1 thick dual density glass fiber insulation G Housing 20 gauge minimum galvanized sheet metal Seal all joints H The sound ratings are a requirement for submission Selected size units as furnished on this project shall be tested in an independent testing laboratory Unit maximum radiated sound power levels as published by manufacturer shall not exceed the following with 1 5 inch inlet static pressure and design primary airflow 0 25 inch downstream static pressure Sound Power Levels Octave CFM Band Hz 600 1000 1500 1800 125 63 64 65 69 250 57 60 62 64 500 51 52 57 56 1000 45 48 52 51 2000 44 49 52 51 l Electric Heaters 1 Heaters are to be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code 2 Heaters shall have 80 nickel 20 chromium resistance coils Coils shall be supported by ceramic bushings recessed and staked into embossed openings in supporting brackets Coils shall be machine crimped into stainless steel terminals which are insulated with high temperature phenolic or ceramic bushings 3
58. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series Code for Pressure Piping 2 Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current C Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services circuit breakers and conduit sizes are appropriately modified If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified equipment shall comply with requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS A Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe tube and fitting materials and joining methods B Pipe Threads ASME B1 20 1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings 2 2 JOINING MATERIALS A Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below B Pipe Flange Gasket Materials ASME B16 21 nonmetallic flat asbestos free 1 8 inch 3 2 mm maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated C Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket Bolts and Nuts Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated
59. D Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of fire stopping specified in Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 2 2 A A SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES Sleeves for Rectangular Openings Galvanized sheet steel 1 Minimum Metal Thickness a For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches 1270 mm and no side more than 16 inches 400 mm thickness shall be 0 052 inch 1 3 mm b For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter equal to or more than 50 inches 1270 mm and 1 or more sides equal to or more than 16 inches 400 mm thickness shall be 0 138 inch 3 5 mm GROUT Nonmetallic Shrinkage Resistant Grout ASTM C 1107 factory packaged nonmetallic aggregate grout noncorrosive nonstaining mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working time PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A Comply with NECA 1 B Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall mounting items C Headroom Maintenance If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with thes
60. D Solder Filler Metals ASTM B 32 lead free alloys Include water flushable flux according to ASTM B 813 E Brazing Filler Metals AWS A5 8 BCuP Series or BAg1 unless otherwise indicated F Welding Filler Metals Comply with AWS D10 12 G Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping E CPVC Piping ASTM F 493 2 PVC Piping ASTM D 2564 Include primer according to ASTM F 656 2 3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A Description Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded solder joint plain or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials B Insulating Material Suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature C Dielectric Unions Factory fabricated union assembly for 250 psig 1725 kPa minimum working pressure at 180 deg F 82 deg C February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Dielectric Flanges Factory fabricated companion flange assembly for 150 or 300 psig 1035 or 2070 kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures E Dielectric Couplings Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining threaded ends and 300 psig 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 225 deg F 107 deg C Ps Dielectric Nipples Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining plain threaded or grooved ends and 300 psig 2070 kP
61. Do not support pathways from ductwork piping or equipment hangers Install cable tray level and straight Provide all hardware accessories fasteners anchors threaded rods and support channels required to provide a complete cable tray system Cable trays shall not be used to house both low voltage and power cables unless cables are separated by a grounded physical barrier Cable tray system shall be grounded in accordance with J STD 607 A 3 6 CABLE HANGERS A Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of the current revision levels of ANSI EIA TIA Standards 568 amp 569 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code applicable local codes and to the manufacturer s installation instructions B Install cables using techniques practices and methods that are consistent with Category 6 or higher requirements and that supports Category 6 or higher performance of completed and linked Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 signal paths end to end C Install cables without damaging conductors shield or jacket D Do not bend cables in handling or in installing to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer E Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer s recommended pulling tensions Use pulling means that will not damage media F Do not exceed load ratings specified by manufacturer G Adjus
62. February 7 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Conduit and Cable Support Devices Steel and malleable iron hangers clamps and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported C Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit Factory fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits Plugs shall have number size and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported Body shall be malleable iron D Mounting Anchoring and Attachment Components Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following 1 Mechanical Expansion Anchors Insert wedge type zinc coated steel for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used a Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 Cooper B Line Inc a division of Cooper Industries 2 Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co Inc 3 Hilti Inc 4 ITW Ramset Red Head a division of Illinois Tool Works Inc 5 MKT Fastening LLC
63. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated 3 3 INSTALLATION A Equipment Grounding Conductors Route within feeder and branch circuit conduits and within Type MC cable B Bonding Straps and Jumpers Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit 1 Bonding to Structure Bond straps directly to basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts 2 Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment 3 4 LABELING A Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems Article for instruction signs The label or its text shall be green February 7 2014 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections B Tests and Inspections 1 After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized test for compliance with requirements 2 Inspect physical and mechanical condition Verify tightness of acc
64. L SPIB GR Grading Rules Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Inc 2002 M WWPA G 5 Western Lumber Grading Rules Western Wood Products Association 2011 February 7 2014 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 4 SUBMITTALS A B See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Product Data Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions Samples For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view submit five samples illustrating wood grain color and general appearance Manufacturer s Certificate Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A General Cover wood products to protect against moisture Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation Fire Retardant Treated Wood Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping storage or installation 1 6 WARRANTY A See Section 017800 Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Dimension Lumber Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies 1 If no species is specified provide any species graded by the agency specified if no grading agency is specified provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the spe
65. Max setpoints Unoccupied Night setback set up temperature setpoints Fan Speed Min MaxAirflow Primary Airflow setpoint for pressurization mode Provide read and reset of controller via either connection at the space sensor or unit controller Provide graphic showing all monitored and controlled points Provide table showing all units on each floor INDUCTION UNITS February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 A Modulate new control valve to maintain space temperature Monitor leaving air temperature B With secondary system in heating mode valve modulates open to maintain heating setpoint G With secondary system in cooling mode valve modulates open to maintain cooling setpoint D In unoccupied mode operate to maintain night setback and set up temperature E Adjustable thru BAS Space Cooling Heating setpoints F Unit controller access via connection at either the space temperature sensor or unit controller G Provide graphic showing all monitored and controlled points Provide table showing all units on each floor Provide table with all units grouped vertically by orientation South West North NE and SE with AC 1 and AC 3 zone supply air temperature 3 7 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSING AT INDUCTION UNITS A Provide combination Temperature and RH sensors at five 5 locations on each floor with new induction unit valves installed B See Seco
66. Nordel seals brass cap and cap retainer strap D Rating 1000 psi at 270 deg F E Accessories Furnish pressure gauge adapters with probe two pressure gauges and two 1 min dia dial thermometers matched with the test plugs Furnish a tool box case with foam plastic cushion liner and a tube of silicon lubricant 2 5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A Description i Body material Cast iron 2 CWP rating 200 psig 3 Body configuration Tapped lugs suitable for drop tight shutoff for end of line service with the downstream flange extended neck 4 Body material ASTM A126 cast iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iro 5 Disc material stainless steel 6 Stem Stainless steel 7 Seat NBR 8 Operator hand lever 2 6 SWING CHECK VALVES A Description 1 Standard MSS SP 71 Type l 2 CWP Rating 200 psig 3 Body Design Clear or full waterway 4 Body Material ASTM A 126 gray iron with bolted bonnet 5 Ends Flanged 6 Trim Bronze re Gasket asbestos free 2 7 CHECK VALVES AT PUMPS A Manufacturers 1 APCO Series 6000 2 CPV 3 Metraflex 4 Mueller MUESSCO 105AP and 203BP 5 Nibco F910B and T480 6 Combination Pump Valve Co 20B B Description Class 150 iron globe center guided check Valves with metal seat non slam counterweighted or spring loaded February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Standard MSS SP 125 CWP
67. Over temperature Protection All heaters shall be furnished with one disk type automatic reset thermal cutout for primary over temperature protection All heaters shall also be furnished with a disk type load carrying manual reset thermal cutout factory wired in series with each heater stage for secondary protection 4 Heaters shall be rated for the voltage phase and number of heating stages indicated in the schedule All internal wiring shall be suitable for 105 degree C Fuses shall be provided in all heaters Heaters scheduled for voltages above 120V shall have control transformer with fused primary and secondary 5 Built in and wired factory installed controls shall include thermal cutouts airflow switch separate switch for each stage and built in unfused disconnect switch Two stage switches are not acceptable February 7 2014 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Install products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions B See Section 23 05 00 for additional general requirements C Install all air terminal units level and maintain clearances for normal service and maintenance as recommended by the manufacturer D Support all air terminal units from structure Do not support from adjacent work END OF SECTION 23 36 00 February 7 2014 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053
68. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPING MATERIALS A Comply with requirements in Piping Schedule Article for applications of pipe tube fitting materials and joining methods for specific services service locations and pipe sizes 2 2 HUBLESS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A Pipe and Fittings ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301 B CISPI Hubless Piping Couplings February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a ANACO Husky b Dallas Specialty amp Mfg Co C Fernco Inc d Matco Norca Inc e MIFAB Inc f Mission Rubber Company a division of MCP Industries Inc g Stant h Tyler Pipe 2 Standards ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310 3 Description Stainless steel corrugated shield with stainless steel bands and tightening devices and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop C Heavy Duty Hubless Piping Couplings 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a ANACO Husky b Clamp All Corp C Dallas Specialty amp Mfg Co d MIFAB Inc e Mission Rubber Company a division of MCP Industries I
69. PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Manufacturers Names Shortened versions shown in parentheses of the following manufacturers names are used in other Part 2 articles 1 Cooper Wiring Devices Division of Cooper Industries Inc Cooper 2 Hubbell Incorporated Wiring Device Kellems Hubbell 3 Leviton Mfg Company Inc Leviton 4 Pass amp Seymour Legrand Pass amp Seymour B Source Limitations Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer 2 2 GENERAL WIRING DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A Wiring Devices Components and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application B Comply with NFPA 70 2 3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A Convenience Receptacles 125V 20A Comply with NEMAWD1 NEMAWD6 Configuration 5 20R UL 498 and FS W C 596 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Cooper 5351 single CR5362 duplex b Hubbell HBL5351 single HBL5352 duplex c Leviton 5891 single 5352 duplex d Pass amp Seymour 5361 single 5362 duplex 2 4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A General Description 1 Straight blade feed through or non feed through type as indicated by the circuiting 2 Comply with NEMA WD 1 NEMA WD 6 UL 498 UL 943 Class A and FS W C 596 3 Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides
70. Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications 2008 ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2011 ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2010 ASTM D1667 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Poly Vinyl Chloride Foam Closed Cell 2005 Reapproved 2011 SCAQMD 1168 South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No 1168 current edition www aqmd gov 1 4 DEFINITIONS A Substrates 1 G Type Substrates Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets 2 A Type Substrates Metal porcelain glazed tile and smooth plastics 3 O Type Substrates Wood Unglazed tile substrates not included under other categories 1 5 SUBMITTALS A B F See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Product Data Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics with instructions for substrate preparation and installation Samples Submit five samples illustrating sealant colors for selection Substrate Test Report for each sealer Certificates For each sealant provide manufacturer s certificate stating that the product complies with the specifications and is appropriate for the use it is being put to Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special procedures 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site February 7 2014 JOINT SEALE
71. Qualifications Company specializing in performing tile installation with minimum of 5 years of documented experience Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality and appearance and physical properties from one source or producer for each contiguous area Obtain all installation from a single source manufacturer from one source or producer Obtain other products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product including 1 Thresholds 2 Metal Edge Strips 1 6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Static Coefficient of Friction For tile installed on walkway surfaces provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ATM C 1028 1 Level Surfaces Minimum 0 6 2 Ramps and Wet Areas Minimum 0 8 1 7 PRE INSTALLATION MEETING A Convene one week before starting work of this section 1 8 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A D Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use Comply with requirement in ANSI A137 1 for labeling sealed tile packages Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms under cover and in a dry location Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 1 9 FIELD CON
72. Rand 2 Characteristics a b Pivots to be high strength forged bronze with top pivot housing with spring activated bronze retracting pin Pivots to have tilt on bearing and bearing pin Center hung pivots to support doors up to 300 pounds Jamb portion of top center pivot to fit into a 1 3 4 header D Cylinders 1 Acceptable Manufacturers February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a Best Access Systems 2 Characteristics a Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required master grandmaster or great grandmaster either new or integrated with Owner s existing system Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable core pin tumbler inserts Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period and remove these when directed Furnish final cores and keys for installation by Owner Metals Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze stainless steel or nickel silver Comply with Owner s instructions for master keying and except as otherwise indicated provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer s key symbol and notation DO NOT DUPLICATE Key Material Provide keys of nickel silver only Key Quantity Furnish 3 change keys for each
73. Rating 200 psig Style globe spring loaded Body Material ASTM A 126 cast iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron Ends Flanged Disc bronze or cast iron Seat Bronze Spring if used stainless steel COO OTP GON 2 8 STRAINERS A Description Wye or Y style with threaded cap or flange for screen access 1 Material Cast iron ductile iron or cast steel 2 CWP Rating 200 psig B Acceptable Screen Material type and size brass monel or stainless steel perforated sheet metal screens with 3 64 inch diameter holes G Blowdown 1 2 inch shutoff valve with 3 4 capped hose end connection and chain 2 9 PRESSURE GAGES A Description 1 Bronze movement 2 Minimum accuracy 1 percent 3 Nonferrous case with blowout back 4 Maximum and minimum stops 5 4 1 2 inch dial face B Accessories provide 250 psi quarter turn brass gage cocks C Range 0 160 psi 2 10 AIR DIRT SEPARATOR A Manufacturer Spirotherm Spirovent B Description full flow coalescing type combination air eliminator and dirt separator with include two equal chambers above and below the inlet outlet nozzles C Construction fabricated steel rated for 150 psig working pressure registered for unfired pressure vessels under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 complete with a National Board stamp 1 Provide a removable lower head for internal inspection 2 Provide a valved side tap D Elements internal spirotu
74. Requirements for submittal procedures Product Data Provide manufacturers data sheets on tile mortar grout and accessories Include manufacturer s written instructions for installing tile grouts and adhesives Master Grade Certificates For each shipment type and composition of tile signed by tile manufacturer and Installer Shop Drawings Indicate tile layout patterns color arrangement perimeter conditions junctions with dissimilar materials control and expansion joints thresholds ceramic accessories and setting details Samples Mount tile and apply grout on five plywood panels minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern color variations and grout joint size variations Manufacturer s Certificate Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements Qualification Data For Installer Maintenance Data Include recommended cleaning methods cleaning materials stain removal methods and polishes and waxes Material Test Reports For each tile setting and grouting product 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series A118 Series A136 1 on site B Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products February 7 2014 TILE 093000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 specified in this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience Installer
75. SYSTEM 230923 18 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230924 BAS SEQUENCES PART 1 GENERAL not used PART 2 PRODUCTS not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A GENERAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION REQUIREMENTS Microprocessor based controls All control functions shall be microprocessor based unless otherwise specified All start stop schedules shall be through the BAS Separate electric electronic or electromechanical time clocks are not acceptable unless specified otherwise Fixed time Provide individual occupied unoccupied or start stop time for all new HVAC equipment and where specified in the Sequence of Operation Includes each of the following 1 Water Source Heat Pumps 2 Terminal Units 3 Air and Dirt Separator Pumps Alarms All analog inputs shall have high and low alarm points programmed to alarm at BAS Critical points shall be programmed to print out alarm conditions at any printer assigned by the BAS Operator Initially program to print out at the BAS Room If any piece of HVAC equipment is abnormally stopped it shall be treated as a critical alarm BAS operator shall have capability to assign alarm classification to any point A mismatch alarm shall be indicated whenever a mismatch condition exists between any associated BAS command and BAS status points Mismatch shall be treated as a general alarm Historical data All alarms shall be recorded in Historica
76. Sections 3 Permanent Split Capacitor or Shaded Pole Motors With oil immersed and sealed gear trains 4 Spring Return Motors Equip with an integral spiral spring mechanism where indicated Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments Size for running torque rating of 150 in x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in x Ibf 5 Electrical Connection 115 V single phase 60 Hz N Accessories February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Test and reset switches damper mounted 2 8 FLANGE CONNECTORS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Ductmate Industries Inc 2 Nexus PDQ Division of Shilco Holdings Inc 3 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Description roll formed factory fabricated slide on transverse flange connectors gaskets and components C Material Galvanized steel D Gage and Shape Match connecting ductwork 2 9 TURNING VANES A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Ductmate Industries Inc 2 Duro Dyne Inc 3 Elgen Manufacturing 4 METALAIRE Inc 5 SEMCO Incorporated 6 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel
77. Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 2 2 Rectangular Duct Longitudinal Seams for static pressure class applicable sealing requirements materials involved duct support intervals and other provisions in SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible D Elbows Transitions Offsets Branch Connections and Other Duct Construction Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Chapter 4 Fittings and Other Construction for static pressure class applicable sealing requirements materials involved duct support intervals and other provisions in SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 2 2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A General Material Requirements Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible for acceptable materials material thicknesses and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting seam marks roller marks stains discolorations and other imperfections B Galvanized Sheet Steel Comply with ASTM A 653 A 653M 1 Galvanized Coating Designation G90 2 Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View Mill phosphatized February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Factory or Shop Applied Antimicrob
78. Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members Material ASTM A653 A653M steel sheet SS Grade 50 340 with G60 Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating Provide components UL listed for use in UL listed fire rated head of partition joint systems indicated on drawings Deflection and Firestop Track a Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire rating of the wall assembly b Acceptable Products 1 Posi Clip by Fire Trak Corporation 2 The System by Metal Lite Inc Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings minimum track length of 12 feet 2 3 BOARD MATERIALS A Manufacturers Gypsum Based Board OaRONs Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC www gp com gypsum Lafarge North America Inc www lafargenorthamerica com National Gypsum Company www nationalgypsum com Temple Inland Inc www templeiniand com USG Corporation www usg com Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements B Wallboard Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396 C 1396M sizes to minimize joints in place ends square cut 1 2 3 Application Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings unless otherwise indicated At Assemblies Indicated with Fire Rating Use type required by indicated tested assembly if no tested assembly is indicated use Type X board UL or WH listed Thickness a Vertical Surface
79. Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 c Viracon Apogee Enterprises Inc www viracon com d Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements C Glass Ceramic Safety Glazing UL or WH listed as fire protection rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface applied film 1 2 20 Minute Fire Doors Hose stream test is not required Manufacturers O Keeffe s Inc SAFTI Division SAFTIFIRST SCHOTT North America Inc Pyran Platinum L laminated Fire Rated Ceramic Glass SCHOTT North America Inc Pyran Star L laminated Fire Rated Ceramic Glass Vetrotech Saint Gobain North America Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements oaoop 2 4 LAMINATED BUTT GLAZING A Laminated Butt Glazing Materials 1 2 3 Glass laminated with 0 030 inch thick plastic interlayer comply with ASTM C 1172 Comply with ASTM C 1036 Type I transparent flat Class 1 clear Quality Q3 glazing select and ASTM C 1048 Thickness 3 4 inch nominal thickness a Outer Pane 1 4 tinted tempered glass tint color as selected 1 Daylight Transmittance 68 percent 2 Outside Reflectance 7 percent maximum 3 Nighttime Winter U Value 1 02 BTU hour square foot maximum 4 Shading Coefficient 59 maximum 5 Light to Solar gain LSG 1 34 b Inner Pane 1 2 inch clear tempered glass 1 Comply with ASTM C 1036 Type I transpare
80. University GSU 080 096 13 compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure glazing stops on opposite side of glazing 2 6 GLAZING SEALANTS A General 1 Compatibility Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact including glass products seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range Glazing Sealant Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 100 50 Use NT 1 Acceptable Manufacturers Dow Corning Corporation 790 GE Advanced Materials Silicones SilPruf LM SCS2700 May National Associates Inc Bondaflex Sil 290 Pecora Corporation 890 Sika Corporation Construction Products Division SikaSil C990 Tremco Incorporated Spectrem 1 g Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 P
81. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory handwritten directories are not acceptable C Panelboard Nameplates Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections 1 Manufacturer s Field Service Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect components assemblies and equipment installations including connections and to assist in testing B Acceptance Testing Preparation 1 Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus component connecting supply feeder and control circuit 2 Test continuity of each circuit C Tests and Inspections 1 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Certify compliance with test parameters 2 Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance otherwise replace with new units and retest February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections E Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies panelboards included Include notation of deficiencies detected remedial action taken and observations after remed
82. Valve Sizes Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated Valve Actuator Types 1 Handlever For quarter turn valves NPS 6 and smaller Valves in Insulated Piping With 2 inch stem extensions and the following features 1 Flow Measuring Balancing and Shutoff Valve FMBV With extended operating handle of non thermal conductive material and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation 2 Ball Valves With extended operating handle of non thermal conductive material and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation Valve End Connections 1 Solder Joint With sockets according to ASME B16 18 2 Threaded With threads according to ASME B1 20 1 Valve Bypass and Drain Connections MSS SP 45 FLOW MEASURING BALANCING AND SHUTOFF VALVE FMBV 4 and Smaller 1 Manufacturers a Tour Anderson b Nibco Figure 1710 G Mepco Model MBV d Armstrong ABV 2 Description and features February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Calibrated port Shut off valve Gage connections with integral check valves Multi turn handwheel Quarter turn valve not acceptable Valve position indicator Memory stop allows shut off and return to set position without measurement woan Body material Bronze
83. WOOD CASEWORK 064100 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 078400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Firestopping systems 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Gypsum wallboard fireproofing 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A nmo QW G ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2011 ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops 2011a ITS DIR Directory of Listed Products Intertek Testing Services NA Inc current edition FM 4991 Approval of Firestop Contractors Factory Mutual Research Corporation 2001 FM P7825 Approval Guide Factory Mutual Research Corporation current edition SCAQMD 1168 South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No 1168 current edition www aqmd gov UL FRD Fire Resistance Directory Underwriters Laboratories Inc current edition 1 4 SUBMITTALS A B roo mm oO See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Schedule of Firestopping List each type of penetration fire rating of the penetrated assembly and firestopping test or design number Schedule of Smokestopping List each type of penetration to be sealed indicating location construction of penetrated assembly identification of penetration seal to be used and design number Pro
84. Wall mounted stainless steel finish push button actuated 8 0 GPH of 50 deg F water at 90 deg F ambient air temperature Cooler Oasis P8AM Other approved manufacturers Halsey Taylor Elkay Haws Sunroc Trap shall be 1 17 gauge adjustable P traps with cleanout and wall plate Exposed surfaces shall be polished chrome Manufacturers Brass Craft McGuire EBC or Watts D Plumbing Fixtures Notes February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Approved manufacturers for plumbing fixtures Kohler American Standard TOTO Crane Eljer Elkay Just Bradley Acorn or as specified in the schedule above PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine roughing in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation B Examine cabinets counters floors and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Assemble plumbing fixtures trim fittings and other components according to manufacturers written instructions B Install off floor supports affixed to building substrate for wall mounting fixtures 1 Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back outlet fixtures 2 Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixt
85. a dated and signed Satisfactory Test label to tested component 3 5 ADJUSTING A Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions Submit recording and tap settings as test results B Output Settings Report Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings 3 6 CLEANING A Vacuum dirt and debris do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning END OF SECTION 262200 February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes 1 Distribution panelboards 2 Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards DEFINITIONS SVR Suppressed voltage rating TVSS Transient voltage surge suppressor ACTION SUBMITTALS Product
86. a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer Installation with Pressure Glazing Stops Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket Install dense compression gaskets and pressure glazing stops applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops 3 6 MANUFACTURER S FIELD SERVICES A B Glass product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions 3 7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations If despite such protection contaminating substances do come into contact with glass remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer Remove and replace glass that is broken chipped cracked or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes accidents and vandalism during construction period Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion Wash gl
87. adjust to six times the motor nameplate full load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times allowing for motor cooldown between starts If tripping occurs on motor inrush adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping Do not exceed eight times the motor full load amperes or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor notify Owner before increasing settings 3 7 DEMONSTRATION A Train Owner s maintenance personnel to adjust operate and maintain enclosed controllers END OF SECTION 232913 February 7 2014 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232913 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 232923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION A This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency motor Drive VFD consisting of a pulse width modulated PWM inverter designed for use with a standard NEMA Design B induction motor B The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary options as herein specified The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum of twenty years VFD s that are manufactured by a third party and brand labeled shall not be acceptable All VFDs installed on this project shall be from the same manufacturer 1 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A ee Stand
88. allowing use of network printers 4 Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre defined schedule and directed to CRT displays printers or disk As a minimum the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports AT in A general listing of all or selected points in the network List of all points currently in alarm List of all points currently in override status List of all disabled points List of all points currently locked out List of user accounts and access levels List all weekly schedules List of holiday programming List of limits and deadbands Excel reports System diagnostic reports including list of DDC panels on line and communicating status of all DDC terminal unit device points List of programs 5 Scheduling and override Provide a graphical spreadsheet type format for simplification of time of day scheduling and overrides of building operations Schedules reside in both the PC workstation and DDC Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off line PC is not required to execute time scheduling Provide override access through menu selection or function key Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a minimum a Weekly schedules b Zone schedules minimum of 200 unique zones G Monthly calendars 6 Collection and Analysis of Historical Data a Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve February 7 2014 records of syst
89. and Top Rails of Guards a Uniform load of 50 Ibf ft applied in any direction b Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction c Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently 2 Infill of Guards a Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq ft b Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently 3 Glass Supported Railings Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Single Source Responsibility Work of this section shall be designed fabricated shipped and installed by a single source company that has specialized in ornamental handrails and railings with ten years minimum experience B Installer Qualifications Installation shall be performed by the fabricator or a company acceptable to the fabricator C Safety Glazing Labeling Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer Label shall indicate manufacturer s name type of glass thickness and safety glazing standard with which glass complies 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store products in manufacturer s unopened packaging until ready for installation B Store in a weather tight location and protect from corrosion distortion and other damage during delivery st
90. and debris from drains B After completing installation of exposed factory finished fixtures faucets and fittings inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes 3 7 PROTECTION A Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings B Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner END OF SECTION 224000 February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 224716 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Section includes pressure water coolers and related components 1 2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of pressure water cooler B Shop Drawings Include diagrams for power wiring 1 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Maintenance Data For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS A Pressure Water Coolers Wall Mounted wheelchair accessible 1 2 000 10 OTP Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following Basis of Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements provide product by one of the following a Tri Palm International LLC Oasis Brand b Tri Palm International LLC Sunroc Brand Standards a Comply with NSF 61 b Comply with ASHRAE 34 Designation and Safety Classification of Refriger
91. and final reports to the CxA Plan shall include the following 1 Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning flushing hydrostatic testing and chemical treatment plan Description of equipment for flushing operations Minimum flushing water velocity Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned flushed hydrostatically tested and chemically treated AON HVAC amp R Distribution System Testing Provide technicians instrumentation tools and equipment to test performance of air steam and hydronic distribution systems special exhaust and other distribution systems including HVAC amp R terminal equipment and unitary equipment END OF SECTION 230800 February 7 2014 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230923 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL GENERAL The building Automation System BAS contractor shall provide a fully integrated direct digital control DDC system with software based on existing ser
92. and that has straight run length that exceeds 100 feet 30 m 2 Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations 3 Install fitting s that provide expansion and contraction and deflection for at least 0 00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F 0 06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C of temperature change for PVC conduits Install fitting s that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0 000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F 0 0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C of temperature change for metal conduits 4 Install expansion deflection fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints 5 Install each expansion deflection joint fitting with position mounting and piston setting selected according to manufacturer s written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement Flexible Conduit Connections Comply with NEMA RV 3 Use a maximum of 72 inches 1830 mm of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for transformers and motors 1 Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage 2 Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage Mount boxes at heigh
93. are installed in critical areas where air pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided 8 Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met NQaRON gt GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC s National Standards for Total System Balance and or NEBB s Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems and in this Section 1 Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 Section 7 2 2 Air Balancing Cut insulation ducts pipes and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures 1 After testing and balancing patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts 2 After testing and balancing install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section Air Duct Accessories 3 Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials Restore insulation coverings vapor barrier and finish according to Division 23 Section HVAC Insulation Mark equipment and balancing devices including damper control positions valve position indicators fan speed control levers and similar controls and devices with paint or other suitable permanent identification material to show final settings Take an
94. arranged to activate before switch blades open 7 MCP Disconnecting Means a UL 489 NEMA AB 1 and NEMA AB 3 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents instantaneous only circuit breaker with front mounted field adjustable short circuit trip coordinated with motor locked rotor amperes b Lockable Handle Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position Cc Auxiliary contacts a and b arranged to activate with MCP handle 8 MCCB Disconnecting Means a UL 489 NEMA AB 1 and NEMA AB 3 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents thermal magnetic MCCB with inverse time current element for low level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits b Front mounted adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger C Lockable Handle Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position d Auxiliary contacts a and b arranged to activate with MCCB handle February 7 2014 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232913 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 2 ENCLOSURES A Enclosed Controllers NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 2 3 ACCESSORIES A Push Buttons Pilot Lights and Selector Switches NEMA ICS 5 heavy duty type factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated B Control Relays Auxiliary and adjustable
95. authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect 1 6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and Maintenance Data For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data include the following 1 Comply with the Records Section of the Inspection Testing and Maintenance Chapter in NFPA 72 2 Provide Record of Completion Documents according to NFPA 72 article Permanent Records in the Records Section of the Inspection Testing and Maintenance Chapter 3 Record copy of site specific software 4 Provide Maintenance Inspection and Testing Records according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following a Frequency of testing of installed components b Frequency of inspection of installed components c Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance d Manufacturer s user training manuals 5 Manufacturer s required maintenance related to system warranty requirements 1 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project B Source Limitations for Fire Alarm System and Components Obtain fire alarm system from Simplex Grinnell Components shall be compatible with and operate as an extension of existing system C Electrical Components D
96. axis Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces Install units after above ceiling work is complete Install acoustical units level in uniform plane and free from twist warp and dents Cutting Acoustical Units 1 Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim 2 Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges Where round obstructions occur provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding Lay acoustical insulation for a distance of 48 inches either side of acoustical partitions as indicated Install hold down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system comply with fire rating requirements Install hold down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door 3 4 TOLERANCES A B Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface 1 8 inch in 10 feet Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads 2 degrees END OF SECTION February 7 2014 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B C Resilient tile flooring Resilient base Installation accessories 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 033000 Cast in Place Concrete Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Coverin
97. b AC 3 AC 4 and R 2 on the CR Level OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed Cc AC 5 AC 6 and R 4 on the SB Level OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed d Pumps P 6 and P 7 in the mechanical penthouse flow and total dynamic head motor amp draw voltage motor speed pump speed e Pumps P 9 and P 10 on the CR Level flow and total dynamic head motor amp draw voltage motor speed pump speed f Induction units floors 7 22 23 24 static pressure only g Traverse supply return and toilet exhaust air flow at each of floors 7 22 23 24 h Submit report of findings to Engineer within one month of award of contract T a 2 est adjust and balance after retro fit with VFD AC 1 AC 2 and R 1 in the mechanical penthouse OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed b AC 3 AC 4 and R 2 on the CR Level OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed c AC 5 AC 6 and R 4 on the SB Level OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed d Pumps P 6 and P 7 in the mechanical penthouse flow and total dynamic head motor amp draw voltage motor speed pump speed e Pumps P 9 and P 10 on the CR Level flow and total dynamic head motor amp draw voltage motor speed pump speed 3 See Fans amp Drives schedule sheet MM601 for ad
98. balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected C TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections If TAB Work fails proceed as follows 1 Recheck all measurements and make adjustments Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection 2 If the second final inspection also fails Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor s final payment D Prepare test and inspection reports 3 16 ADDITIONAL TESTS A Within 90 days of completing TAB perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions B Peak Season Perform both near peak summer and near peak winter conditions END OF SECTION 23 05 93 February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 14 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section includes insulating the following duct services 1 Indoor concealed supply air B Rel
99. base and wall surfaces Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces END OF SECTION February 7 2014 TILE CARPETING 096813 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B C Surface preparation Field application of paints and other coatings Scope Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view unless fully factory finished and unless otherwise indicated including the following 1 Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment Elevator pit ladders Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings Mechanical and Electrical a In finished areas paint all insulated and exposed pipes conduit boxes insulated and exposed ducts hangers brackets collars and supports mechanical equipment and electrical equipment unless otherwise indicated b On the roof and outdoors paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view including that which is factory finished c Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces aPpwpP Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items 1 Items fully factory finished unless specifically so indicated materials and pr
100. bronze alloy or dezincification brass Rating a Sweat connection 200 psig at 250 deg F b Threaded 400 psig at 250 deg F C Flanged 175 psig at 250 deg F Maximum pressure drop with valve wide open 1 psig at design flow Insulation a Provide molded insulation sized to match valve when used in chilled water system 2 3 BRONZE BALL VALVES A Three Piece Full Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following a Conbraco Industries Inc Apollo Valves b DynaQuip Controls Cc Hammond Valve d Milwaukee Valve Company e NIBCO INC f Red White Valve Corporation 2 Description a Standard MSS SP 110 b SWP Rating 150 psig Cc CWP Rating 600 psig d Body Design Three piece e Body Material Bronze f Ends Threaded g Seats PTFE or TFE h Stem Bronze i Ball Chrome plated brass j Port Full 2 4 TEST PLUGS A Manufacturers Flow Design Inc Superseal Peterson Engineering Sisco Trerice Universal Lanchester February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Description Plug suitable to accept 1 8 diameter thermometer stem or pressure gauge adapter Plug 1 4 male pipe thread by 2 3 4 long Plug for uninsulated pipe shall be 1 4 male pipe thread by 1 4 long C Material Brass body with dual
101. by other sections such as variable speed motor controller Start stop schedules Confirm all start stop schedules with Owner and CxA before final software set up Control action All modulating control action shall be proportional integral derivative unless specified otherwise Equipment valve and sensor identification Develop a system of names or acronyms for use in identifying equipment valves sensors etc that will allow easy BAS reference Identification used in this specification shall be used as a guide Time delays With all control functions provide the necessary time delays in software to allow equipment equipment controls or systems to respond to BAS commands Provide the necessary delays to allow dampers and valves to open prior to starting associated equipment Delay pump starting until associated valves have opened Delay fan starting until associated dampers have opened Multi stage Equipment For all multistage equipment especially electric heaters boilers and chillers provide analog or binary output for each stage or provide an analog output signal to allow each stage to be energized separately It is not acceptable to combine or group stages Motors with HOA 1 With HOA switch located on the motor starter in hand or on position motor shall operate subject to safeties in associated systems and shall not override safeties intended to protect the associated system or system components 2 In off position
102. cabling and typical installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document If the bid documents are in conflict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document SUBMITTALS Contractor shall provide submittals indicating the following Cable description Use of cable Product data Specifications outlining cable Testing and qualification data Samples approximately 12 in length DOU PcG N s WORK INCLUDED The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not The work shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Provide all Optical Fiber Backbone Cable Inside Plant 3 Furnish and install all Optical Fiber Connectors 4 Perform all Optical Fiber Splices 5 Provide all Splice Cases PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Optical Fiber Backbone Cable Inside Plant manufacturer s 1 Corning 2 Uniprise CommScope B Approved Optical Fiber Connectivity manufacturer s 1 Corning Part Number 95 050 41 X C Approved Splice Case manufacturer s February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 271323 1 25 Park Place
103. coordination drawings Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal Install piping at indicated slopes February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E F 3 2 3 3 Install piping free of sags and bends Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections Install seismic restraints on piping Comply with requirements for seismic restraint devices specified in ASCE SEI 7 Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches bends and long sweep bends Sanitary tees and short sweep 1 4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical Use long turn double Y branch and 1 8 bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe Straight tees elbows and crosses may be used on vent lines Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated 1 Building Sani
104. copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5 8 F Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1 20 1 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows i Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified 2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds G Welded Joints Construct joints according to AWS D10 12 using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 Quality Assurance Article H Flanged Joints Select appropriate gasket material size type and thickness for service application Install gasket concentrically positioned Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads l Plastic Piping Solvent Cement Joints Clean and dry joining surfaces Join pipe and fittings according to the following 1 Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners primers and solvent cements 2 CPVC Piping Join according to ASTM D 2846 D 2846M Appendix 3 PVC Pressure Piping Join schedule number ASTM D 1785 PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672 Join other than schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855 4 PVC Nonpressure Piping Join according to ASTM D 2855 J Plastic Pre
105. design considerations and installation guidelines are provided in this document Locations of backbone cabling and typical installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document If the bid documents are in conflict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Provide product data 1 3 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Provide all Copper Backbone Cable Inside Plant PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Copper Backbone Cable Inside Plant manufacturer s 1 Berk Tek 2 02 COPPER BACKBONE CABLE INSIDE PLANT A 100 Ohm Balanced Twisted Pair Building Backbone Cables Inside Plant 1 Generic Characteristics a The inside plant building backbone cable shall meet 100 Ohm balanced twisted pair backbone cable requirements per the latest issue of ANSI TIA EIA 568 C 2 b The inside plant 100 Ohm balanced twisted pair cable shall be CMP rated c The inside plant building backbone cable core shall consist of 25 pair sub units
106. else 3 6 INSTALLATION A Yellow or other pulling compound should be used if making long or difficult pulls to reduce cable drag B When pulling optical fiber cable by any mechanical device winch etc a dynamometer must be used to ensure the maximum tensile strength isn t exceeded C The mechanical pulling device will be equipped with clutches or shear pins to ensure this The fiber cable will be attached to the pull line via the strength member or mesh grip E At each end of a cable run approximately 5 meters of slack should be left for cable repairs connecting and moving of equipment Coil up and provide support of any slack fiber on top of the rack or in the designated fiber slack area of the telecommunications room 3 7 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTIVITY A Provide and install a duplex SC connector onto each pair of transmit receive strands of each end of each cable B Follow Manufacturers instructions for installing each connector C Leave a minimum of 5 0 of slack of each strand coiled carefully in patch panel tray 3 8 OPTICAL FIBER SPLICING A All splicing shall be of the fusion type made under Light Injection and Detection Mode whenever applicable The Contractor shall provide certified and experienced personnel for splicing B Contractor s tools and equipment shall be in excellent working order Any worn or improperly working tools shall be discarded and not used on this project All fusion splicers shall be cali
107. equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section Hydronic Piping for piping flexible connections 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing Agency Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Perform tests and inspections C Tests and Inspections i IRN Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device Measure isolator restraint clearance Measure isolator deflection D Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above E Prepare test and inspection reports 3 6 ADJUSTING A Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight B Adjust active height of spring isolators C Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation END OF SECTION 23 05 48 February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230553
108. fans are on low speed or when exhaust fans are Off such as nights and weekends but building supply must operate to maintain building pressure and space high or low limit temperature setpoints Cc Occupancy status shall be as scheduled by BAS operator During low occupancy periods outside air shall be controlled to low occupancy operator adjustable flow rate During normal occupancy periods outside air shall be controlled to normal occupancy operator adjustable flow rate d Adjust AFMS setpoint or mixing box static pressure setpoint to change from normal to low rates e Using measurements by the Test and Balance Contractor establish the static pressure differential and damper position that corresponds to the normal and low airflow f Setpoints for Outside Airflow Rates The setpoints for the outside airflow rates will be provided at a later date and shall be easily adjustable by BAS operator from graphic February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 3 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 D Fan Speed Control Duct Static and Building Static 1 Modulate variable speed drive to maintain the duct static pressure setpoint a For AC 2 duct static pressure will be sensed on each floor and fan discharge a For floors with Terminal Units installed 22 24 modulate smoke damper on each floor to maintain duct static pressure of 0 5 inches Provide auto setpoint adjustment based on dampers positi
109. filters All VFD s shall include EMI RFI filters The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800 3 for the First Environment restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable No Exceptions Certified test reports shall be provided with the submittals confirming compliance to EN 61800 3 First Environment All VFD s through 100 HP at 480 V shall be protected from input and output power mis wiring The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad The VFD shall not sustain damage from this power mis wiring condition OPTIONAL FEATURES Optional features to be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label 1 A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor per section 2 01K below BYPASS CONTROLLER 1 A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked padlockable circuit breaker output contactor bypass contactor and fast acting VFD input fuses are required UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes 2 The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such that the disconnecting device must be in the Off position before either enclosure may be accessed 3 The VFD and by
110. for screw fastening the sleeve to the board C Sleeves for Rectangular Openings February 7 2014 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Material Galvanized sheet steel 2 Minimum Metal Thickness a For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches 1270 mm and with no side larger than 16 inches 400 mm thickness shall be 0 052 inch 1 3 mm b For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter 50 inches 1270 mm or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches 400 mm thickness shall be 0 138 inch 3 5 mm 2 2 GROUT A Description Nonshrink recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non fire rated walls or floors B Standard ASTM C 1107 C 1107M Grade B post hardening and volume adjusting dry hydraulic cement grout C Design Mix 5000 psi 34 5 MPa 28 day compressive strength D Packaging Premixed and factory packaged 2 3 SILICONE SEALANTS A Silicone Sealants Single component silicone based neutral curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below 1 Grade Pourable self leveling formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated 2 Sealant shall have VOC content number in g L in support of LEED objectives Calculate according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 B Silicone Foams Multicomponent silicone
111. for telegraphing warp and squareness Maximum Vertical Distortion Bow 1 8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string top to bottom over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area Maximum Width Distortion Cup 1 8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string edge to edge over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area 3 4 ADJUSTING A B C Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement Adjust closers for full closure Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing END OF SECTION February 7 2014 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 SECTION INCLUDES A Wood doors stile and rail design B Panels of wood and glass RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 081213 Hollow Metal Frames B Section 087111 Door Hardware C Section 088000 Glazing D Section 099000 Interior Painting REFERENCE STANDARDS A AWI AWMAC QSI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 2005 8th Ed Version 2 0 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedur
112. has reached the maximum setting and all boxes are less than design airflow reset duct static pressure down in increments of 0 05 W C every ten minutes until any terminal unit damper is in the design airflow full open position Reverse sequence when any terminal unit airflow less than design with damper full open FIRE COMMAND CENTER and FLOOR DAMPER CONTROL Provide control of new smoke dampers on floors 7 and 24 from the Fire Command Center FCC as part of the Fire Alarm System FAS FCC is located in Lobby for fire fighter manual override of fan shutdown The FCC will enable the fire fighter to override the normal shutdown of the AHU systems to manually purge or pressurize floors Provide one static pressure sensor on each of floors 7 and 24 to monitor floor static pressure Measure floor static pressure relative to outside air The FCC is not intended to be an approved smoke control system as defined by International Code or NFPA Components and control devices used in the system shall have UUKL listing Wiring shall meet requirements for an approved smoke control system Control of fans AHUs and Dampers is through the BAS FCC receives input and sends signal to the BAS The FCC indicates system and equipment status Selector switch signals the BAS FCC shall include 1 Positive Negative Auto manual selector switch for each floor and 2 Lights showing status of AHUs fans 3 Outside air damper position relief air damper pos
113. in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A Cast Metal Outlet and Device Boxes Comply with NEMA FB 1 ferrous alloy Type FD with gasketed cover Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes NEMA OS 1 Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H Device Box Dimensions 4 inches square by 2 1 8 inches deep 100 mm square by 60 mm deep Gangable boxes are allowed where specifically indicated PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A Indoors Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated 1 Exposed Not Subject to Physical Damage EMT 2 Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage GRC Raceway locations include the following a Loading dock b Mechanical rooms Cc Gymnasiums d Riser conduits in shafts 3 Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions EMT 4 Connection to Vibrating Equipment Including Transformers and Hydraulic Pneumatic Electric Solenoid or Motor Driven Equipment FMC except use LFMC in damp or wet locations 5 Damp or Wet Locations GRC 6 Boxes and Enclosures NEMA 250 Type 1
114. indicated below 1 AAMA 806 3 tape for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure 2 AAMA 807 3 tape for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes Closed cell PVC foam tapes factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types 1 AAMA 810 1 Type 1 for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant 2 8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A General Provide products of material size and shape complying with referenced glazing standard requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation Cleaners Primers and Sealers Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer Setting Blocks Elastomeric material with a Shore Type A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5 Spacers Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated Edge Blocks Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement side walking Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing ASTM C 1330 Type O open cell material of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance 2 9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A F
115. is applied Apply each coat to uniform appearance Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors Regardless of number of coats specified apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes Tint fillers to match wood Work fillers into the grain before set Wipe excess from surface Reinstall electrical cover plates hardware light fixture trim escutcheons and fittings removed prior to finishing 3 4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A Refer to Section 220553 and Section 260553 for schedule of color coding of equipment duct work piping and conduit Paint shop primed equipment where indicated Remove unfinished louvers grilles covers and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately Finish equipment piping conduit and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated Reinstall electrical cover plates hardware light fixture trim escutcheons and fittings removed prior to finishing 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A See Section 014000 Quality Requirements for general requirements for field inspection B Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner d
116. itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive Comply with MIL A 24179A Type Il Class l 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Aeroflex USA Inc Aeroseal b Armacell LLC Armaflex 520 Adhesive C Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 85 75 d K Flex USA R 373 Contact Adhesive 2 For indoor applications adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 3 Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers MASTICS Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates comply with MIL PRF 19565C Type Il 1 For indoor applications use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 Vapor Barrier Mastic Water based suitable for indoor use on below ambient services 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 60 38 b Vimasco Corporation 749 2 Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 E 96M
117. labor and materials required for such deviations shall be furnished at the Contractor s expense H Verify the ceiling type ceiling suspension systems and clearance above hung ceilings prior to ordering cabling and associated hardware Provide compatible products for each ceiling type l Review all Drawings for modular furniture J Portions of these Drawings and Specifications are abbreviated and may include incomplete sentences Omissions of words or phrases such as the Contractor shall shall be as indicated on the Drawings In accordance with a the and all are intended shall be supplied by inference 1 7 SUBMITTALS February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Submit for approval details of all materials equipment and systems to be furnished Work shall not proceed without the Owner and or the Project Manager s approval of the submitted items Three 3 copies of the following shall be submitted 1 Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies that consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole Partial submittals will not be considered reviewed or stored and such submittals will not be returned except at the request and expense of the Contractor 2 Contractor shall generate shop Drawings Modify reviewed and accepted shop drawings to include revisions based upon completio
118. less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load Minimum Additional Travel 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load Lateral Stiffness More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness Overload Capacity Support 200 percent of rated load fully compressed without deformation or failure 6 Elastomeric Element Molded oil resistant rubber or neoprene Steel washer reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame 7 Self centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil oe Spring Hangers with Vertical Limit Stop Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical limit stop 1 Frame Steel fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency 2 Outside Spring Diameter Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load 3 Minimum Additional Travel 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load 4 Lateral Stiffness More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness 5 Overload Capacity Support 200 percent of rated load fully compressed without deformation or failure 6 Elastomeric Element Molded oil resistant rubber or neoprene 7 Adjustable Vertical Stop Steel washer with neoprene washer up stop
119. noise calculations for high transmission loss casings LEED Submittals 1 Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1 Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62 1 Section 5 Systems and Equipment 2 Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2 Documentation indicating that duct insulation R values comply with tables in ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Shop Drawings For duct accessories Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to other work February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction Include dimensions weights loads and required clearances and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction Include the following a Special fittings b Manual volume damper installations G Control damper installations d Fire damper smoke damper combination fire and smoke damper ceiling and corridor damper installations including sleeves and duct mounted access doors and remote damper operators e Duct security bars f Wiring Diagrams For power signal and control wiring PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 2 2 2 3 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible for acceptable materials material thicknesses and duc
120. not pass tests and inspections D Retain paragraph below if tests and inspections are performed by Contractor or manufacturer s field service representative engaged by Contractor 3 5 ADJUSTING A Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer END OF SECTION 262816 February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 264313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section includes field mounted SPD for low voltage 120 to 600 V power distribution and control equipment Manufacturers written instructions shall be followed for SPD location maximum lead length and accessibility Contractor may provide SPDs integrally mounted within the distribution apparatus protected if electrical room dimensions will not accommodate field mounted SPDs Related Sections A Division 26 Section Panelboards DEFINITIONS SPD Surge Protection Device SVR Suppression voltage rating clamping voltage TVSS Transient voltage surge suppressor s both singular and plural also transient voltage surge suppression VPR Voltage Protection Rating
121. not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer E Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct location 3 2 PREPARATION A Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers B Remove sub floor ridges and bumps Fill minor or local low spots cracks joints holes and other defects with sub floor filler C Apply trowel and float filler to achieve smooth flat hard surface Prohibit traffic until filler is cured February 7 2014 TILE CARPETING 096813 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Vacuum clean substrate 3 3 INSTALLATION A B room moO O Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub floor conditions Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and CRI 104 Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match Cut carpet tile clean Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions Complete installation of edge strips concealing exposed edges 3 4 CLEANING A B Remove excess adhesive without damage from floor
122. of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate 2 6 ACCESSORIES Adhesive Type recommended by fabricator to suit application Fasteners Size and type to suit application Bolts Nuts Washers Lags Pins and Screws Of size and type to suit application galvanized or chrome plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome plated finish in exposed locations Concealed Joint Fasteners Threaded steel Grommets Standard plastic painted metal or rubber grommets for cut outs in color to match adjacent surface 2 7 HARDWARE A B Hardware BHMA A156 9 types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified Adjustable Shelf Supports Standard side mounted system using shelf brackets and coordinated shelf rests satin chrome finish for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments Comply with BHMA A156 9 B04102 with shelf brackets B04112 Adjustable Shelf Supports Standard back mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets satin chrome finish for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments Drawer and Door Pulls U shaped wire pull steel with satin finish 4 inch centers Sliding Door Pulls Circular shape for recessed installation steel with satin finish Cabinet Locks Keyed cylinder two keys per lock master keyed steel with satin finish Comply with BMA A156 11 E07121 Drawer locks Comply with BHMA A156 11 E07041 Grommets for Cable P
123. of the system includes all computer equipment transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices C The on line support services shall allow the local BAS subcontractor temporary use of campus network access using VPN remote access to monitor and control the facility s building automation system This remote connection to the facility shall be within 2 hours of the time that the problem is reported This coverage shall be extended to include normal business hours after business hours weekends and holidays D If the problem cannot be resolved on line by the local office the national office of the building automation system manufacturer shall have the same capabilities for remote connection to the February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 1 7 A A B C facility If the problem cannot be resolved with on line support services the BAS subcontractor shall dispatch the appropriate personnel to the job site to resolve the problem within 3 hours of the time that the problem is reported OCCUPANCY The mechanical system serving the branch bank on lobby level and a small area on the Safe Box SB level will remain occupied These areas must remain in operation between the hours of 8 a m and 5 PM Monday through Friday No modifications to the system shall cause the mechanical system to be shut down for more than 20 minutes o
124. offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following Dallas Specialty amp Mfg Co Fernco Inc Mission Rubber Company a division of MCP Industries Inc Plastic Oddities a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies Inc fe b Standard ASTM C 1173 C Description Elastomeric sleeve type reducing or transition pattern Include shear ring and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end d Sleeve Materials 1 For Cast Iron Soil Pipes ASTM C 564 rubber 4 Shielded Nonpressure Transition Couplings a Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 Cascade Waterworks Mfg Co 2 Mission Rubber Company a division of MCP Industries Inc b Standard ASTM C 1460 Cc Description Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full length corrosion resistant outer shield and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion pump sizing and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on
125. on drawings and specified in Section 024100 B Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings C Contractor shall remove and store the following prior to start of work for later reinstallation by Contractor 1 3 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period B Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner s operations D Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy 1 4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A Construction Operations Limited to areas noted on Drawings B Arrange use of site and premises to allow 1 Owner occupancy 2 Work by Others 3 Work by Owner 4 Use of site and premises by the public C Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner 1 Emergency Building Exits During Construction Keep all exits required by code open during construction period provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered 2 Do not obstruct roadways sidewalks or other public ways without permit D Existing building spaces may not be used for storage Utility Outages and Shutdown 1 Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied 2 Donot disrupt or shut down life safety systems including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system without 7 days notice to Owner and auth
126. operation of the system shall be repeated at a later date The Contractor shall be responsible for any necessary repairs or revisions to the hardware or software to successfully complete all tests Acceptance 1 All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting the requirements of Completion Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Engineer Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty 2 The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of the demonstration are submitted and approved PATCHING Where control system equipment is removed patch holes and finish to match existing Where space sensors or thermostats are specified to be replaced install new sensors in the same location as the existing Coordinate size of replacement devices to minimize the need for wall surface repair painting or re finishing COORDINATION OF ELECTRCAL AND FIRE ALARM Prior to bid communicate to mechanical bidders all requirements and location of new and replacement wells valves taps dampers flow stations that will be furnished by BAS manufacturer Electrical Drawings show power to control panels or junction box on typical floors This Section respo
127. plain ends welding fittings and welded joints C Standard pressure wet pipe sprinkler system NPS 2 1 2 to NPS 6 DN 65 to DN 150 shall be one of the following 1 Standard weight black steel pipe with threaded ends uncoated gray iron threaded fittings and threaded joints 2 Standard weight black steel pipe with roll grooved ends uncoated grooved end fittings for steel piping grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping and grooved joints 3 Standard weight black steel pipe with plain ends steel welding fittings and welded joints 4 Thinwall black steel pipe with roll grooved ends uncoated grooved end fittings for steel piping grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping and grooved joints 5 Thinwall black steel pipe with plain ends welding fittings and welded joints 3 9 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications 1 Rooms without Ceilings Upright sprinklers 2 Rooms with Suspended Ceilings Recessed sprinklers 3 Wall Mounting Sidewall sprinklers 4 Spaces Subject to Freezing Upright pendent dry sprinklers and sidewall dry sprinklers as required 5 Special Applications Quick response sprinklers except where indicated otherwise B Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated E Recessed Sprinklers Bright chrome with bright chrome escutcheon 2 Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers Chrome plated in finished
128. product specified F Maintenance Data Include maintenance procedures recommended maintenance materials and suggested schedule for cleaning stripping and re waxing February 7 2014 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 G Maintenance Materials Furnish the following for Owner s use in maintenance of project 1 See Section 016000 Product Requirements for additional provisions 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end 1 6 FIELD CONDITIONS A Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F B Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability Thereafter maintain conditions above 55 degrees F 1 7 EXTRA MATERIALS A See Section 016000 Product Requirements for additional provisions B Provide 2 percent of flooring 5 percent of base of each type and color specified PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TILE FLOORING A Vinyl Composition Tile See drawings for type color finish and manufacturer 2 2 RESILIENT BASE A Resilient Base See drawings for type color finish and manufacturer 1 Height Match existing 2 3 ACCESSORIES A Subfloor Filler White premix latex type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer B Primers Adhesives and Seaming Materials Waterproof
129. project including line size pressure rating temperature rating flow coefficient shutoff rating and allowable leakage factor All valves installed for two position operation shall be line size Modulating single seated two way straight thru valves for chilled water heating hot water or cooling water service shall be provided with equal percentage contoured throttling plugs Valves 2 and smaller shall have ANSI Class 250 rating brass body with screwed connections larger valves shall have ANSI Class 125 rating cast iron body with flange connections Stems shall be stainless steel Modulating straight thru valves for induction unit service shall have 250 psig brass body brass plug brass or stainless steel stem electric actuators equal percentage flow characteristic and back seating feature Modulating water valves shall be sized for 3 0 psi maximum pressure drop February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 12 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 8 DAMPER ACTUATORS A All air handling unit and heating cooling plant automatically controlled devices unless specified otherwise elsewhere see valves for FCU s TU s and fin tube shall be provided with electric actuators sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two position action and tight closeoff B Where two or more actuators are to be operated in s
130. proper GFCI protection B Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles 125 V 20 A 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Cooper VGF20 b Hubbell GFR5352L Cc Pass amp Seymour 2095 d Leviton 7590 February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 5 TWIST LOCKING RECEPTACLES A Single Convenience Receptacles 125 V 20A Comply with NEMA WD 1 NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5 20R and UL 498 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Cooper CWL520R b Hubbell HBL2310 C Leviton 2310 d Pass amp Seymour L520 R 2 6 TOGGLE SWITCHES A Comply with NEMA WD 1 UL 20 and FS W S 896 B Switches 120 277 V 20 A 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Single Pole 1 Cooper AH1221 2 Hubbell HBL1221 3 Leviton 1221 2 4 Pass amp Seymour CSB20AC1 b Two Pole 1 Cooper AH1222 2 Hubbell HBL1222 3 Leviton 1222 2 4 Pass amp Seymour CSB20AC2 C Three Way 1 Cooper AH1223 2 Hubbell HBL1223 3 Leviton 1223 2 4 Pass amp Seymour CSB20AC3 d Four Way 1 Cooper AH1224 2 Hubbell HBL1224 3 Leviton 1224 2 4 Pass amp Seymour CSB20AC4 G Key Operated Switches 120 277 V 20 A 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the f
131. recommended by manufacturer END OF SECTION 260533 February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non fire rated construction walls and floors Sleeve seal systems Sleeve seal fittings Grout Silicone sealants aPon gt B Related Requirements ae Division 07 Section Firestopping for penetration firestopping installed in fire resistance rated walls horizontal assemblies and smoke barriers with and without penetrating items 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of product B LEED Submittals 1 Product Data for Credit EQ 4 1 For sealants documentation including printed statement of VOC content PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SLEEVES A Wall Sleeves af Steel Pipe Sleeves ASTM A53 A 53M Type E Grade B Schedule 40 zinc coated plain ends B Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non Fire Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies Galvanized steel sheet 0 0239 inch 0 6 mm minimum thickness round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint with tabs
132. related work to ensure proper size thickness hand function and finish of door hardware 1 Final Hardware Schedule Content Based on hardware indicated organize schedule into vertical format hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening Use specification Heading numbers with any variations suffixed a b etc Include the following information Type style function size and finish of each hardware item Name and manufacturer of each item Fastenings and other pertinent information Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule Explanation of all abbreviations symbols and codes contained in schedule Mounting locations for hardware Door and frame sizes and materials Keying information Cross reference numbers used within schedule deviating from those specified 1 Column 1 State specified item and manufacturer 2 Column 2 State prior approved substituted item and its manufacturer 2 Submittal Sequence Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule Include with schedule the product data samples shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule 3 Keying Schedule Submit sep
133. remain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode The remote start stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up to four 4 unique safety inputs The bypass shall include a supervisory control mode In this bypass mode the bypass shall monitor the value of the VFD s analog input feedback This feedback value is used to control the bypass contactor on and off state The supervisory mode shall allow the user to maintain hysteresis control over applications such as cooling towers and booster pumps even with the VFD out of service The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when an external safety opens Example text display indications include VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 FireStat FreezStat Over pressure and Low suction The user shall also be able to determine which of the four 4 safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection 23 Smoke Control Override Mode Override 1 The bypass shall include a dedicated digital input that will transfer the motor from VFD mode to Bypass mode upon receipt of a dry contact closure from the Fire Smoke Control System The Smoke Control Override Mode action is not programmable and will always function as described in the bypass User s Manual documentat
134. seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service 2 Indicate method of providing temporary electric service 3 Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager s written permission 4 Comply with NFPA 70E COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switches circuit breakers and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit 2 General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric B Type HD Heavy Duty Single Throw 600 V ac 1200 A and Smaller UL 98 and NEMA KS 1 horsepower rated with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks and interlocked with cover in closed position C Accessories 1 Equipment Ground Kit Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors 2 Neutral Kit Internally mounted insulated capable of being grounded and bonded labeled for copper neutral conductors 3 Class R Fuse Kit Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specifi
135. shall leave a minimum of 12 of slack for twisted pair out the outlet end This slack shall be neatly coiled in the wall termination box or modular furniture raceway Where there is insufficient space in the wall termination box or modular furniture raceway the required slack may be left loosely coiled in the ceiling area Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the termination device at each location END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 283111 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes Fe OON OO ROO 0 a Programming of Fire Alarm Control Panel s Notification device power supply booster panels Manual fire alarm boxes System smoke detectors Duct smoke detectors Heat detectors Notification appliances Magnetic door holders Addressable interface monitoring and control device s System calculations System performance verification 1 3 DEFINITIONS A LED Light emitting diode B NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies C HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning D CIS Common intelligibility
136. steel 1 Minimum Thickness 0 05 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit application 2 Exception Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements G Mounting Orientation Vertical H Blades _Roll formed interlocking 0 024 inch thick galvanized sheet steel Not all manufacturers use blade locks for horizontal units February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 6 Heat Responsive Device Replaceable 165 deg F rated fusible links SMOKE DAMPERS Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following Air Balance Inc a division of Mestek Inc Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc Greenheck Fan Corporation Nailor Industries Inc Pottorff Ruskin Company DOV DT General Requirements Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL Frame Hat shaped 0 094 inch thick galvanized sheet steel with mechanically attached corners and mounting flange Blades Roll formed horizontal interlocking 0 034 inch thick galvanized sheet steel Leakage Class I Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions Mounting Sleeve Factory installed 0 039 inch thick galvanized sheet steel length to suit wall or floor application Da
137. stringent 6 Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted 7 Frames in Masonry Walls Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units 8 Frames Wider than 48 Inches Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head flush with top 9 Frames Installed Back to Back Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead structure B Interior Door Frames Non Fire Rated Face welded type 1 Grade Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250 8 for Level 1 16 gage 2 Terminated Stops Provide at all interior doors closed end stop terminated 6 inches above floor at 45 degree angle C Interior Door Frames Fire Rated Face welded type 1 Grade Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250 8 for Level 1 16 gage 2 Fire Rating As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule tested in accordance with UL 10C positive pressure a Provide units listed and labeled by UL b Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit 3 Smoke and Draft Control Doors Indicated as S on Drawings In addition to required fire rating provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3 0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0 10 inch w g pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures with S label if necessary provide additional gasketing or edge sealing February
138. support with bars perpendicular to blades set set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting C General Requirements Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figures 4 3 Vanes and Vane Runners and 4 4 Vane Support in Elbows D Vane Construction Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions 2 10 DUCT MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 American Warming and Ventilating a division of Mestek Inc 2 Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc 3 Ductmate Industries Inc 4 Elgen Manufacturing 5 Flexmaster U S A Inc 6 Greenheck Fan Corporation 7 McGill AirFlow LLC 8 Nailor Industries Inc February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 9 Pottorff 10 Ventfabrics Inc 11 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Duct Mounted Access Doors Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figures 7 2 7 2M Duct Access Doors and Panels and 7 3 Access Doors Round Duct 1 Door a Double wall rectangular b Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class C Vision panel d Hinges and Latches 1 by 1 inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches
139. surge suppressors that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period 1 Warranty Period One year from date of device acceptance by the Owner PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 A MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following Advanced Protection Technologies Inc APT Current Technology Inc Danaher Power Solutions Danaher Power Solutions United Power Products Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution LEA International OO ONS February 7 2014 SECTION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 264313 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 7 Leviton Mfg Company Inc 8 Northern Technologies Inc a division of Emerson Network Power 9 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 10 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric 11 Surge Suppression Incorporated 12 Thor Systems Inc 2 2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS A Surge Protection Devices Comply with UL 1449 3 Edition and UL 1283 5 Edition Non modular 100 KA interrupting capacity LED indicator lights for power and protection status Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed Or POO NO St B Surge Specifications Peak Single Impulse Surge Current Rating 50 kA per mode 2 Seven 7 mode L N L G N G 3 MCOV a 480V
140. system 550V b 208V system 320V 4 SPD Type 2 C VPR tested with 3000A 8 by 20 mic sec impulse 1 480 277 V grounded wye Line to Neutral 1200 Line to Ground 1200 Neutral to Ground 900 Line to Line 1800 apg 2 208 120 V grounded wye Line to Neutral 700 Line to Ground 700 Neutral to Ground 800 Line to Line 1000 apop D SVR tested with 500A 8 by 20 mic sec impulse q 480 277 V grounded wye a Line to Neutral 869 b Line to Ground 853 C Neutral to Ground 520 d Line to Line 1627 February 7 2014 SECTION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 264313 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 208 120 V grounded wye a Line to Neutral 403 b Line to Ground 405 C Neutral to Ground 440 d Line to Line 736 2 3 ENCLOSURES A Indoor Enclosures Polycarbonate with clear hinged lid and NEMA 4X polycarbonate or NEMA 1 steel enclosure with piano hinge PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Install SPD devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible Do not exceed manufacturer s recommended lead length Do not bond neutral and ground 1 Provide 30A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for SPD serving panelboards 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections 1 Manufacturer s Field Service Engage a factory authorized servic
141. than normal working hours B Prior to submitting bids on the project visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project C Where work under this project requires extension relocation reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems the existing equipment or systems shall be restored to their original and operating condition Remove all equipment indicated to be demolished including outlets devices raceways and support structures D Care shall be exercised in the removal and storage of equipment indicated to be relocated or removed and reused Prior to placing back into service equipment shall be cleaned and marred or chipped paint surfaces touched up E Provide all coring cutting and patching to existing walls floors etc required for the removal of existing work or the installation of new work PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS A All materials used in this work shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc or certification by other recognized laboratory B The published standards and requirements of the Telecommunications Industries Association TIA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA the American National Standard February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Institute ANSI the Institute of Electrical and
142. that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following Basis of Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements provide a comparable product by one of the following Bosch Water Heating Chronomite Laboratories Inc E Tankless Water Heaters Corp Keltech Inc Niagara Industries Inc Papo Standard UL 499 for electric tankless domestic water heater heating appliance Construction Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water without storage capacity Connections Compression Pressure Rating 150 psig 1035 kPa Heating Element Resistance heating system Safety Control Faucet flow control Jacket Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic eoaoop Support Bracket for wall mounting Capacity and Characteristics a Flow Rate 0 5 gpm at 57 deg F temperature rise b Power Demand 4 100W Cc Electrical Characteristics 1 Volts 208 2 Phases Single 3 Hertz 60 4 Breaker Size 20A PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A Electric Tankless Domestic Water Heater Mounting Install electric tankless domestic water heaters at least 12 inches above floor on the wall February 7 2014 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Maintain manufacturer s recommended clearances 2 Arrange units so devices tha
143. the Contract Documents and Existing As Built Drawings to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment Examine systems for installed balancing devices such as test ports gage cocks thermometer wells flow control devices balancing valves and fittings and manual volume dampers Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls Examine ceiling plenums used for supply return or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section Metal Ducts and are properly separated from adjacent areas Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire stopped if required Examine equipment performance data 1 Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality control testing cleaning and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed Examine test
144. the Ortronics Certified Installer Program CIP The certified contractor shall have 30 of their technicians trained on copper amp fiber installations and testing by Ortronics they also shall have at least 1 project manager successfully complete an Ortronics 2 Day Management Certification class and Berk Tek Oasis training program Ortronics Berk Tek will extend a NetClear 25 year Static Dynamic and Applications Warranty to the end user February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Telecommunications contractor shall provide labor materials and documentation according to Ortronics requirements necessary to insure that the Owner will be furnished with a NetClear Warranty of 25 years in length C All necessary documentation for warranty registration must be provided to Ortronics and Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group and will be furnished by the Telecommunications Contractor immediately following 100 testing of all cables All test results shall be submitted to Ortronics and Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group in the certification tester s original software on CD D Telecommunications Contractor shall administer the warranty process with the responsible manufacturer s representative The warranty shall be provided directly to the owner from the manufacturer Telecommunications c
145. the project conditions Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects Remove or mask surface appurtenances including electrical plates hardware light fixture trim escutcheons and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing Surfaces Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra sodium phosphate and bleach Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted Remove dirt loose mortar scale salt or alkali powder and other foreign matter Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri sodium phosphate rinse well and allow to dry Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water Allow to dry Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted Fill minor defects with filler compound Spot prime defects after repair Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent Apply coat of etching primer Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted Prepare using at least SSPC PC 2 hand tool cleaning or SSPC SP 3 power tool cleaning followed by SSPC SP 1 solvent cleaning Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Pa
146. the space requires cooling the system will operate in Airside Economizer Mode With economizer mode enabled modulate the maximum outside air dampers in sequence and return damper to maintain the mixed air temperature setpoint Provide separate analog outputs for each maximum outside air dampers each minimum outside air dampers relief air dampers and return air dampers Setpoints for economizer systems Initially set Economizer Setpoint to 23 btuh Ib 55 DB 55 WB To allow BAS Operator to monitor economizer operation provide a separate graphic listing return air temperature RH and calculated enthalpy for all air handling units along with outside air temperature RH and calculated enthalpy and economizer setpoint B Airflow Measurement 1 Measure outdoor airflow utilizing existing flow stations for outside air G Outside Airflow Control 1 Using Air Flow Measuring utilize existing outside airflow measuring station AFMS in the outside air ducts a With AHU or Air System in the Occupied mode open the outside air damper and modulate the return air damper to maintain the outside airflow rate as measured by the AFMS b With AHU or Air System in the Occupied mode open the outside air damper to the normal or low occupancy position Variable Outside Airflow Rates a Provide user adjustable outside airflow rates b Flow rates will vary depending on number of floors occupied Low flow rate shall be used when exhaust
147. thermal and vapor retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated 2 Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive Fill joints seams voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth hard and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation 3 Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire Bond pieces with adhesive 3 3 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated B Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows 1 Install mitered sections of pipe insulation 2 Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated C Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties 1 Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available 2 When preformed valve covers are not available install cut
148. thick smooth two sides S2S use for drawer bottoms dust panels and other components indicated on drawings Hardwood Edgebanding Use solid hardwood edgebanding matching species color grain and grade for exposed portions of cabinetry 2 5 LAMINATE MATERIALS A Basis of Design Manufacturers 1 Abet Laminati www abellaminati com 2 Lamin Art www laminart com B Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Formica CorporationNone N A www formica com 2 Panolam Industries International Inc Nevamar www nevamar com 3 Wilsonart International Inc www wilsonart com 4 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements C High Pressure Decorative Laminate HPDL NEMA LD 3 types as recommended for specific applications and as follows 1 Horizontal Surfaces HGS 0 048 inch nominal thickness through color colors as scheduled finish as scheduled 2 Vertical Surfaces VGS 0 028 inch nominal thickness through color colors as scheduled finish as scheduled February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Flame Retardant Surfaces HGF 0 048 inch nominal thickness through color colors as scheduled finish as scheduled 4 Cabinet Liner CLS 0 020 inch nominal thickness through color colors as scheduled finish as scheduled 5 Laminate Backer BKL 0 020 inch nominal thickness undecorated for application to concealed backside
149. time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work 5 For materials failing tests submit sealant manufacturer s written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers 1 7 SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each glass product and glazing material indicated B Glass Samples Submit five samples for each type of the following products 12 inches square 1 Tinted glass 2 Coated glass 3 Insulating glass C Glazing Accessory Samples Submit five samples for gaskets sealants and colored spacers in 12 inch lengths Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system D Glazing Schedule List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location Use same designations indicated on Drawings E Delegated Design Submittal For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation F Qualification Data For installers G Product Certificates For glass and glazing products from manufacturer February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Product Test Reports Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulating glass and glazing gaskets 1 For glazing sealan
150. two bolts 1 Pipe Connectors Clamp type sized for pipe C Bus bar Connectors Mechanical type cast silicon bronze solderless type wire terminals and long barrel two bolt connection to ground bus bar February 7 2014 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 APPLICATIONS A Isolated Grounding Conductors Green colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe On feeders with isolated ground identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection with alternating bands of green and yellow tape with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow B Grounding Bus Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms in rooms housing service equipment and elsewhere as indicated 1 Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches 50 mm minimum from wall 6 inches 150 mm above finished floor unless otherwise indicated 2 Where indicated on both sides of doorways route bus up to top of door frame across top of doorway and down to specified height above floor connect to horizontal bus C Conductor Terminations and Connections 1 Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations Bolted connectors 3 2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits including Type MC cable branch circuits B Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits
151. until completion of project C Touch up repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COUNTERTOPS 123600 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 125111 MODULAR CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 SECTION INCLUDES A Modular mail receiving sorting and distribution casework RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 079005 Joint Sealers REFERENCES A ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2013a B NEMA LD 3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates C PS 1 Structural Plywood 2009 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Product Data Manufacturer s data sheets on each product to be used including 1 Preparation instructions and recommendations 2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3 Installation methods C Shop Drawings Complete detailed layout with model numbers and complete dimensioning information for installation D Selection Samples For each finish product specified five complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer s full range of available colors and patterns E Verification Samples For each finish product specified two samples minimum size 6 inches square representing actual product color and patterns F Maintenance Data Ordering information o
152. version 3 TIA EIA 569 B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces current version 4 TIA EIA 606 A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure current version 5 J STD 607 A Commercial Building Grounding Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications current version 6 IEEE 241 IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings pertaining to communication systems 1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A The horizontal distribution subsystem refers to all intra building twisted pair and fiber optic communications cabling connecting Telecommunication Rooms TR s to telecommunication outlets TO s located at individual work areas Horizontal cabling may consist of a combination of the following types of cable from the TR to the TO Category 6 100 Ohm 4 pair unshielded twisted pair cables from the TR s to the TO s The Horizontal System includes cables jacks patch panels connecting blocks patch cords fiber connectors and jumpers as well as the necessary support systems such as cable managers and faceplates 1 4 WARRANTY A The Telecommunications contractor must be an approved Ortronics Certified Contractor at a Plus tier CIP CIP Gold CIP Platinum or multi site national and Oasis certified The Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with
153. wall Plumbness Plus or minus 1 16 measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor D Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1 16 inch 3 3 INSTALLATION A Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840 B In addition install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80 C Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction 1 Floor Anchors Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post installed expansion anchors a Floor anchors may be set with power actuated fasteners instead of post installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on shop drawings 2 Metal Stud Partitions Solidly pack mineral fiber insulation behind frames 3 Masonry Walls Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout 4 In Place Concrete or Masonry Construction Secure frames in place with post installed expansion anchors Countersink anchors and fill and make smooth flush and invisible on exposed faces 5 In Place Gypsum Board Partitions Secure frames in place with post installed expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb Countersink anchors and fill and make smooth flush and invisible on exposed faces 6 Ceiling Struts Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates a
154. will be installed D Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems have been met Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer E Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install wall mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer B Install suspended transformers via formed steel channel trapeze with threaded rod supports securely attached to the above structure 3 3 CONNECTIONS A Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems B Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports 1 Manufacturer s Field Service Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect components assemblies and equipment installations including connections and to assist in testing B Tests and Inspections 1 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Certify compliance with test parameters C Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above D Test Labeling On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit attach
155. wind blown debris from public and private lands END OF SECTION February 7 2014 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024100 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 057210 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Stainless steel handrails top cap and fittings Base Bid B Aluminum handrails top cap and fittings Alternate 1 C Glass infill system 1 2 REFERENCES A ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Coated and Uncoated Glass B ASTM E 488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements C ASTME 985 Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings D NAAMM AMP 510 Metal Stairs Manual 1992 Fifth Edition E SSPC Paint 20 Zinc Rich Primers Type I Inorganic and Type II Organic 1982 Ed 2000 1 3 SUBMITTALS A Submit under provisions of Section 013000 Administrative Requirements B Manufacturer s product data substantiating compliance with Contract Documents Include manufacturer s installation instructions C Shop Drawings Submit Shop Drawings for stairs and railings 1 Include plans elevations and details 2 Show connection and accessory items and locations for anchor and bolt installation 3 Include design loads structural calculations and material properties 4 Provide Shop Drawings signed and sealed by structural engineer l
156. with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters 1 NPS 1 1 2 and NPS 2 DN 40 and DN 50 60 inches 1500 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod 2 NPS 3 DN 80 60 inches 1500 mm with 1 2 inch 13 mm rod G Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters 1 NPS 1 1 4 DN 32 72 inches 1800 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod 2 NPS 1 1 2 and NPS 2 DN 40 and DN 50 96 inches 2400 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod 3 NPS 2 1 2 DN 65 108 inches 2700 mm with 1 2 inch 13 mm rod 4 NPS 3 and NPS 5 DN 80 and DN 125 10 feet 3 m with 1 2 inch 13 mm rod H Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP 69 and manufacturer s written instructions 3 5 CONNECTIONS A Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties B Connect soil and waste piping to existing sanitary building sewerage piping Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 6 3 7 Connect drainage and vent piping to the following 1 Plumbing Fixtures Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated but not smaller than required by plumbing code 2 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction
157. www custombuildingproducts com 3 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com c MAPEI Corporation www mapei com 4 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements February 7 2014 TILE 093000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 5 THIN SET BOND COAT MATERIALS A Latex Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat ANSI A118 4 1 Basis of Design MegaLite Thin Set Mortar by Custom Building Products www custombuildingproducts com 2 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com 3 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 6 GROUT MATERIALS A Epoxy Grout ANSI A118 3 100 solids epoxy mortar and non sagging grout system use for all porcelain tile applications Colors as indicated on the drawings 1 Basis of Design Custom Building Products www custombuilding products com 2 Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com c Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 3 Applications Where indicated 4 Color s As indicated on the drawings 5 Grout Joint Width For use on all grout joint from 1 16 to 1 2 wide 2 7 JOINT SEALANT A Tile Sealant Gunnable silicone sealant moisture and mildew resistant type as per ASTM C920 and TCNA EJ171 for all appl
158. 0 096 13 February 7 2014 10 11 13 14 point of an independent process ie valves dampers etc All set points process variables etc to be accessible from the serial communication network Two 2 programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals Two 2 programmable analog outputs 0 20ma or 4 20 ma The outputs may be programmed to output proportional to Frequency Motor Speed Output Voltage Output Current Motor Torque Motor Power kW DC Bus voltage Active Reference Active Feedback and other data Six 6 programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an application or removal of 24VDC or 24VAC Three 3 programmable digital Form C relay outputs The relay outputs shall include programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0 4 A at 250 VAC Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS Outputs shall be true Form C type contacts open collector outputs are not acceptable Run permissive circuit There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control Regardless of the source of a run command keypad input contact closure time clock control or serial communications the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open VFD moto
159. 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard 1 Exception Doors to be field finished Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B C D Verify existing conditions before starting work Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A nmo O Install doors in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and specified quality standard 1 Install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements Field Finished Doors Trimming to fit is acceptable 1 Adjust width of non rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges 2 Trim maximum of 3 4 inch off bottom edges 3 Trim fire rated doors in strict compliance with fire rating limitations Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware Coordinate installation of glazing Install door louvers plumb and level 3 3 TOLERANCES A B C D Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances Conform to specified quality standard
160. 053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Chapter 5 Hangers and Supports B Building Attachments structural steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached C Hanger Spacing Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Table 5 1 Table 5 1M Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size and Table 5 2 Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct for maximum hanger spacing install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection D Install upper attachments to structures Select and size upper attachments with pull out tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used 3 4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes Comply with SMACNA s Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 1 Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o c and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o c 2 Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet B Select seismic restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads C Install cables so they do not bend across edge
161. 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 Current Date Table of Contents 000010 1 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 123600 Countertops 125111 Modular Casework DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 211313 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 223300 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 224000 Plumbing Fixtures 224716 Pressure Water Coolers DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230523 Valves and Specialties for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 230923 Building Automation System
162. 096 13 1 6 FIELD CONDITIONS A Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to during and after acoustical unit installation 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed sufficient heat is provided dust generating activities have terminated and overhead work is completed tested and approved B Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry 1 8 EXTRA MATERIALS A See Section 016000 Product Requirements for additional provisions B Provide 2 0 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for Owner s use in maintenance of project C Provide 2 0 percent of total of each concealed grid and exposed component for Owner s use in maintenance of project PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A Acoustical ceiling panels and suspension systems shall match existing as indicated on the drawings PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify existing conditions before starting work B Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work 3 2 INSTALLATION SUSPENSION SYSTEM A Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 ASTM E 580 and manufacturer s instructions and as supplemented in this section B Rigidly secure system including integral mechanical and electrical components for maximum deflection of 1 360 Locate system on room axis a
163. 1 Fittings for EMT a Material Steel b Type Setscrew 2 Expansion Deflection Fittings PVC or steel to match conduit type complying with UL 651 rated for environmental conditions where installed and including flexible external bonding jumper 2 2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS TUBING AND FITTINGS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 AFC Cable Systems Inc 2 Anamet Electrical Inc 3 Arnco Corporation 4 CANTEX Inc February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 CertainTeed Corp Condux International Inc Electri Flex Company Kraloy Lamson amp Sessions Carlon Electrical Products 10 Niedax Kleinhuis USA Inc 11 RACO a Hubbell company 12 Thomas amp Betts Corporation O 00 NO Oi B Listing and Labeling Nonmetallic conduits tubing and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application C RNC Type EPC 40 PVC complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated D LFNC Comply with UL 1660 E Fittings for RNC Comply with NEMA TC 3 match to conduit or tubing type and material F Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and
164. 14 DUCT INSULATION 230713 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 J Apply adhesives mastics and sealants at manufacturer s recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses K Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows 1 Draw jacket tight and smooth 2 Cover circumferential joints with 3 inch 75 mm wide strips of same material as insulation jacket Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip spaced 4 inches 100 mm o c 3 Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 1 2 inches 88 mm Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches 50 mm 4 inches 100 mm o c a For below ambient services apply vapor barrier mastic over staples 4 Cover joints and seams with tape according to insulation material manufacturer s written instructions to maintain vapor seal 5 Where vapor barriers are indicated apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings L Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness M Finish installation with systems at operating conditions Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement N Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas Extend patches at least 4 in
165. 2 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes 1 Sleeves 2 Grout 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of product indicated PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SLEEVES A Galvanized Steel Sheet Sleeves 0 0239 inch 0 6 mm minimum thickness round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint 2 2 GROUT A Standard ASTM C 1107 C 1107M Grade B post hardening and volume adjusting dry hydraulic cement grout B Characteristics Nonshrink recommended for interior and exterior applications C Design Mix 5000 psi 28 day compressive strength D Packaging Premixed and factory packaged PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in partitions B Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions February 7 2014 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces 2 Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1 4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation 3 Seal annular space betwe
166. 25 PARK PLACE PHASE TWO GEORGIA STATE UNIVERSITY BOARD of REGENTS of the UNIVERSITY SYSTEM of GEORGIA PROJECT MANUAL 100 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GSU Project Number 080 096 13 February 7 2014 staag design Heery International Inc 999 Peachtree Street NE Atlanta GA 30309 3953 Commission No 12053 02 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University DOCUMENT 000010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Number Title INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 000010 Project Manual Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS AND ACTIVITIES DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION 024100 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Not Used DIVISION 4 MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 METALS 057210 Glass Railing System DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 Rough Carpentry 062000 Finish Carpentry 064100 Architectural Woodwork Casework DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078400 Firestopping 079005 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 081213 Hollow Metal Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 081433 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 087111 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 093000 Tile 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 096500 Resilient Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 099000 Painting and Coating February 7 2014 Original Issue Date 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02 07 14 02
167. 271116 CABINETS RACKS amp ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full C This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Cabinets Racks amp Enclosures D Product specifications general design considerations and installation guidelines are provided in this document Locations of telecommunications equipment and typical installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document If the bid documents are in conflict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Provide product data 1 3 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following ate Furnish and install all Equipment Racks 2 Furnis
168. 3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit 2 General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric B Panelboards NEMA PB 1 lighting and appliance branch circuit type C Mains Circuit breaker or lugs only D Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices Plug in circuit breakers replaceable without disturbing adjacent units E Doors Concealed hinges secured with flush latch with tumbler lock keyed alike 2 4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents 1 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Inverse time current element for low level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger 2 Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breakers Magnetic trip element with front mounted field adjustable trip setting a Standard frame sizes trip ratings and number of poles b Lugs Mechanical style suitable for number size trip ratings and conductor materials C Application Listing Appropriate for application Type SWD for switching fluore
169. 3 mm thick 3 Polyolefin 3 4 inch 19 mm thick Exposed Sanitary Drains Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities Insulation shall be one of the following 1 Flexible Elastomeric 1 2 inch 13 mm thick 2 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation Type l 1 2 inch 13 mm thick 3 Polyolefin 1 2 inch 13 mm thick END OF SECTION 220719 Februrary 7 2014 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 A 1 3 A B SUMMARY Section includes under building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes tubes and fittings inside buildings ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For transition fittings and dielectric fittings INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS System purging and disinfecting activities report Field quality control reports PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPING MATERIALS A Comply with requirements in Piping Schedule Article for applications of pipe tube fitting materials and joining methods for specific services service locations and pipe sizes B Potable water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Plastic piping components shall be marked with NSF pw 2 2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A Hard Copper Tube ASTM B 88 Type L ASTM B 88M Type B and ASTM B 88 Type M ASTM B 88M Type C w
170. 529 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Metal conduits tubing and fittings Nonmetal conduits tubing and fittings Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters Surface raceways Boxes enclosures and cabinets 92 a a AT Related Requirements 1 Division 27 Section Pathways for Communications Systems for conduits wireways surface pathways innerduct boxes faceplate adapters enclosures cabinets and handholes serving communications systems 2 Division 28 Section Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security for conduits surface pathways innerduct boxes and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security DEFINITIONS ARC Aluminum rigid conduit GRC Galvanized rigid steel conduit IMC Intermediate metal conduit ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For surface raceways wireways and fittings floor boxes hinged cover enclosures and cabinets LEED Submittals 1 Product Data for Credit IEQ 4 1 For solvent cements and adhesive primers documentation including printed statement of VOC content Shop Drawings F
171. 550 g L or less respectively when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 2 3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 Cooper B Line Inc 2 Hoffman a Pentair company 3 Mono Systems Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric B Description Sheet metal complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250 Type 1 Type 4Type 12 unless otherwise indicated and sized according to NFPA 70 C Fittings and Accessories Include covers couplings offsets elbows expansion deflection joints adapters hold down straps end caps and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system D Wireway Covers Screw cover type unless otherwise indicated E Finish Manufacturer s standard enamel finish 2 4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A Listing and Labeling Surface raceways and tele power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application B Surface Metal Raceways Galvanized steel with snap on covers complying with UL 5 Manufacturer s standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Man
172. 6 shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year or longer as required from date of final acceptance by the Owner Lamps for lighting fixtures or indicating devices which fail to operate due to normal mortality rates are excluded from this guarantee unless a part of a normal manufacturers guarantee of total life for a lamp and fixture system B Fixture or device damage resulting from a lamp failure shall fall within the required guarantee C During this guarantee period all defects in materials and workmanship shall be corrected without incurring additions to the Contract The correction shall include all required cutting patching repainting or other work involved including repair or restoration of any damaged sections or parts of the premises resulting from any fault included in the guarantee D In addition to this general guarantee present to the Owner any other guarantees or warranties from equipment or system manufacturers These supplemental guarantees or warranties shall not invalidate the general guarantee E The one year warranty period shall commence upon system acceptance by the Owner F In the event that defects in materials or workmanship are encountered during the warranty period the Contractor shall provide all materials and labor required for prompt and proper correction of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner 1 13 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER February 7 2014 BASI
173. 6kV 3kA 8 by 20 micro sec waveform SPD TVSS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated Include rated capacities operating weights electrical characteristics furnished specialties and accessories CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data For SPD devices to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals February 7 2014 SECTION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 264313 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a testing agency and marked for intended location and application B Comply with UL 1449 Third Edition C Comply with UL 1283 Fifth Edition D Comply with NFPA 70 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Service Conditions Rate SPD devices for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated le Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage 2 Operating Temperature 30 to 120 deg F 0 to 50 deg C 3 Humidity 0 to 85 percent non condensing 4 Altitude Less than 2 000 feet 6090 m above sea level 1 8 COORDINATION A Coordinate location of field mounted SPD devices to allow adequate clearances for maintenance 1 9 WARRANTY A Special Warranty Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
174. 7 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 Doors Frames and Other Internal Access Smooth operating free of light leakage under operating conditions and designed to permit relamping without use of tools Designed to prevent doors frames lenses diffusers and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position Diffusers and Globes 1 Acrylic Lighting Diffusers See Lighting Fixture Schedule Factory Applied Labels Comply with UL 1598 Include recommended lamps and ballasts Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place 1 Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics a USE ONLY and include specific lamp type b Lamp diameter code T 4 T 5 T 8 T 12 etc tube configuration twin quad triple etc base type and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires C Lamp type wattage bulb type ED17 BD56 etc and coating clear or coated for HID luminaires d Start type preheat rapid start instant start etc for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires e ANSI ballast type M98 M57 etc for HID luminaires CCT and CRI for all luminaires BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts I
175. 998 edition of the Life Safety Code NFPA 101 4 The National Electrical Safety Code ANSI C 2 5 National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA 6 Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 7 Electronic Industries Association EIA 8 National Electrical Safety Code NESC 9 Institute of Electrical amp Electronics Engineers IEEE 10 Underwriters Laboratories UL 11 American Standards Association ASA 12 Federal Communications Commission FCC 13 Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA 14 American Society of Testing Material ASTM 15 Americans with Disabilities Act ADA 16 Local city and county ordinances governing electrical work In the event of conflicts the more stringent provisions shall apply 1 3 SCOPE A The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing of labor material equipment and tools required for the complete installation of the work indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein B All materials obviously a part of the Telecommunications Infrastructures and necessary to its proper operation but not specifically mentioned or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed without additional charge C The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications the higher cost shall be incl
176. A B For fire protection systems related to doors in fire rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions comply with requirements and compatibility for door hardware Connect hardware and devices to fire alarm system 1 Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire alarm system in this Section before making connections Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems Install the interface device less than 3 feet 1 m from the device controlled Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled 1 Alarm initiating connection to smoke control system smoke management at firefighter smoke control system panel Alarm initiating connection to stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization systems Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air conditioning duct systems Alarm initiating connection to elevator recall system and components Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker Supervisory connections at fire pump power failure including a dead phase or phase reversal condition future construction phase NDNPPN IDENTIFICATION Identify system components wiring cabling and terminals Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems Ins
177. ATION The phase rotation A B C of all service entrance distribution and branch circuit installations shall be maintained throughout the entire project Test the phase rotation at all distribution equipment to verify compliance Backboard sizes shall be large enough to accommodate the equipment or devices to be mounted or sized as indicated Backboard shall be attached to the wall or metal frame with not less than four bolts EQUIPMENT ACCESS Install equipment so it is readily accessible for maintenance and operation Provide access doors where required FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests and Reports All systems and equipment shall be extensively tested by the electrical contractor prior to final inspection Each test shall be signed off by the Owner in writing At the time of the final inspection or at such time as part of the system may be completed all electrical systems shall be tested in the presence of the Architect for compliance with the Contract Documents Furnish all necessary personnel and equipment such as measuring instruments for current voltage and resistance and ladders two way radios lights etc to assist the Owner in conducting the tests Authorized representatives of the manufacturer of specialty equipment or systems shall be present during the tests to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents Perform operational tests on all systems Every system test report shall be performed according to the manufa
178. AWI AWMAC WI AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards 2009 D AWI AWMAC QSI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 2005 8th Ed Version 2 0 PS 1 Structural Plywood 2007 PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard National Institute of Standards and Technology Department of Commerce 2005 G WI MAN Manual of Millwork Woodwork Institute 2003 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Product Data 1 Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions 2 Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware C Shop Drawings Indicate materials component profiles fastening methods jointing details accessories to a minimum scale of 1 1 2 inch to 1 ft D Samples Submit five samples of finish plywood 12 inches in length illustrating wood grain and specified finish E Samples Submit five samples of wood trim 12 inches long 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Premium grade B Fabricator Qualifications Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this February 7 2014 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 section with minimum five years of documen
179. B A A B SUMMARY Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services 1 Domestic hot water piping 2 Supplies and drains for handicap accessible lavatories and sinks ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated R Drawings Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to other work Detail insulation application at elbows fittings flanges valves and specialties for each type of insulation 2 Detail removable insulation at piping specialties equipment connections and access panels INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality control reports QUALITY ASSURANCE Surface Burning Characteristics For insulation and related materials as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive mastic tapes and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency 1 Insulation Installed Indoors Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 50 or less 2 Insulation Installed Outdoors Flame spread index of 75 or less and smoke developed index of 150 or less Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components 1 Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards ICC A117 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 INSULATION MATERIALS A Pro
180. BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 System identification Location Make and type Model number and size Manufacturer s serial number Arrangement and class Sheave make size in inches and bore Center to center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches FOTP Motor Data Motor make and frame type and size Horsepower and rpm Volts phase and hertz Full load amperage and service factor Sheave make size in inches and bore Center to center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches Number make and size of belts ampao Test Data Indicated and Actual Values Total airflow rate in CFM Total system static pressure in inches wg Fan rpm Discharge static pressure in inches wg Suction static pressure in inches wg oaoop H Round Flat Oval and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross section and record the following 1 Report Data System and air handling unit number Location and zone Traverse air temperature in deg F Duct static pressure in inches wg Duct size in inches Duct area in sq ft Indicated air flow rate in CFM Indicated velocity in fom Actual air flow rate in CFM Actual average velocity in fom Barometric pressure in psig ATT Ta oA0 op l Air Terminal Device Reports 1 February 7 201
181. C Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes After completing painting operations remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work 1 After work of other trades is complete touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1 3 8 PROTECTION A Protect work of other trades whether being painted or not against damage from painting Correct damage by cleaning repairing or replacing and repainting as approved by Architect END OF SECTION February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Fire extinguishers B Fire extinguisher cabinets C Accessories 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 061054 Wood Blocking and Curbing Wood blocking and shims B Section 099000 Painting and Coating Field paint finish 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2013 B UL FPED Fire Protection Equipment Directory Underwriters Laboratories Inc current edition 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conform to NFPA 10 B Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc for the purpose specified and indicated 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A NFPA Compliance Fabricate amd label fire extinguishers to comply wit
182. C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 A B C D Provide temporary construction area electrical service at 208 120V 3 phase 4 wire Branch circuit requirements for building temporary lighting and power as follows 1 Sufficient wiring outlets and lamps shall be installed to insure proper lighting in accordance with OSHA state and municipal codes Provide all necessary transformers cables panelboards ground fault devices switches and accessories required by the temporary light and power installation Install and maintain a feeder or feeders of sufficient capacity for the requirements of all areas Also provide a sufficient number of outlets located at convenient points throughout the construction area Remove all temporary service equipment wiring and accessories after they have served their purpose PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 A B C 2 2 A GENERAL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new of first class quality and shall be furnished delivered erected connected finished in every detail and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces in compliance with all requirements Manufacturer s catalog numbers listed are not necessarily complete Products provided shall be a standard product which has a history of successful installation and ope
183. C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 SUMMARY This section includes the following 1 Submittal Requirements 2 Plywood backboards RELATED SECTIONS Electrical requirements described in this Section apply to all Sections of Division 26 Division 26 specification sections are interrelated and what is called for by one section shall be deemed as required by the other sections An individual specification section that lists other specific sections in RELATED SECTIONS is done for the convenience of the reader and is not to be construed as the only related sections Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to all sections of Division 26 DEFINITIONS Refer to Division 01 for definitions used in the Contract Documents Some of the following definitions are duplicated from that reference for a specific purpose or are additions applicable to this Division 1 Provide Furnish install and connect 2 Wiring Wire or cable installed in conduit with all required boxes fittings connectors etc 3 Work Materials completely installed including the labor involved 4 Conduit Rigid galvanized steel conduit RGSC electrical metallic tubing EMT intermediate metal conduit IMC rigid non metal conduit RNC or flexible metal conduit FMC 5 Branch Circuit The circuit conductors between the final over current de
184. C3B Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0 25 Ib cu ft retention 1 Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent 2 Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete 3 Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION A Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections 3 2 INSTALLATION GENERAL A Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines with members plumb true to line cut and fitted Fit rough carpentry to other construction scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit Locate furring nailers blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minumum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement Select material sizes to minimize waste Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components including shims bracing and blocking Where treated wood is used on interior provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants 3 3 BLOCKING NAILERS AND SUPPORTS A Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes fixtures specialty items and trim B In framed assemblies that have conceale
185. CTIONS A Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer s published torque tightening values If manufacturer s torque values are not indicated use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B B Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors C Wiring at Outlets Install conductor at each outlet with at least 12 inches 300 mm of slack 3 4 FIRESTOPPING A Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section Firestopping 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports B Tests and Inspections 1 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Certify compliance with test parameters C Test Reports Prepare a written report to record the following February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 3 HII 12053 02 25 Park Place Phase Two GSU 080 096 13 Georgia State University 1 Test procedures used 2 Test results that comply with requirements 3 Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements D Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as spe
186. Contractor s use of site and premises 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A 29 CFR 1926 U S Occupational Safety and Health Standards current edition B NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operations 2009 1 4 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Demolition Plan Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities 1 Indicate extent of demolition removal sequence bracing and shoring and location and construction of barricades and fences 2 Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications 3 Include a summary of safety procedures C Project Record Documents Accurately record actual locations of any capped and active utilities encountered and subsurface construction 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Demolition Firm Qualifications Company specializing in the type of work required 1 Minimum of five years of documented experience 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations and erect temporary barriers to prevent passage of dust to adjacent occupied areas B Do not use water if that will result in ice flooding sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers or other pollution PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED February 7 2014 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024100 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PR
187. DITIONS A B Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F to 90 degress F during installation of mortar materials Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels specified 1 10 EXTRA MATERIALS A Provide 2 percent of each size color and surface finish of tile specified 1 11 WARRANTY A Provide to the Owner the manufacturer s full system warranty for a period of not less than 10 years from the Date of Material Completion February 7 2014 TILE 093000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TILE A Tile Types See drawings for type color finish and manufacturer 2 2 SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS A Cementitious Self Leveling Underlayment Dry blend of copolymers Portland cement post industrial and consumer recycled aggregate and inorganic chemicals for leveling and patching to bring substrate into compliance with flatness tolerances 1 Basis of Design LevelLite by Custom Building Products www custombuildingproducts com 2 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com 3 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements B Cementitious Patching and Repair Compound Finely sanded polymer modified cementitious
188. Data For each type of panelboard switching and overcurrent protective device transient voltage suppression device accessory and component indicated Include dimensions and manufacturers technical data on features performance electrical characteristics ratings and finishes Shop Drawings For each panelboard and related equipment 1 Include dimensioned plans elevations sections and details Show tabulations of installed devices equipment features and ratings 2 Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250 Type 1 3 Detail bus configuration current and voltage ratings 4 Short circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices 5 Detail features characteristics ratings and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components 6 Include wiring diagrams for power signal and control wiring INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field Quality Control Reports 1 Test procedures used 2 Test results that comply with requirements 3 Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and Maintenance Data For panelboards and components to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals In addition to items specified in Div
189. Division 01 Section Submittals All material lists and shop drawing submittals shall include a stamped indication signifying that the submittals have been previously reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents that all coordination required prior to field installation has occurred and that the material being submitted is approved for installation The stamped indication shall include the name of the Contracting Firm the date of the review and the signature of the Contractor The Engineer will not review the shop drawing submittals without the Contractors stamped approval on the shop drawings The responsibility of complying with the Contract Documents shall not be relieved by the Engineer s review and comments The Engineer s review requires not less than two 2 weeks from date the shop drawings are received by the Engineer Submittals for equipment specified in each Section with the exception of samples shall be loose leaf pages bound into a 3 ring binder and submitted as a complete package The submittal may be included in more than one volume However the submittal shall be separated into groups of types of equipment as follows 1 Group I Conduit Boxes and Devices a Wall Switches b Receptacles c Cover plates d Poke Thru Service Fittings e Fire Protection Seals UL Assembly Details 2 Group II Switchgear a Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards b Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 3 Group IlI Ligh
190. E A Performance Standards The system shall conform to the following 1 Graphic Display The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 10 seconds 2 Graphic Refresh The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 8 seconds February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Object Command The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 2 seconds Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds 4 Object Scan All changes of state and change of analog values will be transmitted over the high speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will have been current within the previous 60 seconds 5 Alarm Response Time The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 60 seconds When the alarm is dialed out by modem this value shall not exceed 2 minutes 6 Program Execution Frequency Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control 7 Performance Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a select
191. E C1 A Carpet Tile C1 Subject to compliance with requirements provide the following 1 Basis of Design Manufacturer Shaw www shawfloors com a Color As indicated on the drawings b Pattern As indicated on the drawings c Size 24 inch x 24 inch 2 3 ACCESSORIES A Sub Floor Filler White premix latex type recommended by flooring material manufacturer B Edge Strips Vinyl color as selected C Adhesives Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer compatible with materials being adhered maximum VOC of 50 g L CRI Green Label certified in lieu of labeled product independent test report showing compliance is acceptable PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify that sub floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile B Verify that sub floor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub floor surfaces C Cementitious Sub floor Surfaces Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH 1 Testin accordance with ASTM F710 2 Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer D Verify that concrete sub floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity obtain instructions if test results are
192. EQUIREMENTS A Section 064100 Architectural Wood Casework 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2010b B AWI AWMAC QSI Quality Standard Illustrated Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 2005 8th Ed Version 2 0 C ISSFA 2 Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material International Solid Surface Fabricators Association 2001 2007 D NEMA LD 8 High Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005 E PS 1 Structural Plywood 2007 1 4 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Product Data Manufacturer s data sheets on each product to be used including 1 Preparation instructions and recommendations 2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3 Specimen warranty C Shop Drawings Complete details of materials and installation combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections D Selection Samples Submit five samples for each finish product specified color chips representing manufacturer s full range of available colors and patterns E Verification Samples Submit five samples for each finish product specified minimum size 6 inches square representing actual product color and patterns F Test Reports Chemical resistance testing showing compliance with specified require
193. ER SYSTEMS 211313 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 5 SPRINKLERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering m products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following AFAC Inc Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co Inc Tyco Fire amp Building Products LP Venus Fire Protection Ltd Victaulic Company Viking Corporation N O OTRO O General Requirements 1 Standard UL s Fire Protection Equipment Directory listing or Approval Guide published by FM Global listing 2 Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers 175 psig 1200 kPa minimum 3 Pressure Rating for High Pressure Automatic Sprinklers 250 psig 1725 kPa minimum or 300 psig 2070 kPa as required Automatic Sprinklers with Heat Responsive Element 1 Nonresidential Applications UL 199 2 Characteristics Nominal 1 2 inch 12 7 mm orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5 6 and for Ordinary temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application Sprinkler Finishes 1 Chrome plated 2 Bronze 3 Painted Special Coatings 1 Wax 2 Corrosion resistant paint Sprinkler Escutcheons Materials types and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications Escutcheons for concealed flush and recessed type sprinklers are specifi
194. ESSORY MATERIALS A Accessory Materials Provide all primers sealers cleaning agents cleaning cloths sanding materials and clean up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not commercial quality B Patching Material Latex filler Fastener Head Cover Material Latex filler PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared B Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums 1 Gypsum Wallboard 12 percent 2 Masonry Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry 12 percent 3 Interior Wood 15 percent measured in accordance with ASTM D4442 3 2 PREPARATION A B O Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under
195. Electric tankless domestic water heaters PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type and size of domestic water heater indicated Shop Drawings 1 Wiring Diagrams For power INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Domestic Water Heater Labeling Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Field quality control reports Warranty Sample of special warranty CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and maintenance data QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application ASHRAE IESNA Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 WARRANTY Special Warranty Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric domestic water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period February 7 2014 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Warranty Periods From date of Substantial Completion a Electric Tankless Domestic Water Heaters One year PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 ELECTRIC TANKLESS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS A Electric Tankless Domestic Water Heaters 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products
196. Electronic Engineers IEEE and the American Society of Testing Materials ASTM are made a part of these Specifications and shall apply wherever applicable Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items for which replacement parts are available When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer or partner manufacturers that offer a certified solution Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer but must offer a certified end to end solution Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A EXAMINATION OF SURFACE CONDITIONS Prior to the start of work the Contractor shall carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions Install equipment in accordance with applicable codes and regulations the original design and the referenced standards Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions and discrepancies have been fully resolved 3 2 PRO
197. Field quality control reports QUALITY ASSURANCE Surface Burning Characteristics For insulation and related materials as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive mastic tapes and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency 1 Insulation Installed Indoors Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 50 or less 2 Insulation Installed Outdoors Flame spread index of 75 or less and smoke developed index of 150 or less PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 INSULATION MATERIALS A Products shall not contain asbestos lead mercury or mercury compounds B Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process C Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Closed cell sponge or expanded rubber materials Comply with ASTM C 534 Type I for tubular materials February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements a Aeroflex USA Inc Aerocel 2 2 2 3 b Armacell LLC AP Armaflex C K Flex USA Insul Lock Insul Tube and K FLEX LS ADHESIVES Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates and for bonding insulation to
198. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A Description Welded shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon steel shapes 2 5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A Structural Steel ASTM A 36 A 36M carbon steel plates shapes and bars black and galvanized B Grout ASTMC 1107 factory mixed and packaged dry hydraulic cement nonshrink and nonmetallic grout suitable for interior and exterior applications 1 Properties Nonstaining noncorrosive and nongaseous 2 Design Mix 5000 psi 34 5 MPa 28 day compressive strength PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A C D HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Metal Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89 Install hangers supports clamps and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure Metal Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation Comply with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89 Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze pipe hangers 1 Pipes of Various Sizes Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers 2 Field fabricate from ASTM A 36 A 36M carbon steel shapes selected for loads being supported Weld steel according to
199. HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 CONDENSER WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller 1 BronzeValves May be provided with solder joint ends instead of threaded ends 2 Ball Valves Three piece full port bronze with bronze trim 3 6 SECONDARY WATER SYSTEM AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM VALVE SCHEDULE A Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller 1 Bronze and Brass Valves May be provided with solder joint ends instead of threaded ends B Pipe NPS 2 1 2 and Larger 1 Iron Single Flange Butterfly Valves 200 CWP NBR seat stainless steel disc 2 Iron Swing Check Valves Class 250 metal seats 3 Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control Class 150 lever and spring or weight 4 Iron Center Guided Check Valves Class 150 globe metal seat END OF SECTION 23 05 23 February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes Metal pipe hangers and supports Trapeze pipe hangers Fiberglass pipe hangers Metal framing systems Fiberglass strut systems Thermal hanger shield inserts Fastener systems Pipe stands Equipment suppo
200. HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 3 5 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Figure 3 6 Conical Tees Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct a Velocity 1000 fom 5 m s or Lower 90 degree tap b Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm 5 to 7 6 m s Conical tap C Velocity 1500 fpm 7 6 m s or Higher 45 degree lateral END OF SECTION 233113 February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 11 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Manual volume dampers Control dampers Fire dampers Smoke dampers Combination fire and smoke dampers Turning vanes Duct mounted access doors Flexible connectors Flexible ducts O0 ND OT BrO NE Related Requirements wk Division 23 Section HVAC Gravity Ventilators for roof mounted ventilator caps 2 Division 28 Section Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System for duct mounted fire and smoke detectors 3 Division 28 Section Zoned DC Loop Fire Alarm System for duct mounted fire and smoke detectors ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product 1 For duct silencers include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data Include breakout
201. IPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Center Beam Clamps MSS Type 21 For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams 4 Welded Beam Attachments MSS Type 22 For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large 5 C Clamps MSS Type 23 For structural shapes 6 Top Beam Clamps MSS Type 25 For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge 7 Side Beam Clamps MSS Type 27 For bottom of steel I beams H Comply with MSS SP 69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections l Comply with MFMA 103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections J Use mechanical expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction END OF SECTION 23 05 29 January 31 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY This Section includes the following Adjust list below to suit Project 1
202. ITTING INSTALLATION Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 DN 50 and Smaller Plastic to metal transition fittings or unions DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 DN 50 and Smaller Use dielectric couplings or nipples HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with requirements for seismic restraint devices in ASCE SEI 7 Comply with requirements for pipe hanger support products and installation 1 Vertical Piping MSS Type 8 or 42 clamps 2 Individual Straight Horizontal Piping Runs a 100 Feet 30 m and Less MSS Type 1 adjustable steel clevis hangers b Longer Than 100 Feet 30 m MSS Type 43 adjustable roller hangers c Longer Than 100 Feet 30 m if Indicated MSS Type 49 spring cushion rolls 3 Multiple Straight Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet 30 m or Longer MSS Type 44 pipe rolls Support pipe rolls on trapeze 4 Base of Vertical Piping MSS Type 52 spring hangers February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor D Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double rod hangers to a minimum of 3 8 inch 10 mm E Install hangers for copper tubing with t
203. Inland Inc SilentGuard Gypsum Shaftliner USG Corporation Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Papp 2 4 ACCESSORIES A Acoustic Insulation ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber friction fit type unfaced Thickness As indicated on the drawings B Acoustic Sealant Non hardening non skinning for use in conjunction with gypsum board Joint Materials ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions 1 Tape 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners except as otherwise indicated 2 Ready mixed vinyl based joint compound D Trim Accessories 1 Interior Trim ASTM C 1047 a Material Galvanized or aluminum coated steel or rolled zinc b Shapes 1 LC Bead J shaped exposed long flange receives joint compound 2 Expansion control joint 2 Cornerbead Grabber Construction Products No Coat Pre finished Cornerbead E Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0 03 inch In Thickness to Wood Members and to Gypsum Board ASTM C1002 self piercing tapping type cadmium plated for exterior locations F Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0 033 to 0 112 Inch in Thickness ASTM C954 steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs G Nails for Attachment to Wood Members ASTM C514 H Anchorage to Substrate Tie wire nails screws and other metal supports of type and size to
204. LITY ASSURANCE A Source Limitations Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers overcurrent protective devices components and accessories within same product category from single source from single manufacturer B Product Selection for Restricted Space Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers including clearances between enclosures and adjacent surfaces and other items Comply with indicated maximum dimensions C Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application D Comply with NFPA 70 February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Limitations Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following B 1 10 A conditions unless otherwise indicated 1 Ambient Temperature Not less than minus 22 deg F minus 30 deg C and not exceeding 104 deg F 40 deg 2 Altitude Not exceeding 6600 feet 2010 m Interruption of Existing Electric Service Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated 1 Notify Construction Manager no fewer than
205. Lumber NHLA Graded in accordance with AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Grade II Custom average moisture content of 5 10 percent species as scheduled 2 4 PANEL MATERIALS A Veneer Faced Plywood Finish HPVA HP 1 graded in accordance with AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated core of particleboard or medium density fiberboard type of glue recommended for specific application thickness as required face veneer as follows 1 Exposed Surfaces Grade AA Birch plain sliced book matched 2 Semi Exposed Surfaces Grade A Birch plain sliced book matched 3 Concealed Surfaces Grade B Birch plain sliced book matched Particleboard ANSI A208 1 medium density industrial type as specified in AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure sanded faces thickness as required use for components indicated on drawings Medium Density Fiberboard MDF ANSI A208 2 type as specified in AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application sanded faces thickness as required 1 Use for components indicated on the drawings 2 Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated Hardboard AHA A135 4 Pressed wood fiber with resin binder Class 1 Tempered 1 4 inch
206. M Class 3 soft temper zinc coated steel 12 gage 2 68 mm Rod Hangers 3 16 inch 5 mm minimum diameter cadmium plated threaded steel rod Hook Hangers Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment cord and locking type plug February 7 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A 3 2 3 3 INSTALLATION Lighting fixtures 1 Set level plumb and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated 2 Install lamps in each luminaire Temporary Lighting If it is necessary and approved by Architect to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary When construction is sufficiently complete remove the temporary luminaires disassemble clean thoroughly install new lamps and reinstall Remote Mounting of Ballasts Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer Verify with ballast manufacturers maximum distance between ballast and luminaire Lay in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports Use grid as a support element 1 Install ceiling support system wires independent of the ceiling suspension devices for each fixture Locate not more than 6 inches 150 mm from lighting fixture corners 2 Support Clips Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceilin
207. N 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Flush wood doors flush configuration fire rated non rated and acoustical 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 081213 Hollow Metal Frames B Section 087111 Door Hardware C Section 088000 Glazing D Section 099000 Painting and Coating Site finishing of doors 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2010 B ASTM E1408 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems 1991 Reapproved 2000 C AWI AWMAC WI1 AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards 2009 D AWI AWMAC QSI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 2005 8th Ed Version 2 0 E ICC IBC International Building Code 2009 F ITS DIR Directory of Listed Products Intertek Testing Services NA Inc current edition G NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2010 H UL BMD Building Materials Directory Underwriters Laboratories Inc current edition UL 1784 Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition Including All Revisions 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data Indicate door core materials and construction veneer species type and characteristics B Shop Drawings Show doors and frames elevations sizes
208. NNECTIONS A Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties Specific connection 3 4 requirements are as follows 1 Connect supply and return hydronic piping to heat pump with hose kits 2 Connect heat pump condensate drain pan to indirect waste connection with condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts Specific connection requirements are as follows ate Connect supply and return ducts to water source heat pumps with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section Air Duct Accessories Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables CLEANING Replace filters used during construction prior to air balance or substantial completion After completing installation of exposed factory finished water source heat pumps inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes END OF SECTION 23 81 46 February 7 2014 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP 238146 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260100 BASI
209. OJECT CONDITIONS A Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public 1 Obtain required permits 2 Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241 3 Use of explosives is not permitted 4 Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures Provide erect and maintain temporary barriers and security devices 6 Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public 7 Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants 8 Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit 9 Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits do not obstruct required exits at any time protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations 10 Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse infringe upon or limit access to their property Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed 1 Provide bracing and shoring 2 Prevent movement or settlement
210. ORK 125111 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 211313 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Section Includes 1 Pipes fittings and specialties 2 Sprinklers 3 Pressure gages B Related Sections 1 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A Wet Pipe Sprinkler System Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Standard Pressure Piping System Component Listed for 175 psig 1200 kPa minimum working pressure B Delegated Design Floors undergoing renovation with existing sprinkler systems may be designed per the NFPA pipe schedule method Full areas currently without existing sprinklers systems shall be hydraulically designed Design these sprinkler systems using performance requirements and design criteria indicated it Use the most recent fire pump flow test records available from the building engineer s files C The sprinkler contractor shall reconfigure the existing wet sprinkler system to provide full sprinkler protection for the entire renovated floor Full sprinkler protection means that the automatic sprinkler systems shall be installed throughout the space in accordance with the requirements of the International B
211. OTECTION A Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation END OF SECTION February 7 2014 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Carpet tile fully adhered 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A C Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Reclamation Recycling of new carpet tile scrap Section 033000 Cast in Place Concrete Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors Section 096800 Carpeting Broadloom carpet 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A B C CRI CIS Carpet Installation Standard Carpet and Rug Institute 2009 CRI 104 Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials Carpet and Rug Institute 2002 CRI GLA Green Label Testing Program Approved Adhesive Products Carpet and Rug Institute Current Edition 1 4 SUBMITTALS A B C See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Shop Drawings Indicate layout of joints Product Data Provide data on specified products describing physical and performance characteristics sizes patterns colors available and method of installation Samples Submit five carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected Submit five 12 inch long samples of e
212. Outlet Box manufacturer s al Steel City 2 Raco 3 Or Approved Equal J Pull Box manufacturer s 1 Hoffman 2 Or Approved Equal K Approved Cable Tray System manufacturer s i Flex Tray 2 Wiremold 3 EZ Tray 4 B Line L Approved Cable Hanger manufacturer s 1 Erico Products Caddy Part Numbers J Hook Sling CABLECAT 2 Bridle Ring 4BRT 20 3 Bridle Ring Bracket 4 TIB M Approved Velcro Strap manufacturer s J Panduit 2 Or Approved Equal 2 2 CONDUIT A Rigid and Intermediate Conduit 1 Rigid conduit intermediate conduit couplings locknuts bushings eloows and connectors shall be standard thread All materials shall be steel Set screw or non threaded fittings are not permitted B Non Metallic PVC Conduit 1 Non metallic conduit shall be heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC 2 Couplings and connectors for non metallic conduit shall be of the same material and be the product of the same manufacturer of the conduit furnished C Electrical Metallic Tubing EMT 1 Electrical metallic tubing EMT couplings and connectors shall be steel Malleable iron pressure cast or die cast fittings are not permitted 2 Fittings for 2 EMT and smaller shall be steel set screw type except where otherwise noted Fittings for 2 5 and larger shall be steel set screw type with two 2 screws for connectors and four 4 screws for couplings All connectors shall be insulated throat type D Conduit Support 1 Individual conduit hangers shall be
213. P A Provide mock up of typical base cabinet wall cabinet and countertop including hardware finishes and plumbing accessories B Locate where directed Mock up may remain as part of the Work 1 7 PRE INSTALLATION MEETING A Convene not less than one week before starting work of this section February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 8 COORDINATION A coordinate sizes and locations of framing blocking furring reinforcements and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated 1 9 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas If woodwork must be stored in other installation areas store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in Project Conditions Article 1 10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Limitations Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed wet work is complete and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period B Field Measurements Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction verify dimensions of other construction by fie
214. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 BACKBONE CABLES INSIDE PLANT February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE 271313 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 A Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI TIA 568 C 2 document manufacturer s recommendations and best industry practices B Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables A plastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg 200 Ib shall be co installed with all cable installed in any conduit D Where cables are housed in conduits the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits E Exposed cables must be CMP rated Where backbone cables and horizontal cables are installed in a cable tray or wireway backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables G Leave 10 of slack on each end of copper backbone cable H Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely attached at the top of the cable run with a wire mesh grip and on alternating floors or as required by local codes l Vertical runs of cable shall be supported to messenger strand cable ladder or other method to provide proper support for the weight of the cable J Large bundles of cables and or heavy cables shall be attached using metal clamps and or metal banding to support the cabl
215. Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Flexmaster U S A Inc 2 McGill AirFlow LLC 3 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Insulated Flexible Duct UL 181 Class 1 2 ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring C steel wire fibrous glass insulation polyethylenevapor barrier film 1 Pressure Rating 10 inch wg positive and 1 0 inch wg negative 2 Maximum Air Velocity 4000 fpm 3 Temperature Range Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F 4 Insulation R value 4 2 Flexible Duct Connectors at Clamps Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards for fibrous glass ducts B Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials use galvanized steel accessories in galvanized steel ducts C Install volume dampers at points on supply return and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel 1 Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts 2 Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts D Set dampers to fully open posi
216. Performance Requirements Article Where fully tempered glass is indicated provide Kind FT heat treated float glass 2 2 GLASS PRODUCTS A Float Glass ASTM C 1036 Type I Quality Q3 Class clear unless otherwise indicated 2 3 GLASS MATERIALS A Float Glass All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated 1 Annealed Type ASTM C1036 Type l transparent flat Class 1 clear Quality Q3 glazing select Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types ASTM C1048 Tinted Types Color and performance characteristics as indicated Thicknesses As indicated for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness 5 Manufacturers AGC Flat Glass North America Inc www afgglass com Guardian Industries Corporation www guardian com Pilkington North America Inc www pilkington com na PPG Industries Inc www ppgglazing com Viracon Apogee Enterprises Inc www viracon com Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements PWR woan B Laminated Glass Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172 1 Plastic Interlayer 0 030 inch thick minimum 2 Where fully tempered is specified or required provide glass that has been tempered by the tong less horizontal method 3 Manufacturers a AGC Flat Glass North America Inc www afgglass com b Cardinal Glass Industries www cardinalcorp com February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 4 25 Park Place Phase
217. Pipe and Conduit Penetrations of diameter 4 inches or less Any material meeting requirements 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 3071 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W L 3030 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W L 3030 T Rating 1 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W L 3030 F Rating 1 hour Firestopping at Cable Tray Penetrations Any material meeting requirements 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 8069 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W L 8002 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W L 8002 F Rating 1 1 2 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W L 8002 F Rating 1 hour Firestopping at Cable Penetrations not in Conduit or Cable Tray Caulk or putty 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 3021 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W L 3028 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W L 3028 F Rating 1 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W L 3028 F Rating 1 hour Firestopping at Control Joints without Penetrations Any material meeting requirements 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 0012 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W J 003 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W J 003 F Rating 1 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W J 003 F Rating 1 hour Firestopping Between Edge of Floor Slab and Curtain Wall without Penetrations Glass fiber or mineral fiber safing insulation UL Desi
218. RICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes 1 Electrical equipment coordination and installation 2 Sleeves for raceways and cables 3 Sleeve seals 4 Grout 5 Common electrical installation requirements 1 3 SUBMITTALS A Product Data Fire protection seals U L assembly details 1 4 COORDINATION A Coordinate arrangement mounting and support of electrical equipment 1 To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated 2 To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations 3 To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope 4 So connecting raceways cables wire ways cable trays and bus ways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment B Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in concrete masonry walls and other structural components C Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed
219. RODUCTS 2 1 A B C CONCEALED WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS 6 TONS 21 kW AND SMALLER Manufacturers Addison Products Company Bard Manufacturing Company Carrier Corporation ClimateMaster Inc FHP Manufacturing Inc Hydro Temp Corporation Inc Mammoth Inc McQuay International Trane Water Furnace International Inc me 0000 NO OR GON 2 Description Packaged water source heat pump with temperature controls factory assembled tested and rated according to ARI ISO 13256 1 Cabinet and Chassis Galvanized steel casing with the following features 1 Access panel for access and maintenance of internal components 2 Knockouts for electrical and piping connections 3 Flanged duct connections 4 Cabinet Insulation Glass fiber liner minimum 1 2 inch thick complying with UL 181 February 7 2014 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP 238146 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 5 Condensate Drainage stainless steel drain pan with condensate drain piping projecting through unit cabinet and complying with ASHRAE 62 1 6 Airstream Surfaces Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 D Fan Direct driven centrifugal with multispeed motor resiliently mounted in fan inlet 1 General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 2 Motor Multispeed permanentl
220. RS 079005 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience C Applicator Qualifications Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience 1 7 MOCK UP A Provide mock up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 014000 B Construct mock up with specified sealant types and with other components noted Locate where directed D Mock up may not remain as part of the Work 1 8 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Deliver materials in original containers or bundles with labels showing manufacturer product name or designation color shelf life and installation instructions 1 9 FIELD CONDITIONS A Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation 1 10 COORDINATION A Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section 1 11 WARRANTY A See Section 017800 Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements B Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion C Warranty Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion or do not cure PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A S
221. S 232913 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility s central control system B Bundle train and support wiring in enclosures C Connect selector switches and other automatic control selection devices where applicable 1 Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual control position 2 Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety type control devices such as low and high pressure cutouts high temperature cutouts and motor overload protectors 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections B Acceptance Testing Preparation 1 Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller component connecting supply feeder and control circuit 2 Test continuity of each circuit C Tests and Inspections 1 Inspect controllers wiring components connections and equipment installation 2 Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element component connecting motor supply feeder and control circuits 3 Test continuity of each circuit 4 Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages If outside this range for any motor
222. S 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard National Institute of Standards and Technology Department of Commerce 2005 K WI MAN Manual of Millwork Woodwork Institute 2003 1 4 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Shop Drawings Indicate materials component profiles and elevations assembly methods joint details fastening methods accessory listings hardware location and schedule of finishes C Product Data Provide data for hardware accessories including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes For hardboard medium density fiberboard particleboard plywood high pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate thermoset decorative overlay solid surfacing material cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes D Samples Submit five actual samples of architectural cabinet construction minimum 12 inches square illustrating proposed cabinet countertop and shelf unit substrate and finish E Samples Submit five actual sample items of proposed pulls hinges shelf standards and locksets demonstrating hardware design quality and finish F Product Certificates Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requiremen
223. SCHEDULE Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows Supply Ducts 1 Ducts Connected to Heat Pumps and Terminal Units a Pressure Class Positive 1 inch wg b Minimum SMACNA Seal Class B c SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular 12 d SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval 12 2 Ducts Connected to Constant Volume Air Handling Units lt Insert equipment gt a Pressure Class Positive 2 inch wg 500 Pa 3 inch wg 750 Pa lt Insert value gt b Minimum SMACNA Seal Class A B c SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular 6 12 24 lt Insert value gt d SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval 6 12 24 lt Insert value gt 3 Ducts Connected to Variable Air Volume Air Handling Units lt Insert equipment gt a Pressure Class Positive 83 inch wg 750 Pa 4 inch wg 1000 Pa lt Insert value gt b Minimum SMACNA Seal Class A B C SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular 3 6 lt Insert value gt d SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval 3 6 lt Insert value gt Return Ducts 1 Ducts Connected to Return Air Shafts a Pressure Class Positive or negative 1 inch wg b Minimum SMACNA Seal Class B C SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular 12 Intermediate Reinforcement February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Galvanized Steel Ducts Galvanized steel E Liner
224. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840 Comply with requirements of GA 600 for fire rated assemblies 1 Maintain one copy of standards at project site B Installer Qualifications Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing with minimum 3 years of documented experience C Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned D Donot install panels that are wet those that are moisture damaged and those that are mold damaged February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include but are not limited to discoloration sagging or irregular shape 2 Indications that panels are mold damaged include but are not limited to fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA 216 1 See PART 3 for finishing requirements Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics 1 Acoustic Attenuation STC of 45 49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413 based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90 Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts Provide completed assemblies with the following characte
225. Structural Penetrations Where conduits wireways and other raceways pass through fire partitions fire walls or walls and floors provide a code compliant effective barrier against the spread of fire smoke and gases E All penetrations where continuous conduit is not used shall be sleeved with a section of EMT conduit of appropriate diameter to accommodate all cable and firestopping materials and shall extend at least one inch beyond both sides of the penetration F No gaps or rough edges shall be allowed between wall and conduit sleeve 3 2 CONDUIT SYSTEM A Conceal all conduits except in unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms or as indicated by symbol on the Drawings B Leave all empty conduits with a 200 pound test nylon cord pull line Flattened dented or deformed conduits are not permitted and shall be removed and replaced D Fasten conduit support device to structure with wood screws on wood toggle bolts on hollow masonry anchors as specified on solid masonry or concrete and machine bolts clamps or spring steel clips on steel E Install conduit with wiring including homeruns as indicated on the Drawings Any change resulting in a savings in labor or materials is to be made only in accordance with a contract change Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and when approved by Engineer by written authorization F Conduit shall be run parallel or at right angles to existing walls ceilings
226. T POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Motors Used with Reduced Voltage and Multispeed Controllers Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads Provide terminals in motor terminal box suited to control method Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers 1 Ratings characteristics and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer 2 Windings Copper magnet wire with moisture resistant insulation varnish designed and tested to resist transient spikes high frequencies and short time rise pulses produced by pulse width modulated inverters 3 Inverter Duty Mortors Class B temperature rise Class H insulation 4 AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring Install a maintenance free circumferential conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring AEGIS SGR on the AC motor to discharge shaft currents to ground 5 Conductive Shaft Surface Coating Engineered silver flake lt 1m flake February 7 2014 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 5 SINGLE PHASE MOTORS A Motors smaller than 1 2 HP shall be one of the following to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application 1 Permanent split capacitor 2 Electronically Commutated Motor B Permanent split capacitor multispeed motors 1 Variable torque type 2 Bearings Prelubricated a
227. TECTION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A Protect materials and equipment from damage during storage at the site and throughout the construction period Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage dirt theft moisture extreme temperature and rain Damage from rain dirt sun and ground water shall be prevented by storing the equipment on elevated supports and covering the sides with securely fastened protective rigid or flexible waterproof coverings During installation equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter on the inside and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing operating or painting As determined by the Architect damaged equipment shall be fully repaired or shall be removed and replaced with new equipment to fully comply with requirements of the Contract Documents Decision of the Project Manager shall be final Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be repainted with painting equipment and finished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer 3 3 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A Equipment shall be installed in location and manner that will allow convenient access for maintenance and inspection February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Working spaces shall be not less than specified in the National Electrical Code NEC for vo
228. TION 064100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Specially fabricated cabinet units B Cabinet hardware C Preparation for installing utilities 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 061000 Rough Carpentry Support framing grounds and concealed blocking B Section 123600 Countertops C Section 099000 Painting and Coating Site finishing of cabinet exterior 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ANSI A135 4 American National Standard for Basic Hardboard 2004 B ANSI A208 1 American National Standard for Particleboard 2009 C ANSI A208 2 American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use 2009 D AWI AWMAC WI AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards 2009 E AWI AWMAC QSI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada 2005 8th Ed Version 2 0 F BHMA A156 9 American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 2010 ANSI BHMA A156 9 G HPVA HP 1 American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood Hardwood Plywood amp Veneer Association 2004 ANSI HPVA HP 1 H NEMA LD 3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2005 NHLA G 101 Rules for the Measurement amp Inspection of Hardwood amp Cypress National Hardwood Lumber Association 2007 J P
229. TPUT SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION BUILDING 25 PARK PLACE TOWER SYSTEM AIR HANDLING UNITS nput Output Al AO BO Binary Output AO Analog Output RETURN FAN R 2 S S Command Status Return Duct Static Pressure Fan discharge Return Duct Static Pressure Fan suction Return Duct Static Pressure End of shaft Return Fan Speed VFD Pressure sensor installed previously RETURN FAN R 4 S S Command Status Return Duct Static Pressure Fan discharge Return Duct Static Pressure Fan suction Return Duct Static Pressure End of shaft Return Fan Speed VFD Pressure sensor installed previously ee Plans for number and location Required even though no heating coil Five for each of floors 7 22 thru 24 ee Plans for number and location One common for general and water Various point thru BACnet See spec section wo AO for two Interior supply duct dampers ach Floor with New Smoke Dampers VAV TERMINAL UNIT EACH Damper Room Temperature Duct Velocity Supply Air Temperature RELATIVE HUMIDITY RH EACH Room RH level WSHP EACH Start Stop Room Temperature Control Valve Alarm Water detected Status MOKE DAMPERS Each floors 7 and 24 Supply Damper 2 Differential Static Pressure Relative to Outsid AIR amp DIRT FILTER PUMPS PCR 1 AND PPH 1 S S Command Status PT TTT T et fe 1T Peed 1 1 Pe T MEME CR e e e a E EE TE EE fa i _ i Ee _ es La _ Ea _ _ i
230. TS A General Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads where applicable without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following Defective manufacture fabrication or installation failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight deterioration of glazing materials or other defects in construction Thermal Movements Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components 1 Temperature Change 120 deg F 67 deg C ambient 180 deg F 100 deg C material surfaces 1 6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing Test each glazing material type tape sealant gasket glazing accessory and glass framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants 1 Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted 2 Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass tape sealants gaskets and glazing channel substrates 3 Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material including joint substrates shims sealant backings secondary seals and miscellaneous materials 4 Schedule sufficient
231. Termination Panel shall be compatible with 19 equipment Racks 19 Equipment Cabinets and wall mount brackets 2 The 24Port Optical Fiber Patch Panels shall be used in all communications closets that have more than 12 or less fiber terminations 3 The 24Port Optical Fiber Termination Panels shall use SC terminations for both multi mode and single mode fiber as listed above 4 The 24Port Optical Fiber Termination Panels shall use SC Ultra Polished terminations for Single mode terminations C High Density 144 Port Optical Fiber Termination Panel 1 The 144 Port Optical Fiber Termination Panel shall be compatible with ADC NGF MDF7A100 30 Fiber Distribution Frame 2 The 144 Port Optical Fiber Termination Panels shall be used in all communications closets that have more than 432 fiber terminations in a specific location February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS 271119 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 The 144 Port Optical Fiber Termination Panel shall use LC Ultra polished connectors for Single Mode fiber terminations 3 4 110 Wall Mount Field Termination Units Wall Mount Field Termination Units shall be mounted in a level horizontal position B Wall Mount Field Termination Units shall have approved horizontal cable managers installed on top and bottom of all units C Wall Mount Field Termination Units shall have approved Vertical Cable Managers inst
232. UCT ACCESSORIES 233300 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Blades 1 Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches 2 Opposed blade design 3 Galvanized steel 4 Blade Edging Closed cell neoprene E Blade Axles 1 2 inch diameter galvanized steel blade linkage hardware of zinc plated steel and brass ends sealed against blade bearings 1 Operating Temperature Range From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F F Bearings ie Oil impregnated bronze 2 5 FIRE DAMPERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Air Balance Inc a division of Mestek Inc 2 Arrow United Industries a division of Mestek Inc 3 Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc 4 Greenheck Fan Corporation 5 Nailor Industries Inc 6 NCA Manufacturing Inc 7 Pottorff 8 Prefco Perfect Air Control Inc 9 Ruskin Company 10 Vent Products Company Inc 11 Ward Industries Inc a division of Hart amp Cooley Inc B Type Static rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL C Closing rating in ducts up to 4 inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000 fpm velocity D Fire Rating 1 1 2 hours E Frame Curtain type with blades outside airstream fabricated with roll formed 0 034 inch thick galvanized steel with mitered and interlocking corners F Mounting Sleeve Factory or field installed galvanized sheet
233. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment allow space for service and maintenance of equipment IDENTIFICATION Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping FIELD QUALITY CONTROL During installation notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction 1 Roughing in Inspection Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures 2 Final Inspection Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements Reinspection If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection make required corrections and arrange for reinspection Reports Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or in absence of published procedures as follows 1 Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired If testing is performed in segments submit separate report for each test complete with diagram of portion of piping tested 2 Leave uncovered and unconcealed new altered extended or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved Exp
234. a minimum working pressure at 225 deg F 107 deg C 2 4 SLEEVES A Galvanized Steel Sheet 0 0239 inch 0 6 mm minimum thickness round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint B Steel Pipe ASTM A 53 Type E Grade B Schedule 40 galvanized plain ends C Cast Iron Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated D Stack Sleeve Fittings Manufactured cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing 1 Underdeck Clamp Clamping ring with set screws E Molded PVC Permanent with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms F PVC Pipe ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 G Molded PE Reusable PE tapered cup shaped and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms 2 5 ESCUTCHEONS A Description Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates with an ID to closely fit around pipe tube and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening B One Piece Cast Brass Type With set screw 1 Finish Polished chrome plated C Split Casting Cast Brass Type With concealed hinge and set screw 1 Finish Polished chrome plated 2 6 GROUT A Description ASTM C 1107 Grade B nonshrink and nonmetallic dry hydraulic cement grout February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgi
235. a State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Characteristics Post hardening volume adjusting nonstaining noncorrosive nongaseous and recommended for interior and exterior applications 2 Design Mix 5000 psi 34 5 MPa 28 day compressive strength 3 Packaging Premixed and factory packaged PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A 3 2 E HVAC DEMOLITION Refer to Division 01 Section Cutting and Patching and Division 02 Section Selective Structure Demolition for general demolition requirements and procedures Disconnect demolish and remove HVAC systems equipment and components indicated to be removed 1 Piping to Be Removed Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material 2 Piping to Be Abandoned in Place Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material 3 Ducts to Be Removed Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material 4 Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material 5 Equipment to Be Removed Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment 6 Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled Disconnect and cap services and remove clean and store equipment when appropriate reinstall reconnect and make equipment operational 7 Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged Disconnect and cap services and remove equi
236. able frequency of at least once per second The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency 8 Multiple Alarm Annunciation All workstations on the network must receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other 9 Reporting Accuracy The system shall report all values with an end to end accuracy as listed or better than those listed in Table 1 10 Stability of Control Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within the tolerances listed in Table 2 11 Table 1 Reporting Accuracy Measured Variable Reported Accuracy Space Temperature 0 5 C 1 F Ducted Air 0 5 C 1 F Outside Air 1 0 C 2 F Dew Point 1 5 C 3 F Water Temperature 0 5 C 1 F Delta T 0 15 C 0 25 F Relative Humidity 5 RH Water Flow 2 of full scale Airflow terminal 10 of full scale see Note 1 Airflow measuring stations 5 of full scale Airflow pressurized spaces 3 of full scale Air Pressure ducts 25 Pa 0 1 W G Air Pressure space 3 Pa 0 01 W G Water Pressure 2 of full scale see Note 2 Electrical 1 of reading see Note 3 A V W Power factor Carbon Monoxide CO 5 of reading Carbon Dioxide CO3 50 ppm Note 1 Accuracy applies to 10 100 of scale Note 2 For both absolute and differential pressure Note 3 Not including utility supplied meters 12 Table 2 Control Stability and Accuracy Controlled Variabl
237. able rack tray Install intermediate split wire mesh grip s wherever the maximum vertical rise is exceeded Secure the cable in the backbone cabling in telecommunications rooms TR with Velcro straps as needed to prevent accidental damage to cable 3 5 TERMINATION POINTS A The amount of cable slack at termination points should allow the cable to be routed to the termination location with enough additional cable to reach a convenient location for the polishing plus an additional 5 meters or to the furthest point in the telecommunications room whichever is greater B Termination hardware should be located to allow convenient use convenient termination and facilitate routing of additional locations C When routing cable into an equipment rack cabinet the minimum bend radius should be maintained in the transition from the floor or ceiling to the rack or cabinet with the use of flexible conduit and a box end connector D In equipment racks the cable should be secured to the frame with Velcro straps to prevent accidental snagging of the cable The use of innerduct is required February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 271323 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Optical fiber warning signs should be placed on all innerducts and conduits containing optical fiber cable Warning signs can help prevent damage resulting from the cable being mistaken for something
238. abricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project with edge and face clearances edge and surface conditions and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications to comply with system performance requirements PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B Examine framing glazing channels and stops with Installer present for compliance with the following 1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances including those for size squareness and offsets at corners 2 Presence and functioning of weep systems 3 Minimum required face and edge clearances 4 Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 PREPARATION A Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates B Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable Do not use materials that will February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 leave visible marks in the completed work 3 3 GLAZING GENERAL A Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass sealants gaskets and other glazing materials
239. ace Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together not lapped Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape 3 5 GASKET GLAZING A E Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly with allowance for stretch during installation Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners Installation with Drive in Wedge Gaskets Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings Compress gaskets to produce
240. ace grout around anchors H Cure placed grout END OF SECTION 230500 February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 A A A RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section includes general requirements for single phase and polyphase general purpose horizontal small and medium squirrel cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer s factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation COORDINATION Coordinate features of motors installed units and accessory devices to be compatible with the following Motor controllers Torque speed and horsepower requirements of the load Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location Pos PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections B Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated C Comply with IEEE 841 for severe duty
241. ach piping system on 8 1 2 by 11 inch A4 bond paper Tabulate valve number piping system system abbreviation as shown on valve tag location of valve room or space normal operating position open closed or modulating and variations for identification Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses ate Valve tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION A Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices including dirt oil grease release agents and incompatible primers paints and encapsulants 3 2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment B Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible G Provide Bakelite nameplates on all equipment motor starters remote push button stations insertion type thermostats remote bulb thermometers filter gauges pump pressure gauges fans pumps panel mounted controls and manual damper operators multi zone damper sections by room number room designation zone number etc 3 3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces machine rooms accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts tunnels and plenums and exterior exposed locations as follows 1 Near each valve and control device 2 Near each branch connection excluding sho
242. ack 2 Phase B Red 3 Phase C Blue 4 Neutral White b Colors for 480 277 V Circuits 1 Phase A Brown 2 Phase B Orange 3 Phase C Yellow 4 Neutral White or Gray c Field Applied Color Coding Conductor Tape Apply in half lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches 150 mm from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings 2 Identify conductors cables and terminals in enclosures and at junctions terminals and pull points Identify by system and circuit designation C Equipment Identification Labels On each unit of equipment install unique designation label that is consistent with drawings and details Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment control panels Systems include power lighting control communication signal monitoring and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification 1 Labeling Instructions a Indoor Equipment Engraved laminated acrylic or melamine label Unless otherwise indicated provide a single line of text with 1 2 inch 13 mm high February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 letters on 1 1 2 inch 38 mm high label where two lines of text are required use labels 2 inches 50 mm hi
243. acturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified GreenSeal GS 11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification Manufacturer s Instructions Indicate special surface preparation procedures Maintenance Data Submit data on cleaning touch up and repair of painted and coated surfaces Qualification Data For Applicator 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified with minimum three years documented experience Applicator Qualifications Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience Source Limitations Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats 1 7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes 1 8 MOCK UP A See Section 014000 Quality Requirements for general requirements for mock up B Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color texture and finish C Locate where directed D Mock up may not remain as part of the work 1 9 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers inspect to verify acceptability B Container Label Include manufacturer s name type of paint brand name lot number brand code coverag
244. all the DDC Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at the PC workstation local I O device or communications with other panels on the network a b February 7 2014 All alarm or point change reports shall include the point s English language description and the time and date of occurrence The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination categories PC printer DDC Controller etc to provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms Each DDC Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start up Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user defined list of operator devices or PCs In addition to the point s descriptor and the time and date the user shall be able to print display or store a 200 character or more alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 6 6 A variety of historical data collec
245. alled in all applicable positions Wall Mount Field Termination Units shall have cable labeling strips installed on all units Wall Mount Field Termination Units shall be mounted no lower than 2 from the ground Unless specified on the drawings the location for mounting of Wall Mount S110 Field Termination Units shall be coordinated with the owner Information Systems and Technology END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS 271119 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271123 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT amp LADDER RACKS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full C This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Cable Management amp Ladder Rack 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Product data 1 3 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically ad
246. alls using sanitary type one part mildew resistant silicone sealant Match sealant color to fixture color CONNECTIONS Connect fixtures with water supplies stops and risers and with traps soil waste and vent piping Use size fittings required to match fixtures Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section Domestic Water Piping Install ball gate or globe shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture Install valve upstream from filter for water cooler Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ADJUSTING Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height Adjust pressure water cooler temperature settings CLEANING After installing fixture inspect unit Remove paint splatters and other spots dirt and debris Repair damaged finish to match original finish Clean fixtures on completion of installation according to manufacturer s written instructions Provide protective covering for installed fixtures Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner END OF SECTION 224716 February 7 2014 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following 1 Piping materials and installation in
247. an after hours use reporting that tracks daily monthly and annual use for each relay for energy tracking END OF SECTION 23 09 24 February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 INPUT OUTPUT SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION BUILDING 25 PARK PLACE TOWER SYSTEM SECONDARY nput Output Al AO BO Binary Output AO Analog Output ECONDARY PUMPS P 6 AND P 7 S S Command Status Differential Pressure 14th Floor Pump Speed VFD ECONDARY PUMPS P 9 AND P 10 S S Command Status Differential Pressure 14th Floor Pump Speed VFD AIR HANDLING UNIT AC 2 S S Command Status Supply Duct Static Pressure Fan Discharge Supply Duct Static Pressure Supply Duct Static Pressure Each Floor Supply Fan Speed VFD AIR HANDLING UNIT AC 4 S S Command Status Supply Duct Static Pressure Fan Discharge Supply Duct Static Pressure Supply Duct Static Pressure Each Floor Supply Fan Speed VFD RETURN FAN R 1 S S Command Status Return Duct Static Pressure Fan discharge Return Duct Static Pressure Fan suction Return Duct Static Pressure End of shaft A T T Pebet ETT T ee TTT T ed TTT e TT T d MEE Pe Teele Ses NANENANE bu _ a 2 a ae _ ted _ zi ia ia _ _ i tal La E LG La mal February 7 2014 230925 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 INPUT OU
248. and Larger Two 2 5 percent taps above and four 2 5 percent taps below normal full capacity G Insulation Class 220 deg C UL component recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature H Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger 1 Complying with NEMA TP 1 Class 1 efficiency levels 2 Tested according to NEMA TP 2 l K Factor Rating Transformers serving MDF and IDF room loads shall be K 4 rated and shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for non sinusoidal load current handling capability to the degree defined by designated K rating 1 Unit shall not overheat when carrying full load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K 4 rating 2 Indicate value of K rating on transformer nameplate J Low Sound Level Requirements Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57 12 91 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure and ambient temperature requirements for each transformer February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer s written instructions C Examine walls floors roofs and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers
249. andard B Shop Drawings Details of each opening showing elevations glazing frame profiles and identifying location of different finishes if any C Samples Submit five samples of frame metal 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes February 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 colors and surface textures D Installation Instructions Manufacturer s published instructions including any special installation instructions relating to this project E Manufacturer s Certificate Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience B Obtain hollow metal work from single manufacturer C Maintain atthe project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840 B Protect with resilient packaging avoid humidity build up under coverings prevent corrosion C Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames tack welded to jambs and mullions 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication 1 8 COORDINATION A Coordinate installation of anchorage
250. ants for water coolers Provide HFC 134a tetrafluoroethane refrigerant unless otherwise indicated Cabinet Steel with powder coat finish Bubbler One with adjustable stream regulator located on deck Control Push button Drain Grid with NPS 1 1 4 DN 32 tailpiece Supply NPS 3 8 DN 10 with shutoff valve Waste Fitting ASME A112 18 2 CSA B125 2 NPS 1 1 4 DN 32 brass P trap Filter One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead reduction to below EPA standards with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate February 7 2014 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 11 Cooling System Electric with precooler hermetically sealed compressor cooling coil air cooled condensing unit corrosion resistant tubing refrigerant corrosion resistant metal storage tank and adjustable thermostat a Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application 12 Capacities and Characteristics Cooled Water 8 gph 0 0084 L s Ambient Air Temperature 90 deg F 32 deg C Inlet Water Temperature 80 deg F 27 deg C Cooled Water Temperature 50 deg F 10 deg C Electrical Characteristics eoaoop 1 Motor Horsepower 1 4 2 Volts 120 V ac 3 Phase Single 4 Hertz 60 5 Full Load Amper
251. apor barrier mastic applied in a Z shaped pattern over insulation face along butt end of insulation and over the surface Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches 75 mm Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches 50 mm on longitudinal seams and end joints At end joints secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches 450 mm 0 C Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface Install insulation on round and flat oval duct eloows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow Insulate duct stiffeners hangers and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 inch 150 mm wide strips of same material used to insulate duct Secure on alternating sides of stiffener hanger and flange with pins spaced 6 inches 150 mm o c DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE GENERAL Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation DLO OIR ON gt Indoor concealed supply and outdoor air Indoor exposed supply and outdoor air Indoor concealed return located in unconditioned space Indoor exposed return located in unconditioned space Indoor concealed Type l commercial kitchen hood exhaust Indoor exposed Type I commercial kitchen hood exhaust Indoor concealed oven and warewash exhaust February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02
252. arate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled apop samo Templates for doors frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements Contract closeout submittals 1 Operation and maintenance data Complete information for installed door hardware 2 Warranty Completed and executed warranty forms 1 6 QUALITY CRITERIA A Supplier Qualifications February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 The finish hardware supplier shall be a factory authorized distributor with office and warehouse facilities within a 100 mile radius of Atlanta Georgia 2 The finish hardware supplier shall have a record of successful in service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity type and quality to that indicated for this Project 3 The finish hardware supplier shall employ an experienced architectural hardware consultant AHC who is available to Owner Architect and Contractor at reasonable times during the course of the work for consultation B The hardware manufacturer s representative s shall conduct a pre installation conference with the Contractor s installer a representat
253. ards Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IEEE a Standard 519 1992 IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control 2 Underwriters laboratories a UL508C 3 National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NEMA a ICS 7 0 AC Adjustable Speed Drives 4 IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2 5 National Electric Code NEC a NEC 430 120 Adjustable Speed Drive Systems 6 International Building Code IBC a IBC 2006 Seismic referencing ASC 7 05 and ICC AC 156 B Qualifications 1 VFDs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly VFD s that require the customer to supply external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not acceptable VFDs with red label UL stickers requiring additional branch circuit protection are not acceptable The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need for input fuses 2 CE Mark The VFD shall conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic Compatibility directive a requirement for CE marking The VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800 3 for the First Environment restricted level 3 The entire VFD enclosure including the bypass shall be seismically certified and labeled as such in accordance with the 2006 International Building Code IBC a VFD manufacturer shall provide Seismic Certification and Installation requirements at time of submittal b Seismic importance factor of 1 5 rating is required and shall be based upon actual shake test data as defined by ICC AC 156 Febr
254. ass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer END OF SECTION February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES Gh Gs Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies Metal stud wall framing Metal channel ceiling framing Shaft wall system Fire rated area separation walls Acoustic insulation Gypsum wallboard Joint treatment and accessories 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B C D Section 054000 Cold Formed Metal Framing Exterior wind load bearing metal stud framing Section 061000 Rough Carpentry Wood blocking product and execution requirements Section 072100 Thermal Insulation Acoustic insulation Section 079005 Joint Sealers Acoustic sealant 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A AISI SGO2 1 North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members American Iron and Steel Institute 2001 with 2004 supplement replaced SG 971 ASTM A653 A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc Coated Galvanized or Zinc lron Alloy Coated Galvannealed by the Hot Dip Process 2010 ASTM C475 C475M Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board 2002 Reapproved 2007 ASTM C514 Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board 2004 Reapproved 2009 e1
255. assage through Countertops 2 inch OD black molded plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage Exposed Hardware Finishes For exposed hardware provide finish that complies with BHMA A156 18 for BHMA finish number indicated 1 Dark Anodized Satin Bronze Oil Rubbed BHMA 613 for bronze base BHMA 640 for steel base match Architect s sample February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 J For concealed hardware provide manufacturer s standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156 9 K Catches Magnetic Drawer Slides 1 Type Standard extension 2 Static Load Capacity Commercial grade 3 Mounting Side mounted 4 Stops Integral type 5 Features Provide self closing stay closed type 6 Products a Accuride International Inc www accuride com b Grass America Inc www grassusa com c Knape amp Vogt Manufacturing Company www knapeandvogt com d Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements M Hinges European style concealed self closing type BHMA No A156 9 B01602 steel with polished finish 1 Products Grass America Inc www grassusa com Hardware Resources www hardwareresources com Julius Blum Inc www blum com Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements apop 2 8 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A B Provide UL appr
256. at pumps All status for current drawing equipment shall use current transformer type sensor No dry contact from starter allowed for proof GRAPHIC STANDARDS The control vendor shall modify existing building graphics as now used It is required that control vendor review the existing graphics prior to developing new graphics for any new projects Each floor shall have its own floor graphics converted from existing building Auto CAD file Design Auto CAD files will be provided to the control vendor All zones shall be colored differently to identify the zone boundary limits Use construction drawing to identify zones Show terminal box locations and sensor locations for each zone All HVAC equipment graphics shall be developed using clip art provided by software manufacturer Do not use Auto CAD drawing to draw equipment graphics The control vendor encouraged to copy similar existing equipment graphics from other GSU projects if applicable Provide all links for related graphics Floor graphics shall link to related AHU graphics Room temperature shall link with associated terminal box or AHU All floor and equipment shall link with the parent building profile link The building profile graphics shall be developed using building digital photograph All links shall follow its source For example floor zone links to February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU
257. at which blockage or corrosion may result The flushing must be conducted without damaging equipment such as valves pumps sensors switches etc or contaminating equipment that is difficult to clean such as chillers fan coil units etc To achieve this the system shall be divided into small circuits with sensitive components removed isolated or bypassed In order to remove the debris provide supplementary pumps to create velocities in excess of the design velocities To ensure the removal of the debris the outlets shall be large enough not to restrict the flow through the pipework Provide all valves fittings and piping necessary for flushing and cleaning All HVAC piping systems boilers heat exchangers and related equipment shall be thoroughly flushed out with pre cleaning chemicals designed to remove deposits from construction such as pipe dope oils most loose mill scale and other extraneous materials The products shall inhibit corrosion of the various metals in the system and shall be safe to handle and use Effectiveness of the product shall be such that the water need only be at ambient temperatures Add recommended dosages of chemicals and circulate for 24 hours Systems shall then be drained and flushed until the total alkalinity of the rinse water is equal to the make up water Refill with clean water and treat to prevent scale and corrosion during operation of the water systems The Contractor shall perform the flushing an
258. ated Sections 1 Division 23 Section Metal Ducts for duct liners 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of product indicated Include thermal conductivity water vapor permeance thickness and jackets both factory and field applied if any B Shop Drawings Include plans elevations sections details and attachments to other work 1 Detail application of protective shields saddles and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger 2 Detail insulation application at elbows fittings dampers specialties and flanges for each type of insulation 3 Detail application of field applied jackets 4 Detail application at linkages of control devices 1 4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A Material Test Reports From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating interpreting and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials sealers attachments cements and jackets with requirements indicated Include dates of tests and test methods employed 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training B Surface Burning Characteristics For insulation and related materials as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having Feb
259. ater tube drawn temper B Soft Copper Tube ASTM B 88 Type K ASTM B 88M Type A and ASTM B 88 Type L ASTM B 88M Type B water tube annealed temper C Cast Copper Solder Joint Fittings ASME B16 18 pressure fittings D Wrought Copper Solder Joint Fittings ASME B16 22 wrought copper pressure fittings E Bronze Flanges ASME B16 24 Class 150 with solder joint ends F Copper Unions 1 MSS SP 123 2 Cast copper alloy hexagonal stock body February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 Ball and socket metal to metal seating surfaces Solder joint or threaded ends G Copper Pressure Seal Joint Fittings 1 Fittings for NPS 2 DN 50 and Smaller Wrought copper fitting with EPDM rubber O ring seal in each end 2 Fittings for NPS 2 1 2 to NPS 4 DN 65 to DN 100 Cast bronze or wrought copper fitting with EPDM rubber O ring seal in each end 2 3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A Solder Filler Metals ASTM B 32 lead free alloys B Flux ASTM B 818 water flushable 2 4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A General Requirements Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined B Dielectric Unions 1 3 4 5 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be
260. ation is the responsibility of another installer notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations 3 2 PREPARATION A B Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions 3 3 INSTALLATION A B F Install countertops as recommended by the manufacturer s written instructions Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners Make flat surfaces level shim where required Utilize fasteners adhesives and bonding agents recommended by the manufacturer for type of installation indicated Material that is chipped warped hazed or discolored as a result of installation or fabrication method will be rejected Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5 8 inch Attach solid surface countertops to substrate as recommended by the solid surface manufacturer s written instructions Seal joint between back end splashes and vertical surfaces 3 4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly February 7 2014 COUNTERTOPS 123600 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Protect installed products
261. atment equipment service and chemicals B Related Sections 1 Mechanical General Provisions Section 23 05 00 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Product data for each product specified in this section B Name and address of Water Treatment Company C Qualifications including years in business D Cleaning certificates E Cleaning procedures F Product data for equipment and chemicals G Certificate of cleaning H See 23 05 00 for additional requirements 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A A single water treatment company shall be responsible for all products and services and be a recognized specialist in the field of industrial water treatment for a minimum of 10 years B The water treatment company shall have access to regional water analysis laboratories research and development facilities plus technical service representatives located within the trading area of the job site C The chemical water treatment shall conform to all applicable Codes February 7 2014 WATER TREATMENT 232500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 2 2 A A B C D MANUFACTURERS WATER TREATMENT COMPANIES Acceptable water treatment companies chemical and equipment manufacturers are as follows 1 Betz Laboratories Inc 2 Garratt Callahan 3 A amp W Technologies Inc Atlanta GA 770 455 9224 GLYCOL PIPING SYSTEMS Feeding Equipment Furnish a shot feeder minimum
262. based liquid elastomers that when mixed expand and cure in place to produce a flexible nonshrinking foam PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON FIRE RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A Comply with NECA 1 B Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations C Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above Grade Non Fire Rated Concrete and Masonry Unit Floors and Walls 1 Interior Penetrations of Non Fire Rated Walls and Floors a Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable using joint sealant appropriate for size depth and location of joint Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants February 7 2014 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain Tool exposed surfaces smooth protect material while curing 2 Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening 3 Size pipe sleeves to provide 1 4 inch 6 4 mm annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed 4 Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core drilled holes or formed openings are used Install sleeves during erection of new walls Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls Deb
263. be elements filling the entire vessel with no open space between them The elements shall consist of a copper core tube with continuous wound copper medium February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 permanently affixed to the core A separate copper medium shall wind completely around and permanently affixed to the internal element E Air elimination performance air elimination efficiency of 100 free air 100 entrained air and 99 6 dissolved air at the installation location F Dirt separation performance dirt separation efficiency shall be a minimum of 80 of all particles 30 micron and larger within 100 passes 2 11 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT A Manufacturer Spirotherm Spirotop B Description Cast Brass Designed for use on high pressure systems 1 Maximum Pressure Rating Exceed maximum pressure rating of system and not less than 150 psig 2 Maximum Temperature Rating Exceed maximum temperature rating of system and not less than 270 degrees F 3 Inlet 1 2 FPT 4 Outlet 1 2 MPT PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine valve interior for cleanliness freedom from foreign matter and corrosion Remove special packing materials such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling B Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed Examine guides and seats made accessible by such op
264. be radiation convectors or other similar heating or cooling units D Where sensors are shown on columns coordinate location with partition layout E Locate all sensors out of direct sunlight February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F Where sensors are shown on exterior walls insulate base and seal to eliminate effects from conduction and infiltration 3 9 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP WSHP EACH A New 1 Fan Operation a Provide controls to allow user selection of fan operating mode as on off with load or constant b Initially set fan to cycle to maintain room temperature with a minimum 30 minute on and 15 minute off anti recycle setpoints 2 Valve Operation Open WSHP water valve on call for cooling to maintain room setpoint 3 10 AIR AND DIRT SEPARATOR PUMPS A New 1 Pumps shall operate continuously in occupied mode 2 In unoccupied mode operate whenever induction system operates to maintain night setback and set up temperature 3 11 LIGHTING CONTROL A Existing 1 Each floor has two contactors that each control approximately eight to ten lighting circuits As built drawings are not available 2 Each of two contactors is manually controlled by a key switch Circuits are generally grouped into North and South areas of each floor B New 1 Lighting electrical has not been re circuited except in the renovated areas Re circuiting
265. ber of the nearest authorized service representative In addition to operation maintenance and lubrication instructions the manuals shall include the following 1 Parts lists 2 Power and control wiring diagrams 3 Elementary or schematic wiring diagrams 4 Manufacturers recommended tightening torque for connections where applicable Project Record Documents Furnish project record documents in accordance with General Conditions and Division 01 Include marked up as built drawings indicating proper circuit numbers conduit homeruns branch conduit runs and other such pertinent data Mark the actual installed depths of all buried electrical conduit or cable and show the measured horizontal distance from permanent construction such as building walls Especially mark where any riser conduit occurs Include the following 1 As built conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and or tag number 2 Complete as built wiring diagrams 3 Detailed catalog data on all installed system components 4 Copy of the test reports described elsewhere Operation and maintenance data warranty Provide three copies at time of Final Completion in accordance with the General Conditions and Division One Use multiple binders if a single binder would exceed 2 1 2 in thickness Arrange the data in the same sequence as the specification Section Delete or mark through extraneous data Before final acceptance of work the Contractor shall deliver
266. bove frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural supports at each jamb Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members February 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 7 Installation Tolerances Adjust hollow metal frames for squareness alignment twist and plumbness D Grout frames in masonry construction using hand trowel methods brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames Coordinate installation of glazing Coordinate installation of hardware Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items eo ade Touch up damaged factory finishes 3 4 TOLERANCES A Clearances Between Door and Frame As specified in ANSI A250 8 B Maximum Diagonal Distortion 1 16 inch measured with straight edges crossed corner to corner 3 5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation B Prime Coat Touch up Immediately after erection sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air drying rust inhibitive primer END OF SECTION February 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTIO
267. boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening Arrangement of Devices Unless otherwise indicated mount flush with long dimension vertical Group adjacent switches under single multigang wall plates GFCI RECEPTACLES Install non feed through type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required IDENTIFICATION Comply with Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number Use hot stamped or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on inside of face of plate and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform the following tests and inspections 1 Test Instruments Use instruments that comply with UL 1436 2 Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital display indicators of measurement B Tests for Convenience Receptacles Line Voltage Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V Percent Voltage Drop under 15 A Load A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable Ground Impedance Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable GFCI Trip Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943 Using the test plug verify that the device and its out
268. brated and labeled according to the manufacturer s specifications Contractor shall submit certification of calibration for the fusion splicers to the Engineer 3 9 ACCESSORIES A Install outer door to complete installation B Along with above specifications use installation product bulletins which accompany each product 3 10 IDENTIFICATION A Provide labeling of each cable and each termination Submit method of labeling for approval Refer to section 270553 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 271323 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A C Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section Horizontal distribution communications wiring and connecting hardware from the Telecommunications Room TR to Telecommunication Outlets TO throughout the site Provide a complete and operational system as specified here in 1 2 REFERENCES A All work shall be performed in accordance with the following codes and industry standards unless noted otherwise 1 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code current version adopted by local or State AHJ 2 TIA 568 C 2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard current
269. cal authorities having jurisdiction 1 7 FIELD CONDITIONS A Maintain environmental conditions temperature humidity and ventilation within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer s absolute limits 1 8 WARRANTY A Manufacturer s Special Warranty on Solid Surfacing Countertops Manufacturer s standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period B Warranty Period 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A Plastic Laminate Countertops High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate 1 Laminate Sheet Unless Otherwise Indicated NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS 0 048 inch nominal thickness a Surface Burning Characteristics Flame spread 25 maximum smoke developed 450 maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 b Wear Resistance In addition to specified grade comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade requirements for wear resistance Laminate Core Color Same as decorative surface Finish Matte or suede gloss rating of 5 to 20 Surface C
270. cations room MR Refer to drawings for exact counts Optical fiber cable shall be installed inside buildings using the same methods as twisted pair however the manufacturers guidelines regarding the following should be observed Do not exceed the manufactures maximum pulling tension Do not exceed minimum installed and long term bend radius Avoid sharp bends and corners Provide additional crush mechanical protection in high risk environments Do not exceed maximum vertical rise specification unless intermediate tension relief is used Observe all governing building and fire codes either by using a properly listed cable or suitable raceway 7 Secure the optical fiber cable to existing supports or large cables wherever possible 8 Do not deform the cable jacket specifically when using Velcro straps Ons CONS gt 3 2 OPTICAL FIBER INSTALLED IN CABLE TRAYS LADDER RACKS A oO Install optical fiber cable so as to minimize potential damage when additional cables are installed or retrieved install fiber to one side of the cable tray or cable rack limiting contact with other cables Maintain minimum bend radius around corners through the use of a fiber guide All optical fiber cabling shall be routed in innerduct or conduit Secure cable to tray every 12 to 24 3 3 OPTICAL FIBER INSTALLED IN VERTICAL RUNS 00M gt Work from the top down when possible Secure the cable in innerduct every 24 to 36 inches to c
271. ccessories necessary for the complete installation of and final connections to equipment furnished under other Divisions and or by the Owner where shown Secure approved shop drawings from all required disciplines and verify final electrical characteristics before roughing power feeds to any equipment When electrical data on approved shop drawings differs from contemplated design notify the Architect and or Engineer before proceeding with the installation Attention is called to the fact that certain features of control other functions or systems may be specified in this Division by performance and as such all elements of wiring or other materials and devices required for the complete installation may not be shown C Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components D Arrange for chases slots and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations E Cutting and patching of structural components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials will not be allowed unless approved in writing by the Structural Engineer 1 11 PERMITS LICENSES FEES A Obtain all permits and licenses and pay all fees as required for execution of the Contract Arrange for necessary inspections required by the city county territory and other authorities having jurisdiction and present certificates of approval to the Owner 1 12 WARRANTY A All work specified in Division 2
272. ccording to reflected ceiling plan D Install after major above ceiling work is complete Coordinate the location of hangers with other work E Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection Provide additional hangers and inserts as required Hang suspension system independent of walls columns ducts pipes and conduit Where carrying members are spliced avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members G Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance H Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load February 7 2014 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 to exceed deflection capability Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner or support components independently Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners Form expansion joints as detailed Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement Maintain visual closure 3 3 INSTALLATION ACOUSTICAL UNITS K Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Fit acoustical units in place free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function Lay directional patterned units with pattern parallel to longest room
273. ce Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A Comply with requirements for seismic restraint devices specified in ASCE SEI 7 B Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified below 1 Install carbon steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments 2 Install stainless steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments 3 Install carbon steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments 4 Install stainless steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments 5 Vertical Piping MSS Type 8 or Type 42 clamps 6 Install individual straight horizontal piping runs a 100 Feet 30 m and Less MSS Type 1 adjustable steel clevis hangers b Longer Than 100 Feet 30 m MSS Type 43 adjustable roller hangers G Longer Than 100 Feet 30 m if Indicated MSS Type 49 spring cushion rolls 7 Multiple Straight Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet 30 m or Longer MSS Type 44 pipe rolls Support pipe rolls on trapeze 8 Base of Vertical Piping MSS Type 52 spring hangers C Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches 300 mm of each fitting and coupling D Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor E Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double rod hangers with 3 8 inch 10 mm minimum rods F Install hangers for cast iron soil piping
274. ces and traps and waste pipes Piping and general duty valves are included where indicated SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of plumbing fixture indicated Include selected fixture and trim fittings accessories appliances appurtenances equipment and supports Indicate materials and finishes dimensions construction details and flow control rates February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 A QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations Obtain plumbing fixtures faucets and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer 1 Exception If fixtures faucets or other components are not available from a single manufacturer obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use Regulatory Requirements Comply with requirements in ICC A117 1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities Public Law 90 480 Architectural Barriers Act and Public Law 101 336 Americans with Disabilities Act for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities Regulatory Requirements Comply with requirements in Public Law 102 486 Energy Policy Act about water flow and consumption rates for
275. ch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width With glazing tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern draw bow and similar characteristics Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement Square cut wedge shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer 3 4 TAPE GLAZING A Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops B Install tapes continuously but not necessarily in one continuous length Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening C Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs Cover February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 8 25 Park Pl
276. chanical T and cross fittings Configurations Snap on and strapless ductile iron housing with branch outlets Size Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping 8 Branch Outlets Grooved plain end pipe or threaded SLO O E To Adjustable Drop Nipples 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a CECA LLC b Corcoran Piping System Co C Merit Manufacturing a division of Anvil International Inc Standard UL 1474 Pressure Rating 250 psig 1725 kPa minimum or 300 psig 2070 kPa as required Body Material Steel pipe with EPDM rubber O ring seals Size Same as connected piping Length Adjustable Inlet and Outlet Threaded exible Sprinkler Hose Fittings Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Fivalco Inc b FlexHead Industries Inc C Gateway Tubing Inc 2 Standard UL 1474 3 Type Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid 4 Pressure Rating 175 psig 1200 kPa minimum or 300 psig 2070 kPa as required 5 Size Same as connected piping for sprinkler rm Ea a February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKL
277. ches 100 mm beyond damaged areas Adhere staple and seal patches similar to butt joints 3 4 PENETRATIONS A Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations That Are Not Fire Rated 1 Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions B Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire rated wall and partition penetrations Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches 50 mm 1 Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping and fire resistive joint sealers 3 5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL FIBER INSULATION A Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums Secure with adhesive and insulation pins 1 Apply adhesives according to manufacturer s recommended coverage rates per unit area for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces 2 Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 6 3 Install either capacitor discharge weld pins and speed washers or cupped head capacitor discharge weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows a On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller place pins along lo
278. ches deep shelves 2 4 FABRICATION A Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings B Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Do not begin installation until spaces to receive furniture have been completed and cleaned 3 2 PREPARATION A Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation B Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions February 7 2014 MODULAR CASEWORK 125111 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 INSTALLATION A Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions B Install furniture and accessories as indicated on drawings level and plumb with separate units securely anchored C Adjust legs to height required D Adjust doors drawers hardware fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly E Clean casework counters shelves legs hardware fittings and fixtures 3 4 PROTECTION A Protect installed products until completion of project B Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity C Touch up repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion END OF SECTION February 7 2014 MODULAR CASEW
279. cified above END OF SECTION 260519 February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 A A A RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Grounding systems and equipment QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CONDUCTORS A Insulated Conductors Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction B Grounding Bus Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper 1 4 by 4 inches 6 3 by 100 mm in cross section with 9 32 inch 7 14 mm holes spaced 1 1 8 inches 28 mm apart Stand off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards 600 V Lexan or PVC impulse tested at 5000 V 2 2 CONNECTORS A Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types sizes and combinations of conductors and other items connected B Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes Copper or copper alloy pressure type with at least
280. cified requirements 2 Grading Agency Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review American Lumber Standard Committee www alsc org and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated 3 Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted Provide sustainably harvested wood see Section 016000 for requirements Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site see Section 016000 for requirements for locally sourced products 2 2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A Grading Agency Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Inc SPIB B Sizes Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings S4S February 7 2014 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Moisture Content S dry or MC19 D Miscellaneous Framing Blocking Nailers Grounds and Furring 1 2 Lumber S4S No 2 or Standard Grade Boards Standard or No 3 2 3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards PS 1 A D plywood or medium density fiberboard 3 4 inch thick flame spread index of 25 or less smoke developed index of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Oth
281. clearance of 1 inch 25 mm plus allowance for insulation thickness H Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures l Where ducts pass through non fire rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 1 2 inches 38 mm J Where ducts pass through fire rated interior partitions install fire dampers Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section Air Duct Accessories for fire and smoke dampers K Protect duct interiors from moisture construction debris and dust and other foreign materials Comply with SMACNA s IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction Appendix G Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines 3 2 DUCT SEALING A Seal ducts for duct static pressure seal classes and leakage classes specified in Duct Schedule Article according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible B Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 1 Conditioned Space Supply Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2 Inch wg 500 Pa Seal Class B 2 Conditioned Space Return Air Ducts Seal Class C February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12
282. compliance with requirements provide products from SimplexGrinnell LP a Tyco International company 2 2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A System operation shall remain as is unless required to be modified by this renovation 2 3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT A Fire Alarm Control Unit is existing and must be upgraded to meet new building and occupant requirements B Provide a modules interfaces devices software etc required to expand the fire alarm control unit for this renovation 2 4 PERIPHERAL DEVICES A Match existing units pull stations smoke detectors duct detectors control devices monitoring modules speakers and strobe lights currently installed in the last renovation PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire alarm equipment B Install wall mounted equipment with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches 1830 mm above the finished floor C Connecting to Existing Equipment Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational before making changes or connections 1 Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building 2 Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station 3 Expand modify and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing control functions to the new points New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of eith
283. ctors The VFD shall provide a programmable loss of load broken belt broken coupling Form C relay output The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss of load condition via a keypad warning Form C relay output and or over the serial communications bus The loss of load condition sensing algorithm shall include a programmable time delay that will allow for motor acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false loss of load condition The VFD shall have user programmable underload and overload curve functions to allow user defined indications of broken belt or mechanical failure jam condition causing motor overload The VFD shall include multiple two zone PID algorithms that allow the VFD to maintain PID control from two separate feedback signals 4 20mA 0 10V and or serial communications The two zone control PID algorithm will control motor speed based on a minimum maximum or average of the two feedback signals All of the VFD PID controllers shall include the ability for two zone control If the input reference 4 20mA or 2 10V is lost the VFD shall give the user the option of either 1 stopping and displaying a fault 2 running at a programmable preset speed 3 hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received or 4 cause a warning to be issued as selected by the user The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning Form C relay output an
284. cturers instruction and shall include the following documentation which shall be delivered to the Owner or a representative upon final acceptance of the system Summary of Project A complete list of equipment tested Description of test Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions in conformance with the specifications Tests results of equipment as applicable Conclusions and recommendations Appendix including appropriate test forms List of test equipment used Technician s name certificate number and date EON ONDT Final tests and inspection shall be held in the presence of the Owner s representatives and to their satisfaction The Contractor shall supply personnel and required auxiliary equipment for this test The complete system shall be tested to ensure that it is operating properly February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 A 3 6 3 7 3 8 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency schedule 1 Field Instruments Analog 6 months maximum Digital 12 months maximum 2 Laboratory Instruments 12 months maximum 3 Leased Specialty Equipment 12 months Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment Records must be kept up to date which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested Ma
285. d or over the serial communication bus The VFD shall have programmable Sleep and Wake up functions to allow the drive to be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal C All VFDs to have the following adjustments February 7 2014 1 Three 3 programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed The lockout range must be fully adjustable from 0 to full speed Two 2 PID Set point controllers shall be standard in the drive allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others The PID set point shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad analog inputs or over the communications bus There shall be two independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch between the parameter sets via a digital input serial communications or from the keypad The independent parameter sets are typically used for night setback switching between summer and winter set points etc There shall be an independent second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 08
286. d using manufacturer s standard metal alloy composition temper and hardness but in no case of lesser commercially recognized quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI BHMA A156 18 for finish designations indicated Do not furnish optional materials or forming methods for those indicated except as otherwise specified Fasteners Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation 1 Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self tapping sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated 2 Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item Provide Phillips flat head screws except as otherwise indicated Finish exposed exposed under any condition screws to match hardware finish or if exposed in surfaces of other work to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish 3 Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners Do not use thru bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of adequately fastening the hardware Coordinate with wood doors and metal doors and frames where thru bo
287. d Components Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code 1 To Wood Fasten with lag screws or through bolts 2 To New Concrete Bolt to concrete inserts 3 To Masonry Approved toggle type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units 4 To Existing Concrete Expansion anchor fasteners 5 To Light Steel Sheet metal screws Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars CONCRETE BASES Construct concrete bases of dimensions required or indicated but not less than 4 inches 100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base Use 3000 psi 20 7 MPa 28 day compressive strength concrete Concrete materials reinforcement and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Anchor equipment to concrete base 1 Place and secure anchorage devices Use supported equipment manufacturer s setting drawings templates diagrams instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded 2 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment 3 Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer s written instructions END OF SECTION 260529 February 7 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260
288. d adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges 1 Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange 2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation 4 Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows 1 Install mitered sections of pipe insulation 2 Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties 1 Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available 2 When preformed valve covers are not available install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body Arrange insulation to permit access to packing a
289. d cleaning The chemical water treatment company shall furnish the chemicals supervise the cleaning and provide a certificate verifying the execution and satisfactory completion of cleaning procedures END OF SECTION 23 25 00 February 7 2014 WATER TREATMENT 232500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 232913 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A Section includes the following enclosed full voltage combination magnetic controllers rated 600 V and less 1 2 DEFINITIONS A CPT Control power transformer B MCCB Molded case circuit breaker C MCP Motor circuit protector D N C Normally closed E N O Normally open F OCPD Overcurrent protective device 1 3 SUBMITTALS A For Approval submit Product Data for each type of enclosed controller Include manufacturer s technical data on features performance electrical characteristics ratings and enclosure types and finishes 1 4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and Maintenance Data 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application B Comply with NFPA 70 1 6 COORDINATION A Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit piping equipment and adjacent surface
290. d coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 L Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows 1 Draw jacket tight and smooth 2 Cover circumferential joints with 3 inch wide strips of same material as insulation jacket Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip spaced 4 inches o c 3 Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 1 2 inches Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o c a For below ambient services apply vapor barrier mastic over staples 4 Cover joints and seams with tape according to insulation material manufacturer s written instructions to maintain vapor seal 5 Where vapor barriers are indicated apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings M Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness N Finish installation with systems at operating conditions Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement O Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas Adhere sta
291. d end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel pipe grooved joints K Dissimilar Material Piping Joints Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems 3 4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels B Install dry type sprinklers with water supply from heated space Do not install pendent or sidewall wet type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing C Install sprinklers into flexible sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid 3 5 IDENTIFICATION A Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13 B Identify system components wiring cabling and terminals Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems 3 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections B Tests and Inspections 1 Leak Test After installation charge systems and test for leaks Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist 2 Test and adjust controls and safeties Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment 3 Flush test and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13 Systems Acceptance Chapter 4 Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices 5 Coordinate with fire alarm tests Operate as required 6 Coordinate with fire pump tests Operate as required 7 Verify that equipment hose threads are same as
292. d frame sizes trip ratings and number of poles 2 Lugs Mechanical type suitable for number size trip ratings and conductor material 3 Application Listing Appropriate for application Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high intensity discharge lighting circuits 4 Ground Fault Protection Comply with UL 1053 integrally mounted self powered type with mechanical ground fault indicator relay with adjustable pickup and time delay settings push to test feature internal memory and shunt trip unit and three phase zero sequence current transformer sensor 5 Shunt Trip Trip coil energized from separate circuit with coil clearing contact 6 Undervoltage Trip Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay 2 4 MOLDED CASE SWITCHES A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit 2 General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric B General Requirements MCCB with fixed high set instantaneous trip only and short circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating C Features and Accessories 1 Standard frame sizes and number of poles 2 Lugs Mechanical type suitable for number si
293. d report testing and balancing measurements in inch pound IP units February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets Obtain manufacturer s outlet factors and recommended testing procedures Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes B Prepare schematic diagrams of systems as built duct layouts C For variable air volume systems develop a plan to simulate diversity D Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements E Check airflow patterns from the outdoor air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust air dampers through the supply fan discharge and mixing dampers F Locate start stop and disconnect switches electrical interlocks and motor starters G Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection H Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path l Check for airflow blockages J Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning K Check for proper sealing of air handling unit components L Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section Metal Ducts 3 5 PRE CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING INDUCTION UNIT SYSTEMS A Measure and report pr
294. d spaces provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof attic space other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking C In metal stud walls provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames securely attached to stud framing D In walls provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall mounted items February 7 2014 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated E Where ceiling mounting is indicated provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling unless other method of support is explicitly indicated F Specifically provide the following non structural framing and blocking Cabinets and shelf supports Towel and bath accessories Wall mounted door stops Wall paneling and trim PoON gt 3 4 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board 1 At fire rated walls install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire rated assembly 2 Where boards are
295. d temperature The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relay output status and all digital input status All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus and or via a Form C relay output keypad Hand or Auto selected bypass selected and broken belt indication The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode over serial communications A minimum of 50 field serial communications points shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode The bypass serial communications shall allow control of the bypass digital outputs via the serial interface This control shall be independent of any bypass function or operating state The bypass digital relay outputs may be used to actuate a damper open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation In addition all of the bypass digital inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD modes to provide proof of flow broken belt indication The condition shall be indicated on the keypad display transmitted over the building automation protocol and or via a Form C relay
296. dance with TIA EIA standards for Category 6 cables 3 9 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 27 05 53 for labeling details END OF SECTION Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full C This document describes the equipment and execution requirements relating to Identification for Communications Systems D Equipment specifications general considerations and guidelines are provided in this document If the bid documents are in conflict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document 1 02 SUBMITTALS A Provide the following submittals 1 Product data 2 Product samples 3 Label sample showing example and text size for each item 4 Software program sample 1 03 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to comple
297. dates to the Architect for approval Coordinate all dates with Owner Architect Engineer Manufacturers and all other parties involved The Owner reserves the right to revise the schedule without incurring delay or additional cost to the contract PROTECTION Protect all electrical equipment from damage at all times Cover and enclose all equipment to protect from damage by water or moisture February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 9 ADJUSTMENT A Calibrate and adjust all equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions Adjust and 3 10 set all circuit breakers and relays in accordance with the coordination study when required by other specification sections CLEANING At completion of the work clean all elements of the electrical system so that all markings deteriorating the original finish appearance are removed All lighting fixtures and lenses shall be cleaned inside and out All lamps shall be left clear of dust smudges and grime Additionally examine the interiors of panelboards cabinets lighting fixtures boxes and like components where conduit and or wire connections have been made and all resulting wire ends insulation cuttings knock out plugs metal filings and any other construction debris shall be removed so that interiors and exteriors are clean END OF SECTION 16010 February 7 2014 BASIC ELECT
298. day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section Cast in Place Concrete 3 7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A Refer to Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications for structural steel B Cut fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location alignment and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment C Field Welding Comply with AWS D1 1 February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A Cut fit and place wood grounds nailers blocking and anchorages to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment B Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials Tighten connections between members Install fasteners without splitting wood members C Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads 3 9 GROUTING A Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces pump and other equipment base plates and anchors B Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout G Provide forms as required for placement of grout D Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout E Place grout completely filling equipment bases F Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment G Pl
299. density as adjacent pipe insulation Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive Fill joints seams voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth hard and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire Bond pieces with adhesive Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker For valves insulate up to and including the bonnets valve stuffing box studs bolts and nuts Fill joints seams and irregular surfaces with insulating cement Insulate unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation or one pipe diameter whichever is thicker Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing me
300. dge strip Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention Maintenance Data Include maintenance procedures recommended maintenance materials and suggested schedule for cleaning 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience B Installer Qualifications A firm with not less than 7 years experience installation of carpeting similar to that required for this project and who is approved and certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board and the carpet manufacturer or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements C Fire Test Response Characteristics Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification February 7 2014 TILE CARPETING 096813 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 indicated in Part 2 as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1 Source of Materials a Carpet Materials To ensure matching of quality color pattern and texture install materials produced from same dye lot and production run Where materials cannot be obtained from a single lot or production run notify the Architect so that the extent and use of each lot or run can b
301. ditional instructions 4 Test adjust and balance a New WSHP systems including diffusers on floors 7 22 23 24 b New VAV terminal units including diffusers on floors 7 22 23 24 C Existing core air distribution devices including diffusers grilles and registers on floors 7 22 23 24 d Traverse supply return and toilet exhaust air flow at each of floors 7 22 23 24 after VAV retrofit e Inductions units on floors 7 22 23 24 February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 3 DEFINITIONS A AABC Associated Air Balance Council B NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau C TAB Testing adjusting and balancing D TABB Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau E TAB Specialist An entity engaged to perform TAB Work 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Qualification Data Within 30 days of Contractor s Notice to Proceed submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project s TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in Quality Assurance Article B Strategies and Procedures Plan Within 30 days of Contractor s Notice to Proceed submit TAB strategies and step by step procedures as specified in Preparation Article C Certified TAB reports D Sample report forms E Instrument calibration reports to include the following 1 Instrument type and make 2 Serial number 3 Application 4 Dates o
302. dressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following Furnish and install all Horizontal Cable Management Furnish and install all Vertical Cable Management Furnish and install Ladder Rack System Furnish and install all Velcro Straps Furnish and install all C Rings D rings SM atic bm PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Horizontal Cable Management manufacturer s 1 Superior Modular Part Number COMB3519 B Approved Vertical Cable Management manufacturer s 1 Chatsworth Products Inc Part Number 11729 503 C Approved Ladder Rack System manufacturer s 1 Chatsworth Products Inc 2 B Line D Approved Velcro Strap manufacturer s 1 Panduit E Approved C Ring D ring manufacturer s 1 Siemon Part Number S144 2 2 CABLE MANAGEMENT HORIZONTAL A Horizontal Cable Management di The horizontal wire manager shall be compatible with 19 inch equipment racks and cabinets 2 The horizontal cable manager shall provide support for patch cords at the front of the panel February 7 2014 Communications Cable Management amp Ladder Racks 271123 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 The horizontal wire manager shall be equipped with management fingers and covers 4 The horizontal cable manager shall be 2 rack units in height 2 3 CABLE MANAGEMENT VERTICAL A Vertical Cable Management
303. duct Data Provide data on product characteristics performance ratings and limitations Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate preparation and installation instructions Manufacturer s Certificate Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used Qualification statements for installing mechanics 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Coordinate delivery of products to minimize storage time at site B Deliver products to project site in original unopened containers bearing the name of the manufacturer product name type and testing agency s identification mark C Store products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Fire Testing Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated 1 Listing in the current year classification or certification books of UL FM or ITS Warnock Hersey will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report 2 Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service Inc ICC ES at www icc es org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report 3 Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above subs
304. ducts shall not contain asbestos lead mercury or mercury compounds Februrary 7 2014 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Closed cell sponge or expanded rubber materials Comply with ASTM C 534 Type for tubular materials 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Aeroflex USA Inc Aerocel b Armacell LLC AP Armaflex G K Flex USA Insul Lock Insul Tube and K FLEX LS C Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Fibrex Insulations Inc Coreplus 1200 b Johns Manville Micro Lok Cc Knauf Insulation 1000 Degree Pipe Insulation d Manson Insulation Inc Alley K e Owens Corning Fiberglas Pipe Insulation 2 Type 850 Deg F 454 Deg C Materials Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin Comply with ASTM C 547 Type Grade A without factory applied jacket D Polyolefin Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic insulation Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427 Type Grade 1 for tubular materials 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporat
305. e 1 Seismic Hazard Level A Seismic force to weight ratio 0 48 2 Seismic Hazard Level B Seismic force to weight ratio 0 30 3 Seismic Hazard Level C Seismic force to weight ratio 0 15 Airstream Surfaces Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of the following products Ae Liners and adhesives February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 Sealants and gaskets Seismic restraint devices B LEED Submittals i Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1 Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62 1 Section 5 Systems and Equipment Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2 Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 4 4 HVAC System Construction and Insulation Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2 Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 4 4 2 2 Duct Leakage Tests Duct Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1 Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62 1 Section 7 2 4 Ventilation System Start up Product Data for Credit IEQ 4 1 For adhesives and sealants documentation including printed statement of VOC content Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4 For adhesives and sealants documentation indicating t
306. e 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 6 Firestop Collars 7 Wrap Strips 8 2 Part Silicone Firestop Foam 9 Firestop Mortar 10 Firestop Pillows 11 Elastomeric Spray 12 Accessories Forming Damming Materials Mineral fiberboard or other type as per manufacturer recommendation B Firestop Devices 1 Thru Wall Fitting Flamestopper by Wiremold a The firestop device box shall be constructed of 16 gage G90 steel b The firestop device intumescent block shall be constructed of a graphite base material with expansion starting at 375 F and an unrestrained expansion between 6 to 12 times The intumescent block shall be held securely by the box in order to prevent tampering and damage during installation c The firestop device shall have doors which can be adjusted to prevent materials from penetrating the device if the device is empty or completely full The doors shall be constructed of 16 gage G90 steel with No 10 32 screws use to adjust opening size d The firestop device shall be available for 2 and 4 trade size EMT conduit e The firestop device shall be available in safety yellow powder coat custom colors and an unpainted galvanized finish Threaded Firestop Device Unique Firestop Products a Threaded steel sleeve device incorporating flat washers secured by threaded device shall be installed around cables The device shall be available in 1 2 and 4 inch sizes Maxim
307. e surface preparation drying time cleanup requirements color designation and instructions for mixing and reducing C Paint Materials Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in ventilated area and as required by manufacturer s instructions February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 10 FIELD CONDITIONS A Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer B Follow manufacturer s recommended procedures for producing best results including testing of substrates moisture in substrates and humidity and temperature limitations C Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer D Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints 45 degrees F for interiors 50 degrees F for exterior unless required otherwise by manufacturer s instructions E Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid height at substrate surface 1 11 EXTRA MATERIALS A Supply five gallons of each color store where directed B Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer s label PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same man
308. e Control Accuracy Range of Medium Air Pressure 50 Pa 0 2 w g 0 1 5 kPa 0 6 w g 3 Pa 0 01 w g 25 to 25 Pa 0 1 to 0 1 w g February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Airflow 10 of full scale Space Temperature 1 0 C 2 0 F Duct Temperature 1 5 0 C 3 0 F Humidity 5 RH Fluid Pressure 10 kPa 1 5 psi 0 1 MPa 1 150 psi 250 Pa 1 0 w g 0 12 5 kPa 0 50 w g differential 2 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 Sensors 1 All room sensors shall have LCD display for temperature and local set point adjustment knob The local adjustment capability shall be locked by system software minimum 68 F to maximum 74 F otherwise specified for special range 2 All immersion pipe sensors and duct sensors shall be RTD PT100 or PT1000 type No thermister type sensor allowed for fluid temperature measurement or duct temperature measurement Outside air and AHU return air relative humidity measurement sensors shall be VAISALA HUMICAP model 3 All static pressure sensor and relative humidity sensors shall be analytical grade solid state with an accuracy of 1 0 All outside air and duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall be VAISALA only All new damper actuator and valve actuators shall be nonstall electronic types Every AHU coil shall have a discharge air temperature sensor including new terminal boxes and he
309. e Industries c Zero Weather stripping Co Inc 2 Types Indicated in Hardware Headings R Silencers 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Three for each single door four for pairs of doors S Py Cabinet and System Acceptable Manufacturers a Telkee Inc 2 Provide a key control system including envelopes labels tags with self locking key clips receipt forms 3 way visible card index temporary markers permanent markers and standard metal cabinet all as recommended by system manufacturer with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the Project 3 Provide hinged panel type cabinet for wall mounting T Magnetic Door Holders 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a LCN Division of Ingersoll Rand b Rixson Firemark February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 c Edwards 2 Wall mounted 24vdc units with finish to match door hardware 2 2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A Manufacturer s Name Plate Do not use manufacturers products that have manufacturer s name or trade name displayed in a visible location omit removable nameplates except in conjunction with required fire rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect Manufacturer s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only Base Metals Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicate
310. e RE2 with vanes complying with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 3 Vanes and Vane Runners and Figure 4 4 Vane Support in Elbows 3 Round Duct Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 3 4 Round Duct Elbows a February 7 2014 Minimum Radius to Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Table 3 1 Mitered Elbows Elbows with less than 90 degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments 1 Velocity 1000 fpm 5 m s or Lower 0 5 radius to diameter ratio and three segments for 90 degree elbow 2 Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm 5 to 7 6 m s 1 0 radius to diameter ratio and four segments for 90 degree elbow METAL DUCTS 233113 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Velocity 1500 fom 7 6 m s or Higher 1 5 radius to diameter ratio and five segments for 90 degree elbow 4 Radius to Diameter Ratio 1 5 b Round Elbows 12 Inches 305 mm lt Insert dimension gt and Smaller in Diameter Stamped or pleated G Branch Configuration 1 Rectangular Duct Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 4 6 Branch Connection a Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch 45 degree entry b Rectangular Main to Round Branch Spin in 2 Round Comply with SMACNA s
311. e and magnitude comparable to requirements specified herein 1 9 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Telecommunications Contractor must be certified to extend a NetClear 25 year Static Dynamic and Applications Warranty All contractors must be an approved Ortronics Certified Installer at a Plus tier CIP CIP GOLD CIP PLATINUM and or Berk Tek Certified OASIS Integrator A copy of certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid The Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the Ortronics Cl CIP Program and Berk Tek OASIS Program At least 30 percent of the copper installation and termination crew must be certified by BICSI Berk Tek or Ortronics with a Technicians Level of Training B The Contractor shall have total responsibility for the coordination and installation of the work shown and described in the Drawings and Specifications The Contractor shall be a company specializing in the design fabrication and installation of integrated telecommunications systems Telecommunications Systems specified shall be installed under the direction of a qualified Contractor Qualification requirements shall include submittal by the Contractor to the Architect of the following 1 List of previous projects of this scope size and nature including names and sizes of projects description of work times of completion and names of contact persons for
312. e and temperature O RON PROCEDURES FOR PRE CONSTRUCTION TESTING OF EXISTING SYSTEMS Scope is defined in Part 1 Perform a preconstruction test measurement only and inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused Measure and record the operating speed airflow and pressures Measure motor voltage and amperage Compare the values to motor nameplate information Energize heaters note operation and measure operating conditions Note the condition of filters Note the condition of coils Note the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap Note condition of bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken in report with original design criteria Report deficiencies or major differences between design and measured Compare the values to original design information Drawings MM601 and 602 N ON HOA o February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 12 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A Scope is defined in Part 1 B Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work 1 Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan speed a
313. e controlled b Carpet Material Installation Materials and Accessories Provide material obtained from one source for each type of material used in the Work Do not change source or brands of materials during progress of Work 1 6 FIELD CONDITIONS A B Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to during and 24 hours after installation Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation Environmental Limitations Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use Subfloor Moisture Conditions Moisture emission rate of not more than 3lb 1000 sq ft 24 hours 14 6 kg 1000 sq m 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104 6 2 1 with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F 12 7 deg C Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions A ph range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potato water and pHydrion paper is applied Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by adhesive manufacturer Conditioning 1 Materials Condition carpet materials and adhesive in the area they are to be installed
314. e direction of the Architect thoroughly dried and put through a dielectric test to ascertain the suitability of the apparatus or it shall be replaced in either case without incurring additions to the Contract PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS Before ordering any equipment the physical size of all equipment shall be checked to properly fit the allotted spaces shown and to satisfy all NEC required clearances Environmental Requirements Comply with manufacturers requirements for environmental conditions during shipping storage installation testing and operation Maintain manufacturers recommended ambient conditions such as temperature humidity altitude ventilation etc Existing Conditions Attention is called to the fact that this work is a renovation within an existing facility Care must be taken not to interrupt the operation of the existing facility nor any existing systems except as directed by the Contract Documents and in coordination with the Owner Included in this work is the requirement to visit the site to review the existing conditions and to become specifically familiar with the modifications and demolition work necessary Failure to conduct the survey and any lack of familiarization with the existing conditions will not constitute grounds for consideration of additions to the Contract after award nor during construction It must be understood that this work includes demolition and removal from the site of any materials and equipm
315. e listing B Wall Plate Color For plastic covers match device color or as selected by the Architect PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Coordination with Other Trades 1 Protect installed devices and their boxes Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes 2 Keep outlet boxes free of plaster drywall joint compound mortar cement concrete dust paint and other material that may contaminate the raceway system conductors and cables 3 Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall 4 Install wiring devices after all wall preparation including painting is complete B Conductors 1 Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices 2 Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70 Article 300 without pigtails 4 Existing Conductors a Cut back and pigtail or replace all damaged conductors b Straighten conductors that remain and rem
316. e one of the following a Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company CP 127 b Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries 225 C Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 85 60 85 70 d Mon Eco Industries Inc 22 25 2 For indoor applications adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive Comply with MIL A 3316C Class 2 Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company CP 82 b Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries 225 C Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 85 50 d Mon Eco Industries Inc 22 25 2 For indoor applications adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 MASTICS Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates comply with MIL PRF 19565C Type Il 1 For indoor applications use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 Vapor Barrier Mastic Water based suitable for indoor use on below ambient ser
317. e owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technologies 3 2 Category 6 Patch Panels A General 1 Category 6 Patch Panes shall be compliant with ANSI TIA 568 C 2 0 standards and manufacturers recommendations 2 Category 6 Patch Panels Shall be compatible with 19 Telco racks 19 ISO equipment cabinets or wall mount brackets 3 The Category 6 patch panel shall be equipped with 8 position modular ports and shall be terminated using a T568B wiring scheme 4 Unless exact placement of the Category 6 Patch Panel is specified in the drawing sets the contractor shall coordinate the placement of the Patch Panels with the owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technologies B 48 Port Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair Patch Panels 1 Category 6 unshielded twisted pair patch panel shall be compliant with ANSI TIA 568 C 2 0 standards 2 Category 6 unshielded patch panels shall only be used to terminate Category 6 unshielded cables 3 3 Fiber Optic Patch Panels A General ate Fiber optic patch panel terminations shall be compliant with ANSI TIA 568 C 3 0 stan dards and manufacturer recommendations 2 Unless exact placement of Fiber Optic Patch Panels is specified in the drawing sets the contractor shall coordinate the placement of the patch panel with the owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technologies B a 24 Port Optical Fiber Termination Panel The 24Port Optical Fiber
318. e pressure differential of 0 01 inches of water column 3 For joints must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal to those of the anticipated conditions C Firestopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through openings created by 1 the burning or melting of combustible pipes cable jacketing or pipe insulation materials or 2 deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion electrical amp mechanical duct work D Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents E Firestopping sealants must be flexible allowing for normal pipe movement Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces G Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant and may not dissolve in water after curing PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A General 1 Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated and if indicated whether such material is designed as insulation safing or otherwise B Through Penetrations 1 Firestopping shall be installed in all open penetrations and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non bearing fire rated barrier C Membrane Penetrations 1 Where required by code all membrane penetrations in rated walls shall be protected with firestopping
319. e representative to inspect components assemblies and equipment installations including connections and to assist in testing B Tests and Inspections 1 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS Surge Arresters Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices Section Certify compliance with test parameters 2 After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized test for compliance with requirements 3 Complete startup checks according to manufacturer s written instructions C SPD device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections D Prepare test and inspection reports February 7 2014 SECTION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 264313 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 STARTUP SERVICE A Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment panel boards control terminals and data terminals to their sources until SPD devices are installed and connected B Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPD installed Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests and reconnect immediately after the testing is over 3 4 DEMONSTRATION A Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner s maintenance personnel to maintain SPD devices END OF SECTION 26 43 13 February 7 2014 SECTION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
320. e requirements D Equipment Install to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity E Right of Way Give to piping systems installed at a required slope 3 2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A Electrical penetrations occur when raceways cables wire ways cable trays or bus ways penetrate concrete slabs concrete or masonry walls or fire rated floor and wall assemblies B Concrete Slabs and Walls Install sleeves for penetrations unless core drilled holes or formed openings are used Install sleeves during erection of walls C Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D 3 3 Fire Rated Assemblies Install sleeves for penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with fire stop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches 50 mm above finished floor level Size pipe sleeves to provide 1 4 inch 6 4 mm annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable
321. e so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation 1 8 WARRANTY A Special warranties 1 Door Closers Ten year period 2 Exit Devices Three year period 1 9 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Tools and Instructions Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner s continued adjustment maintenance and removal and replacement of door hardware PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A Hinges 1 Acceptable Manufacturers February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a Hager Hinge Company b Stanley Works c McKinney 2 Characteristics a Templates Provide only template produced units b Screws Provide Phillips flat head screws complying with the following requirements 1 For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes 2 Forwood doors and frames install threaded to the head wood screws 3 For fire rated wood doors install 12 x 1 1 4 inch threaded to the head steel wood screws 4 Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots Hinge pins Except as otherwise indicated provide hinge pins as follows 1 Out Swing Exterior Doors Non removable pins 2 Out Swing Corridor Doors with Locks Non removable pins 3 Interior Doors Non rising pins 4 Tips Flat button and matching plug Finished t
322. ebruary Manufacturers Flow Design Inc Model UP Appolo Model UA or equal DIELECTRIC NIPPLES Description Steel MPT x MPT nipple with minimum of 2 inch long thermoplastic liner for dielectric separation Rating 300 psig at 225 deg F Manufacturers Flow Design Inc Model DN EXECUTION PREPARATION Ream and deburr all pipe and tubing Clean all debris from pipe inside and outside and fittings inside and outside before installation Inspect mating flange surfaces Verify bolt sizes materials and lengths Verify that gaskets are free of defects properly sized and composed of the correct material INSTALLATION Install products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions See Section 23 05 00 for additional general requirements Install fittings at all branch connections and changes in direction Install piping parallel or at right angles to building walls Diagonal pipe runs are only permitted as indicated on the drawings Provide adequate space around piping to allow proper application of insulation Minimum allowable clearance shall be 1 inch all around Space individual pipes to permit servicing of system components Install piping sag free and bend free Support and anchor piping as specified elsewhere in Division 15 Exposed piping is indicated on drawings Conceal all other piping Branch connection takeoffs shall be out of the top of the main when feeding up and the bottom of the main when feeding dow
323. ebruary 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 13 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 4 Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflicts and delays 5 Make necessary field decisions relating to this scope of work 6 Coordination Single point of contact 2 11 NAMING CONVENTIONS A The contractor shall collaborate with the owner directly to determine the owner s preference for naming conventions etc before entering the data in to the system B Mechanical equipment naming format XXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX Building Initial as per university building code Floor Number Room Number Equipment ID from drawing Example of the point name for the AHU 1 Supply Air Temperature will be 25PP MECH RM 560 AHU1 SAT 2 12 EXISTING CONTROL DEVICES A The bid for the control work shall be based on the premise that existing control devices are operational and are not in need of repair or replacement unless otherwise noted B This subcontractor shall notify the owner s representative of existing control devices that need to be replaced or repaired that may be noted in the process of installation of the new work C All control system components shown or specified as existing to remain shall be tested and verified as fully functional Notify owner s representative if any existing valves dampers or actuators require maintenance 2 13 NEW AND REUSED EQUIPMENT A The following defines the allo
324. ecessary to make adjustments to pathways or materials the Contractor shall so advise the Engineer and secure approval before proceeding with such work B Where exact locations are required by equipment for stubbing up and terminating conduit concealed in floor slabs the Contractor shall request shop Drawings equipment location Drawings foundation Drawings and any other data required by him to locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured C Materials equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material equipment or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation D The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment indicated on Drawings prior to rough in without increase in contract cost E The Contractor shall not reduce the size or number of conduit runs indicated on the Drawings without the written approval of the Engineer F The location of equipment support structures outlets and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only Do not scale Drawings G Schematic diagrams shown on the Drawings indicate the required functions only The technology of a particular manufacturer may be used to accomplish the functions indicated without exact adherence to the schematic Drawings shown Additional
325. ed 4 Auxiliary Contact Kit One NO NC Form C auxiliary contact s arranged to activate before switch blades open 5 Lugs Mechanical type suitable for number size and conductor material February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 2 2 3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit 2 General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric Type HD Heavy Duty Single Throw 600 V ac 1200 A and Smaller UL 98 and NEMA KS 1 horsepower rated lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks and interlocked with cover in closed position Accessories ds Equipment Ground Kit Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors 2 Neutral Kit Internally mounted insulated capable of being grounded and bonded labeled for copper neutral conductors 3 Auxiliary Contact Kit One NO NC Form C auxiliary contact s arranged to activate before switch blades open 4 Lugs mechanical type suitable for number size and conductor material MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the foll
326. ed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use Safety Glazing Labeling Where safety glazing labeling is indicated permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Label shall indicate manufacturer s name type of glass thickness and safety glazing standard with which glass complies Preinstallation Conference Conduct conference at Project site 1 Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials Installer s personnel equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays 2 Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation 1 9 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer s written instructions Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation temperature changes direct exposure to sun or other causes Comply with insulating glass manufacturer s written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change 1 10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Limitations Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain frost condensation or other causes February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 3 25 Park Place
327. ed brass 6 3 4 x 1 with 1 2 diameter bolts Plunger to be supplied with milled surface one side which fits into a matching guide b Automatic flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire doors Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components c Self latching flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire doors Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components d Automatic flush bolts and self latching flush bolts shall be UL listed for fire door application without bottom bolts LBB e Coordinator to be soffit mounted non handed fully automatic UL listed coordinating device for sequential closing of paired doors with or without astragals f Provide filler pieced to close the header Provide brackets as required for mounting of soffit applied hardware L Push Plates 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Characteristics a Exposed Fasteners Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners b Material to be extruded forged stainless steel per the Hardware Headings c Provide plated sized as shown in Hardware Headings M Door Pulls amp Pull Plates 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Characteristics a Provide concealed thru bolted trim on back to back mounted pulls but not for single units b Material to be extruded forged cast s
328. ed into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Armacell LLC Tubolit b Nomaco Insulation IMCOLOCK and NOMALOCK 2 2 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A Protective Shielding Pipe Covers 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Engineered Brass Company b Insul Tect Products Co a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products C McGuire Manufacturing d Plumberex e Truebro a brand of IPS Corporation f Zurn Industries LLC Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation 2 Description Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot water supply and trap and drain piping Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act ADA requirements Februrary 7 2014 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION A Surface Preparation Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation 3 2 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles B Insulation Installation on Fittings and Short Pipes 1 Install insulation over fittings valves strainers flanges unions and other specialties with continuous
329. ed steel complying with ASTM A 603 Steel Cables for Stainless Steel Ducts Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492 Steel Cable End Connections Cadmium plated steel assemblies with brackets swivel and bolts designed for duct hanger service with an automatic locking and clamping device Duct Attachments Sheet metal screws blind rivets or self tapping metal screws compatible with duct materials Trapeze Supports 1 Supports for Galvanized Steel Ducts Galvanized steel shapes and plates SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following Cooper B Line Inc a division of Cooper Industries Ductmate Industries Inc Hilti Corp Kinetics Noise Control Loos amp Co Cableware Division Mason Industries TOLCO a brand of NIBCO INC Unistrut Corporation Tyco International Ltd ONOARWN gt Structural Safety Factor Allowable strength in tension shear and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected Channel Support System Shop or field fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension compression and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end Include matching components and corrosion resistant coating Restraint Cables ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables wi
330. ed with sprinklers 1 Ceiling Mounting Plastic white finish one piece flat 2 Sidewall Mounting Plastic white finish one piece flat Sprinkler Guards 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co Inc b Tyco Fire amp Building Products LP C Victaulic Company d Viking Corporation 2 Standard UL 199 3 Type Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 WATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A Connect sprinkler piping to building s interior water distribution piping Comply with requirements for interior piping in Division 22 Section Domestic Water Piping February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 2 PIPING INSTALLATION A Locations and Arrangements Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping Install piping as indicated as far as practical 1 Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans B Piping Standard Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13 C Install seismic restraints on pipin
331. educers Elbows Factory made fittings machine made bends may be used miters shall not be used E Tees Wye Laterals Factory made fittings or forged steel Bonny Weldolets or forged steel Watson Stillman Teelets or Allied Branchlet type 1 or 2 branch fittings may be used on 2 and larger pipe where the branch is smaller than the main 45 degree branch connections and elbow outlets may be made with Bonny Forge Latrolet and Elbolet forged welding fittings F Screwed Fittings ANSI B16 3 150 Ib standard malleable iron or 300 Ib ductile iron threaded fittings 2 3 UNIONS A Steel Piping Bolted flange type with gasket 2 and smaller unions may be ground joint brass seat type pressure ratings of unions shall equal or exceed that of the pipe fittings bolted type grooved end joint couplings may be used as unions in piping where specified as an acceptable type of joint B Copper Piping Wrought or cast bronze Fed Spec WW U516C solder end joints 2 4 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A Description Insulated type to prevent corrosion due to galvanic action between dissimilar metals B Size 1 2 thru 2 1 2 C Description Brass O Ring Type union Viton O ring brass nut and tailpeice with threaded soldered reduced size or grooved end D Rating 400 psig at 275 deg F February 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E 2 5 PART3 3 1 A 3 2 F
332. eems necessary during the period when painting is being applied 1 Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used Samples of material delivered to project will be taken identified sealed and certified in the presence of the Contractor 2 testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner a Abrasion Resistance b Alkali Resistance c Color Retention d Material Content 3 Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements Contractor shall remove non complying paint February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 from project site pay for testing and repaint surfaces previously coated with the non complying paint If necessary Contractor may be required to remove non complying paint from previously painted surface if on repainting with specified paint the two coatings are incompatible 3 6 CLEANING A Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site 3 7 PROTECTION A Protect finished coatings until completion of project B After completing painting clean glass and paint spattered surfaces Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces
333. een installed properly If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding 3 2 INSTALLATION A B Install ornamental railings plumb and level and in full accordance with manufacturer s instructions Locate railings as indicated on Drawings and at heights that are in accordance with applicable code Anchor to substrates in strict accordance with tested anchorage system free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance Maximum variation from plumb shall be 1 4 inch Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50 foot of railing shall be 1 4 inch non accumulative 3 3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A B C D Remove manufacturer s protective coverings from exposed surfaces after installation Clean surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by manufacturer Protect finishes from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings acceptable to the manufacturer After installation of system is complete advise General Contractor of methods necessary for protection until Substantial Completion END OF SECTION February 7 2014 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM 057210 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Preservative treated wood materials B Fire retardant treated wood ma
334. em activity over an extended period of time Any system point may be trended automatically at time based intervals or change of value both of which shall be user definable Trend data may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting Additionally trend data may be archived to network drives or removable disk media for future retrieval BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefined groups of at least six points Provide additional functionality to allow predefined groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on line to Microsoft Excel DDC contractor shall provide custom designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage and cost equipment run times equipment efficiency and or building environmental conditions DDC contractor shall provide setup of custom reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or weekly reports Cc Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view real time trend data on trend graph displays A minimum of six points may be graphed regardless of whether they have been predefined for trending The dynamic graphs shall continuously update point values At any time the user may redefine sampling times or range sca
335. emove residual compound from adjacent surfaces B Paper Faced Gypsum Board Use paper joint tape bedded with ready mixed vinyl based joint compound and finished with ready mixed vinyl based joint compound C Prefill open joints rounded or beveled edges and damaged surface areas D Tape fill and sand exposed joints edges and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes 1 Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1 32 inch 2 Taping filling and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 and fixed cabinetry 3 Taping filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications E Where Level 5 finish is indicated spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated achieve a flat and tool mark free finish 3 8 TOLERANCES A Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness 1 8 inch in 10 feet in any direction 3 9 PROTECTION A Protect installed products from damage from weather condensation direct sunlight construction and other causes during the remainder of the construction period B Remove and replace panels that are wet moisture damaged and mold damaged 1 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include but are not limited
336. en sleeve and piping or piping insulation use joint sealants appropriate for size depth and location of joint Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants C Fire Barrier Penetrations Maintain indicated fire rating of walls partitions ceilings and floors at pipe penetrations Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping 3 2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL SCHEDULE A Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping penetration applications 1 Interior Partitions a Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 Galvanized steel sheet sleeves END OF SECTION 23 05 17 February 7 2014 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes Flow Measuring Balancing and Shutoff Valve FMBV Bronze ball valves Test Plugs Test Plug Accessories Butterfly Valves Swing Check Valves Check Valves at Pumps Strainers Pressure Cages 0 Aijr Dirt Separators 1 Automatic Air Vents O00 Ol PN B Related Sections 1 Division 23 HVAC pipi
337. enheck Fan Corporation 4 Nailor Industries Inc 5 Pottorff 6 Ruskin Company B Type Dynamic rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL C Closing rating in ducts up to 4 inch wg and 2000 fpm velocity D Fire Rating 1 1 2 hours E Frame Hat shaped 0 094 inch 2 4 mm thick galvanized sheet steel with mechanically attached corners and mounting flange F Heat Responsive Device Electric resettable device and switch package factory installed rated G Blades Roll formed horizontal interlocking 0 034 inch thick galvanized sheet steel H Leakage Class l l Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions J Mounting Sleeve Factory installed 0 039 inch thick galvanized sheet steel length to suit wall or floor application K Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke management systems L Damper Motors Modulating action M Comply with NEMA designation temperature rating service factor enclosure type and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 1 Motor Sizes Minimum size as indicated If not indicated large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1 0 2 Controllers Electrical Devices and Wiring Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Division 26
338. ent rendered useless by this renovation Any existing material or equipment specified to be salvaged shall be turned over to the Owner When this work is completed all existing systems shall operate and function in the same manner as prior to the renovation completely integrated with any additions to the systems as indicated and as specified Field Measurements Measure and confirm field conditions prior to installation of equipment Notify Architect and Owner within 24 hours of any discrepancy or code violations caused by field conditions SEQUENCING SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION Work shall be coordinated to preclude interference between the work of different trades and to ensure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment Work requiring necessarily fixed locations e g piping with required slopes lighting fixtures in ceilings etc shall take precedence over work not requiring such fixed locations Furnish all labor materials and incidental elements such as junction and pull boxes fittings pull wires connectors support materials fuses lamps and labels along with other necessary requirements to install connect start up and result in complete and working systems in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Provide all wiring connectors fittings and all other a
339. eplace with new construction specified 2 Remove items indicated on drawings E Services Including but not limited to HVAC Plumbing Fire Protection Electrical and Telecommunications Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated 1 Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation maintain access to equipment and operational components 2 Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service 3 See Section 011000 for other limitations on outages and required notifications 4 Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal 5 Remove abandoned pipe ducts conduits and equipment including those above accessible ceilings remove back to source of supply where possible otherwise cap stub and tag with identification F Protect existing work to remain 1 Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work 2 Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work 3 Patch as specified for patching new work February 7 2014 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024100 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A Remove debris junk and trash from site B Leave site in clean condition ready for subsequent work C Clean up spillage and
340. equence with each other sequencing shall be by digital logic with separate analog outputs 2 9 FIELD DEVICES A Temperature Sensors with accuracy of 0 5 deg F 77 deg F 1 Digital room sensors shall have day night override button and setpoint slide adjustment override options The setpoint slide adjustment may be software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of room adjustment 2 Built in port allows connection of Portable operator terminal to query and modify operating parameters on room level sensor 3 Room sensors shall have sensing accuracy of 0 5 deg F display accuracy and resolution shall be a minimum of 1 deg F 4 Humidity Sensors with accuracy of 2 RH 77 deg F range of 20 to 95 RH including hysteresis linearity and repeatability 5 Pressure Sensors Setra 6 Dampers sized for specific application 7 Damper Operators sized for specific application 8 Automatic Control Valves sized for specific application 9 Air Volume Measurement 10 Smoke Detectors BRK 120V ionization duct type 11 Low Temperature Detection Stat 12 Electric Thermostats 13 Differential Pressure Switch 2 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following 1 Construct and maintain project schedule 2 On site coordination with all applicable trades and subcontractors 3 Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from owner architect F
341. er Applications 1 2 3 Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure PS 1 C C Plugged or better Exterior grade Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather PS 1 A D or better Other Locations PS 1 C D Plugged or better 2 4 ACCESSORIES A Fasteners and Anchors J 2 3 Metal and Finish Hot dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153 A 153M for high humidity and preservative treated wood locations unfinished steel elsewhere Drywall Screws Bugle head hardened steel power driven type length to achieve full penetration of sheathing substrate Anchors Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry 2 5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A Treated Lumber and Plywood Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories expected service conditions and specific applications 1 2 Fire Retardant Treated Wood Mark each piece of wood with producer s stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements Preservative Treated Wood Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC accredited testing agency certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards Fire Retardant Treatment 1 Manufacturers a Arch Wood Protection Inc www wolmanizedwood com b Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc www frtw com c Osmose Inc www osmose com d Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requi
342. er strip shall be equipped with surge protection with a 20 Amp current limit 3 The power strip shall be equipped with a bracket that enables it to be mounted on a 19 rack cabinet or wall mount bracket without modification PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 POWER STRIPS A Power strips shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer s installation guidelines February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER STRIPS 271126 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B See Drawings for installation location on rack s cabinet s 3 2 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 27 05 53 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER STRIPS 271126 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271313 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full C This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Copper Backbone Provide a complete and operational system as specified here in D Product specifications general
343. er system D Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing February 7 2014 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H 1 Comply with NFPA 72 Smoke Sensing Fire Detectors Section in the Initiating Devices Chapter for smoke detector spacing 2 Comply with NFPA 72 Heat Sensing Fire Detectors Section in the Initiating Devices Chapter for heat detector spacing 3 Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet 9 m 4 Spacing of detectors for irregular areas for irregular ceiling construction and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72 5 HVAC Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet 1 m from air supply diffuser or return air opening 6 Lighting Fixtures Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches 300 mm from any part of a lighting fixture Duct Smoke Detectors Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct Remote Status and Alarm Indicators Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water flow switch and valve tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position Device Location Indicating Lights Locate in public space near the device they monitor Fire Alarm Control Unit Surface mounted with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches 1830 mm above the finished floor 3 2 CONNECTIONS A 3 3
344. erations C Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness D Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage Check bolting for proper size length and material Verify that gasket is of proper size that its material composition is suitable for service and that it is free from defects and damage E Do not attempt to repair defective valves replace with new valves 3 2 VALVE INSTALLATION A Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service maintenance and equipment removal without system shutdown B Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary C Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe D Install valves in position to allow full stem movement February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows 1 Swing Check Valves In horizontal position with hinge pin level 2 Center Guided Check Valves In horizontal or vertical position between flanges 3 3 ADJUSTING A Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs 3 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A If valve applications are not indicated
345. erature requirements Not acceptable are VFD s that can VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 2 HII 12053 02 GSU 080 096 13 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 only operate at 40 C intermittently average during a 24 hour period and therefore must be oversized Altitude O to 3300 feet above sea level less than 95 humidity non condensing All circuit boards shall have conformal coating Enclosure shall be rated UL Type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD VFD s without these ratings are not acceptable NEMA only type 1 enclosures are not acceptable must be UL Type 1 B Standard Features February 7 2014 ale All VFDs shall have the same customer interface including digital display and keypad regardless of horsepower rating The keypad shall be removable capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start up of multiple VFDs The keypad shall include Hand Off Auto selections and manual speed control The drive shall incorporate bumpless transfer of speed reference when switching between Hand and Auto modes There shall be fault reset and Help buttons on the keypad The Help button shall include on line assistance for programming and troubleshooting There shall be a built in time clock in the VFD keypad The clock shall have a battery back up with 10 years minimum life span The c
346. erly shutdown of all DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software Non volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 48 hours K Upon restoration of normal power the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention L Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS 232C port via campus Ethernet from a network workstation PC M Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC system It is intended that each unique system be provided with its own point resident DDC Controller N DDC Controller Resident Software Features 1 General a The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution 2 Control Software Description February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre tested control algorithms b Two position control C Proportional control d Proportional plus integral control e Proportional integral plus derivative control f Auto
347. es B Product Data Indicate stile and rail core materials and construction veneer species type and characteristics C Specimen warranty D Shop Drawings Illustrate door opening criteria elevations sizes types swings undercuts required special beveling special blocking for hardware factory machining criteria factory finishing criteria E Samples Submit five samples of door construction 8x10 inch in size cut from top corner of door F Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special installation instructions G Warranty executed in Owner s name QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1400 Custom grade B Factory finish doors in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1500 C Obtain stile and rail wood doors from a single manufacturer D Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Package deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1300 B Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week Break seal on site to permit ventilation Febr
348. es K The cable s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded Refer to manufacturer s requirements L Copper cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame M Each copper cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support straps Cables labeled within the bundle where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable 3 03 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 270553 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE 271313 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271323 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 1 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Provide a complete and operational system as specified here in Product specifications general design considerations and installation guidelines are provided in this document Locations of backbone
349. es Inside of outlet boxes Outlet cable inside box Outlet cable in ceiling above outlet Outlet cables at poke through entrance on both sides Outlet cable at rear of patch panel Port at rear of patch panel Port on front of patch panel Individual fiber strands at rear of patch panel 10 Backbone cables whenever exposed on minimum 10 intervals 11 Backbone cable at point of termination 12 LAN room and main telecommunications room MR punchdown blocks Voice Outlet and Data Backbone blocks 13 Ends of any cored cable put in place that is not terminated 14 On front of racks cabinets frames active hardware multiplexers GO ONO GV SOO INO E gt 3 03 LABELING SCHEME A In general the following items shall receive labeling 1 Outlets EX Telecom room Patch panel Port or EX 139 1 3 139 is the telecommunications room where the cable originates 1 is the Patch panel and 3 is the third port on the patch panel 2 Outlet cables 3 Backbone cables CVR 139 copper voice backbone to room 139 1 25 26 50 51 75 etc 200 Patch panels ex PP 1 PP 2 etc Patch panel ports each EX Office room Patch panel Sequential port or EX 150 1 3 150 is the office room number 1 is the patch panel and 3 is the third port Equipment racks and cabinets EX Rack 1 rack 2 etc Voice 110 LAN room blocks Data Backbone 110 blocks Ground wires Active hardware and multiplexers by owner oe
350. es 4 6 13 Support ASME A112 6 1M Type water cooler carrier PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine existing roughing in for water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation B Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing in drawings For fixtures indicated for children install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction B Install off the floor carrier supports affixed to building substrate for wall mounted fixtures C Install water supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic water distribution piping Use ball gate or globe valve Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation D Install new trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system E Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed finished locations Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings February 7 2014 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F 3 3 3 4 3 5 Seal joints between fixtures and w
351. essible bolted electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer s written instructions END OF SECTION 260526 February 7 2014 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 A 1 3 A B C 1 4 A 1 5 A B 1 6 A RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY This Section includes the following 1 Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems 2 Construction requirements for concrete bases DEFINITIONS EMT Electrical metallic tubing IMC Intermediate metal conduit RMC Rigid metal conduit INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates if required QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1 1 D1 1M Structural Welding Code Steel Comply with NFPA 70 COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases Cast anchor bolt inserts into bases Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SUPPORT ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A Raceway and Cable Supports As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101
352. ete members D Drilled in Anchors 1 Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling Locate and avoid prestressed tendons electrical and telecommunications conduit and gas lines 2 Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete mortar or grout has achieved full design strength 3 Wedge Anchors Protect threads from damage during anchor installation Heavy duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened 4 Adhesive Anchors Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive 5 Set anchors to manufacturer s recommended torque using a torque wrench 6 Install zinc coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications 3 4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements and where the connections terminate with connection to
353. ete technical product description include a complete list of options provided Any portions of this specification not meet must be clearly indicated or the supplier and contractor shall be liable to provide all additional components required to meet this specification 4 Compliance to IEEE 519 harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion TDD a The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations specific to this installation showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5 Input filters shall be sized and provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519 All VFD s shall include a minimum of 5 impedance reactors no exceptions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type February 7 2014 enclosure exceeding NEMA enclosure design criteria enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not acceptable completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of 30 nominal and 35 nominal voltage as a minimum 1 Environmental operating conditions VFDs shall be capable of continuous operation at 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F ambient temperature as per VFD manufacturers documented submittal data or VFD must be oversized to meet these temp
354. evices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application D NFPA Certification Provide certification according to NFPA 72 February 7 2014 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements required 1 Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire alarm service 2 Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner s written permission 1 9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A Existing Fire Alarm Equipment Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted As new equipment is installed label it NOT IN SERVICE until it is accepted Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire alarm equipment NOT IN SERVICE until removed from the building B Equipment Removal After acceptance of new fire alarm system remove existing disconnected fire alarm equipment and wiring PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Basis of Design Product Subject to
355. ews Metal with head color to match plate finish Wall plate material finish and color to be selected by the Architect Material for Finished Spaces Smooth high impact thermoplastic Material for Damp Locations Thermoplastic with spring loaded lift cover and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations with cord and plug inserted and closed cover PON Wet Location Weatherproof Cover NEMA 250 complying with Type 3R weather resistant thermoplastic with cord and plug inserted and closed lockable cover February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 9 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A Type Modular dual service units suitable for wiring method used See drawings for specific product manufacturer and type 2 10 POKE THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by the following 1 Wiremold Legrand B Description 1 Factory fabricated and wired assembly of below floor junction box with multichanneled through floor raceway firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly 2 Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements 3 Fire Rating Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor ceiling assembly 2 11 FINISHES A Device Color 1 Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or devic
356. except use NEMA 250 Type 4 or 4X nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations B Minimum Raceway Size See General Drawing Notes C Raceway Fittings Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location 1 Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated Comply with NEMA FB 2 10 2 EMT Use setscrew steel fittings Comply with NEMA FB 2 10 3 Flexible Conduit Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit Comply with NEMA FB 2 20 D Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings 3 2 INSTALLATION A Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors B Keep raceways at least 6 inches 150 mm away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping C Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems for hangers and supports E Arrange stub ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above fi
357. except where indicated otherwise Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1 Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain Tool exposed surfaces smooth protect grout while curing Interior Penetrations of Non Fire Rated Walls and Floors Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable using joint sealant appropriate for size depth and location of joint Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants Fire Rated Assembly Penetrations Maintain indicated fire rating of walls partitions ceilings and floors at raceway and cable penetrations Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with fire stop materials Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping FIRESTOPPING Apply fire stopping to penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire resistance rating of assembly Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping END OF SECTION 260500 February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 A 1 3 A 1 4 A B 1 5 A B RELATED DOCUMENTS Dra
358. f use 5 Dates of calibration 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A TAB Contractor Qualifications Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB B TAB Conference Meet with Commissioning Authority for approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians C Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following 1 Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports 2 Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification D TAB Report Forms Use standard TAB contractor s forms approved by AABC or NEBB E Instrumentation Type Quantity Accuracy and Calibration As described in ASHRAE 111 Section 5 Instrumentation February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F PART 2 PART3 3 1 A February ASHRAE Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 Section 7 2 2 Air Balancing ASHRAE IESNA Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 7 2 3 System Balancing PROJECT CONDITIONS Partial Owner Occupancy Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner s operations PRODUCTS Not Applicable EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine
359. fan discharge d Provide cascading control logic to reset fan discharge setpoint based on return plenum static pressure e Monitor operation during warranty period and adjust logic to minimize fan energy d For R 2 duct static pressure will be sensed at inlet to fan on CR level discharge of fan on CR level and on each floor a Modulate smoke damper or combination fire smoke damper on each floor to maintain return plenum static pressure of 0 03 inches b Locate duct static as shown on drawings or if not shown locate in plenum near core at location approved by engineer c Modulate fan speed to maintain duct static pressure in fan discharge d Provide cascading control logic to reset fan discharge setpoint based on return plenum static pressure e Monitor operation during warranty period and adjust logic to minimize fan energy 2 For this Phase variable speed fans installed and static pressure controls enabled for AC 2 AC 4 R 1 R 2 Controls for other systems will be disabled until variable speed drives are installed 3 Where duct static sensors are in shafts provide fire rated panel in shaft wall for access to sensor February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 4 Duct Static Pressure Setpoint Adjust a For AC 2 and AC 4 Fan energy shall be minimized through duct static pressure setpoint adjustment If supply air temperature
360. fied Installer Program CIP The certified contractor shall have 30 of their technicians trained on copper amp fiber installations and testing by Ortronics they also shall have at least 1 project manager successfully complete an Ortronics 2 Day Management Certification class and Berk Tek Oasis training program Ortronics Berk Tek will extend a NetClear 25 year Static Dynamic and Applications Warranty to the end user B Telecommunications contractor shall provide labor materials and documentation according to Ortronics requirements necessary to insure that the Owner will be furnished with a NetClear Warranty of 25 years in length February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS 271119 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C All necessary documentation for warranty registration must be provided to Ortronics and Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group and will be furnished by the Telecommunications Contractor immediately following 100 testing of all cables All test results shall be submitted to Ortronics and Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group in the certification tester s original software on CD D Telecommunications Contractor shall administer the warranty process with the responsible manufacturer s representative The warranty shall be provided directly to the owner from the manufacturer Telecommunications co
361. flict the Drawings shall take precedence The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document D Provide a complete and operational system as specified here in 1 02 SUBMITTALS A Product data Manufacturer s specifications and technical data including the following 1 Detailed specification of construction and fabrication 2 Manufacturer s installation instructions 1 03 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Furnish and install all Firestopping Materials PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Firestopping manufacturer s 1 Flamestopper Thru Wall Fitting Wiremold Company Firestop Devices 2 Unique Firestop Products Firestop Devices 3 STI Firestop Products Firestop Devices Putties Caulks Sealants etc 4 Hilti Putties Caulks Sealants etc 2 02 TYPES OF PRODUCTS A Sealants Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks Latex Firestop Sealant Acrylic Water Based Sealant Silicone Firestop Sealants and Caulks Firestop Putty February 7 2014 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270510 1 Oi N
362. g Comply with requirements for seismic restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13 D Use listed fittings to make changes in direction branch takeoffs from mains and reductions in pipe sizes E Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller Install flanges flange adapters or couplings for grooved end piping on valves apparatus and equipment having NPS 2 1 2 DN 65 and larger end connections G Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13 Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13 H Refill sprinkler system piping with water Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to freezing Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 Heat Tracing for Fire Suppression Piping and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section Fire Suppression Systems Insulation 3 3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A Install couplings flanges flanged fittings unions nipples and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system s pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated B Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller Install flanges flange adapters or couplings for grooved end piping on valves apparatus and equipment having NPS 2 1 2 DN 65 and larger end connections D Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove b
363. g Provisions in the control box or module shall provide control inputs and outputs for electric strike delay auxiliary contacts sequential operation fire alarms systems actuators swing side sensors stop side sensors All electrically powered operators shall include the following features or functions a When an obstruction or resistance to the opening swing is encountered the operator will pause at that point then attempt to continue opening the door If the obstruction or resistance remains the operator will again pause the door b Easily accessible main power and maintain hold open switches will be provided on the operator c An electronically controlled clutch to provide adjustable opening force d Amicroprocessor to control all motor and clutch functions e Anon board power supply capable of delivering both 12V and 24V outputs up to a maximum of 1 0 ampere combined load f All input and output power wiring shall be protected by slow blow fuses These fuses shall be easily replaceable without special tools or component replacement Actuators shall have a stainless steel touch plate that measures 4 1 2 in diameter and features a blue filled handicap symbol The actuator shall be weather resistant and provide normally open momentary contacts The actuator is designed to mount in a standard single gang box 2 wide 4 high and 2 deep Power door operators will provide a two 2 year warranty The contractor shall furnis
364. g Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2010e1 ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 2008 ASTM F1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile 2004 Reapproved 2010 e1 ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 2008 ASTM F1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing 2004 Reapproved 2010 ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 2009 NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source National Fire Protection Association 2011 RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings Resilient Floor Covering Institute 1998 SCS CPD SCS Certified Products Scientific Certification Systems current listings at www scscertified com 1 4 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Product Data Provide data on specified products describing physical and performance characteristics including sizes patterns and colors available and installation instructions C Shop Drawings Indicate seaming plan Selection Samples Submit five samples for Architect s initial selection Verification Samples Submit five samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring
365. g grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application 3 Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel and support fixtures independently with at least two 3 4 inch 20 mm metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees Suspended Lighting Fixture Support k Pendants and Rods Where longer than 48 inches 1200 mm brace to limit swinging 2 Stem Mounted Single Unit Fixtures Suspend with twin stem hangers 3 Continuous Rows Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis including one at each end 4 Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires Connect support wires or rods to building structure Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables IDENTIFICATION Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test for Emergency Lighting Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal February 7 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Prepare a wri
366. g manufacturers pressure seal tools 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Victaulic Company February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 2 4 A PIPING JOINING MATERIALS Pipe Flange Gasket Materials AWWA C110 rubber flat face 1 8 inch 3 2 mm thick or ASME B16 21 nonmetallic and asbestos free 1 Class 125 Cast Iron Flat Face Flanges Full face gaskets Metal Pipe Flange Bolts and Nuts ASME B18 2 1 carbon steel unless otherwise indicated Welding Filler Metals Comply with AWS D10 12M D10 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS Branch Outlet Fittings 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following a Anvil International Inc b National Fittings Inc Shurjoint Piping Products d Tyco Fire amp Building Products LP e Victaulic Company Standard UL 213 Pressure Rating 175 psig 1200 kPa minimum or 300 psig 2070 kPa as required Body Material Ductile iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts Type Me
367. galvanized spring steel specifically designed for the purpose and sized appropriately for the conduit type and diameter Support individual Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E conduits 1 1 2 inch and smaller with 1 4 inch threaded steel rods and use 3 8 inch rods for 2 inch and larger 2 Conduit support channels shall be 14 gauge galvanized or equivalent treatment channel sized for the amount of conduit to be supported Channel suspension shall be 3 8 threaded steel rods Attach suspension rods to structure with swivel type connectors Conduit straps shall be spring steel type compatible with channel 3 Conduit straps shall be single hole cast metal type or two hole galvanized metal type Conduit clamps shall be spring steel type for use with exposed structural steel Innerduct 1 Exposed innerduct shall be rated CMP plenum corrugated plastic equipped with pull string or mule tape 2 Sizes shall be 2 1 1 4 amp 1 inside diameter 3 See Drawings for innerduct details 2 3 METALLIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES D Metallic outlet boxes and device covers shall be galvanized steel not less than 1 16 thick The dimensions of the metallic outlet box shall be 4 x 4 square with a minimum depth of 2 1 8 Metallic outlet boxes shall be equipped with single device covers or two device covers where needed
368. gh b Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure 2 Equipment to Be Labeled a Panelboards Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer Panelboard identification shall be engraved laminated acrylic or melamine label b Enclosures and electrical cabinets C Transformers Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer feeder and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary d Power transfer equipment END OF SECTION 260553 February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 262200 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following types of dry type transformers rated 600 V and less with capacities as indicated 1 Distribution transformers 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data Include rated nameplate data capacities weights dimensions minimum clearances installed devices and features and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Source Limitations Obtain each transformer type through same so
369. gn No CW S 2001 F Rating 2 hour 2 2 MATERIALS A Firestopping Sealants Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound VOC content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No 1168 B Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant conforming to the following 1 Density 1 35 g cu m 2 Tensile Strength 270 as per ASTM D 412 3 Durability and Longevity Permanent 4 Color Black dark gray or red 5 Manufacturers a A D Fire Protection Systems Inc Product A D Fire Barrier www adfire com b 3M Fire Protection Products Product 2000 Silicone Sealant www 3m com firestop c Hilti Inc Product CP 604 www us hilti com d Specified Technologies Inc Product Pensil PEN300 www stifirestop com e Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Foam Firestoppping Multiple component silicone foam compound conforming to the following Elongation 600 percent Density 14 18 lb cu ft Durability and Longevity Permanent Color Black Manufacturers a 3M Fire Protection Products Product Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam www 3m com firestop b Hilti Inc Product CP 620 www us hilti com c Specified Technologies Inc Product PEN 200 Silicone Foam www stifirestop com d S
370. h NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers B Fire Extinguishers Listed and labeled for type tating and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1 6 SUBMITTALS A See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B Shop Drawings Indicate cabinet physical dimensions rough in measurements for recessed cabinets and wall bracket mounted measurements C Product Data Provide extinguisher operational features and color and finish D Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements E Manufacturer s Certificate Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements F Maintenance Data Include test refill or recharge schedules and re certification requirements 1 7 FIELD CONDITIONS A Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients 1 8 WARRANTY A Warranty Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period 1 Failures include but are not limited to the following a Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10 February 7 2014 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Failure of operation of valves or release levers 2 Wa
371. h a certificate executed by a representative of the manufacturer of the door closers that all closers have been inspected and adjusted are operating as designed and have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Installation of the automatic door operators shall be done by a trained installer skilled in the installation of automatic door operators and equipment Factory training provided by the operator manufacturer is recommended All low voltage switch hookups are the responsibility of the operator installer as well as temporary wiring hookup to plug into wall outlet for test of system Final hookup of 115VAC power will be handled by and coordinated with the general contractor s electrical contractor aad 1 Overhead Door Holders 1 Acceptable manufacturers a Glynn Johnson Division of Ingersoll Rand February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Rixson Firemark 2 Characteristics a Provide heavy duty door holders of stainless steel b Holder to be installed with the jamb bracket mounted on the stop J Floor Stops and Wall Bumpers 1 Acceptable manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Characteristics Refer to Hardware Headings K Door Bolts Coordinators 1 Acceptable manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Characteristics a Flush bolts to be forg
372. h and install all Equipment Cabinets 3 Furnish and install all Equipment Shelves 4 Furnish and install all Backboards PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Standard Equipment Rack manufacturer s 1 Chatsworth Products Inc Part 55053 503 2 2 TELCO EQUIPMENT RACKS A Equipment Racks 1 The equipment rack shall be constructed of high strength lightweight bolted aluminum 2 Unless otherwise specified in the drawings all Equipment Racks shall be two rail systems 3 Equipment rack shall have a minimum weight bearing capacity of 1 500 Ibs 4 The vertical rails of the equipment rack shall be equipped with the threaded EIA hole pattern both front and rear a Rack shall be 7 in Height February 7 2014 CABINETS RACKS AND ENCLOSURES 271116 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Rack shall be no wider than 21 c Rack shall have EIA 19 W threaded mounting holes d Rack color shall be clear PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EQUIPMENT RACKS CABINETS SHELVES A Equipment racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using four 4 1 2 diameter bolts and associated hardware anchors amp washers or as required by local codes B Equipment racks cabinets shelves shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer s installation guidelines C Equipment racks cabinets shall be placed with a minimum clearance of 36 inches in the front and
373. h and install all plumbing fixtures complete with all equipment fittings trim and accessories as required for a complete installation B All fixtures shall be Grade A The name and trademark of the manufacturer shall be printed or pressed on all closets and lavatories All fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned after installation C Fixture Schedule 1 F 1 Sink Stainless Steel Manual Faucet Handicapped Accessible Single compartment 18 gauge stainless steel Elkay LRAD2222 674 deep with off centered rear outlet Faucet shall be Elkay Model LKE4123 with single lever gooseneck faucet and hose spray Provide with 1 5 gpm aerator Sink Drain shall be Elkay LK18 stainless steel drain fitting with perforated 3 grid strainer Provide 1 offset tailpiece by Elkay American Standard Brass Craft or McGuire Trap shall be 1 17 gauge adjustable P traps with cleanout and wall plate Exposed surfaces shall be polished chrome Manufacturers Brass Craft Mc Guire EBC or Watts Stops shall be angle type 1 2 inch copper sweat extension tube inlet x inch O D compression risers and loose key lock shield Risers shall be flexible copper one piece with insert Exposed surfaces shall be chrome plated Provide bell escutcheon at wall Brass Craft CS400A S or McGuire 170 LK EBC LA26K or Watts B892120CLK 2 F 2 Recessed Valve Box Water Tite 9000 w valve installed Oatley 38680 3 F 3 Electric Water Cooler Single Level
374. h piping system with clean potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets b Fill and isolate system according to either of the following 3 11 1 Fill system or part thereof with water chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm 50 mg L of chlorine Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours 2 Fill system or part thereof with water chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm 200 mg L of chlorine Isolate and allow to stand for three hours C Flush system with clean potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time d Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination e Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities Include copies of water sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction Clean interior of domestic water piping system Remove dirt and debris as work progresses PIPING SCHEDULE Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated Unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated Fitting Option Extruded tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing Aboveground domestic water piping NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller shall be one of the following 1 Hard copper tube ASTM B 88 Type L ASTM B 88M T
375. h tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated B Temporary Lifting Provisions Remove temporary lifting eyes channels and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components C Install fuses in fusible devices D Comply with NECA 1 3 3 IDENTIFICATION A Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems 1 Identify field installed conductors interconnecting wiring and components provide warning signs 2 Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplate 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Acceptance Testing Preparation 1 Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker component connecting supply feeder and control circuit 2 Test continuity of each circuit B Tests and Inspections 1 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Certify compliance with test parameters 2 Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance otherwise replace with new units and retest 3 Test and adjust controls remote monitoring and safeties Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do
376. hapes pillows or blocks specifically tested in removable configuration conforming to the following 1 Density 4 0 Ib cu ft 2 Durability and Longevity Permanent 3 Manufacturers a Grace Construction Products Product FlameSafe Pillows www na graceconstruction com b Hilti Inc Product FS 657 Fire Block www us hilti com c Nelson FireStop Products Product PLW Firestop Pillows www nelsonfirestop com d Specified Technologies Inc Product SpecSeal Firestop Pillows www stifirestop com e Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Primers Sleeves Forms Insulation Packing Stuffing and Accessories Type required for tested assembly design PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A C D Examine substrates openings voids adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed Confirm compatibility of surfaces scheduled to receive fireproofing Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section 1 Conduct inspection prior to covering up or enclosing walls or ceilings 2 Submit a report detailing findings of this inspection to the Architect Verify that penetrating elements are securely fixed and properly located with the proper space allowance between penetrations and surfaces of openings Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 PREPARATION A Clean substrate surfaces of dirt dust grease oil loose material o
377. hat products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers C Shop Drawings al Fabrication assembly and installation including plans elevations sections components and attachments to other work 2 Factory and shop fabricated ducts and fittings 3 Duct layout indicating sizes configuration liner material and static pressure classes 4 Elevation of bottom of ducts 5 Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines 6 Fittings 7 Reinforcement and spacing 8 Seam and joint construction 9 Penetrations through fire rated and other partitions 10 Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project 11 Locations for duct accessories including dampers turning vanes and access doors and panels 12 Hangers and supports including methods for duct and building attachment seismic restraints and vibration isolation 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A Coordination Drawings Plans drawn to scale on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other using input from installers of the items involved 1 Duct installation in congested spaces indicating coordination with general construction building components and other building services Indicate proposed changes to duct layout 2 Suspended ce
378. he following a Aeroflex USA Inc b Armacell LLC C Rubatex International LLC Surface Burning Characteristics Maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723 certified by an NRTL Liner Adhesive As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B a For indoor applications adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 b Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers B Insulation Pins and Washers 1 Insulation Retaining Washers Self locking washers formed from 0 016 inch thick galvanized steel with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 1 2 inches in diameter February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Shop Application of Duct Liner Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 7 11 Flexible Duct Liner Installation i Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area Attaining indicated thickness with multip
379. he Contractor shall verify that requirements of this specification are met Verification shall be through a combination of analyses inspections demonstrations and tests as described below C Verification by inspection includes examination of items and comparison of pertinent characteristics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in the Specifications Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the item to accomplish the verification included as part of the work at no additional cost to the Owner D The Contractor shall verify by formal demonstrations or tests that the requirements of this Specification have been met The Contractor shall demonstrate that the telecommunications systems components and subsystems meet specification requirements in the as installed operating environment during the System Operation Test Even though no formal environmental testing is required the Contractor shall measure and record temperature humidity and other environmental parameters and the environmental conditions which were encountered during the System Operation Test E The Contractor shall carefully plan and coordinate the final acceptance tests so that tests can be satisfactorily completed The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments labor and materials required for tests including the equipment manufacturer s technical representative and qualified technicians in sufficient numbers to perform the tests wit
380. he following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters 1 NPS 3 4 DN 20 and Smaller 60 inches 1500 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod 2 NPS 1 and NPS 1 1 4 DN 25 and DN 32 72 inches 1800 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod F Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet 3 m G Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters 1 NPS 1 1 4 DN 32 and Smaller 84 inches 2100 mm with 3 8 inch 10 mm rod H Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet 4 5 m 3 6 CONNECTIONS A Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties B When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines allow space for service and maintenance C Connect domestic water piping to water service piping with shutoff valve extend and connect to the following 1 Water Heaters Cold water inlet and hot water outlet piping in sizes indicated via a single cold water stop 2 Plumbing Fixtures Cold and hot water supply piping in sizes indicated but not smaller than that required by plumbing code 3 Equipment Cold and hot water supply piping as indicated but not smaller than equipment connections Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection 3 7 IDENTIFICATION A Label pressure piping with system operating pressure 3 8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform the following tests and inspections 1 Piping Inspections a Do not enclose cover
381. he work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not The work shall include but not be limited to the following Furnish and install complete Conduit System Furnish and install all Telecommunications Outlet Boxes Furnish and install all Pull Boxes Furnish and install complete Cable Tray System Furnish and install all Cable Hangers Furnish and install all Velcro Straps D Go Noes PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Rigid Intermediate Conduit manufacturer s 1 Allied 2 Triangle 3 Wheatland 4 Youngstown B Non Metallic PVC manufacturer s 1 Carlon 2 Georgia Pipe Company 3 Or Approved Equal C Electrical Metallic Tubing EMT manufacturer s 1 Allied 2 Triangle 3 Wheatland 4 Youngstown Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D EMT Fittings manufacturer s fi Thomas amp Betts 2 Steel City 3 Or Approved Equal G Innerduct manufacturer s 1 Endot Industries Part Numbers 2 non plenum 1050 2 1 1 4 non plenum 1250 3 1 non plenum 2000 4 1 1 4 plenum PL 1250 H Metallic Telecommunications
382. hematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems Present each system with single line diagram and include the following NO OI e O N Quantities of outdoor supply return and exhaust airflows Water and steam flow rates Duct outlet and inlet sizes Pipe and valve sizes and locations Terminal units Balancing stations Position of balancing devices E Air Handling Unit Test Reports For air handling units with coils include the following 1 Unit Data Unit identification Location Make and type Model number and unit size Manufacturer s serial number Unit arrangement and class Discharge arrangement Sheave make size in inches and bore Center to center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches Number make and size of belts Number type and size of filters ATT Ta 2AOTD Motor Data Motor make and frame type and size Horsepower and rpm Volts phase and hertz Full load amperage and service factor Sheave make size in inches and bore eoaoop February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 f Center to center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches 3 Test Data Indicated and Actual Values a Total air flow rate in CFM b Total system static pressure in inches wg C Fan rpm d Discharge static pressure in inches wg e Filter s
383. hin a reasonable time period F The Contractor shall satisfy all items detailed in the final acceptance check off list punch list The list shall be a complete representation of specified installation requirements At the time of final February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 acceptance punch list items shall be corrected until the system is found to be acceptable to the Owner and the Project Manager G After the Contractor systems have been installed and tested the completed test plan shall be signed by the Telecommunications Contractor Project Manager and submitted for approval END OF SECTION February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 270510 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full B This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Firestopping for Communications Systems C Product specifications general design considerations and installation guidelines are provided in this document Typical firestopping installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document If the bid documents are in con
384. hreaded or grooved Lining Inert and noncorrosive propylene NOOR O PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PIPING INSTALLATION A Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings B Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting C Install water pressure reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves where the system pressure exceeds 75 psi D Install domestic water piping level and plumb E Install seismic restraints on piping as required by local code F Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas G Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space H Install piping to permit valve servicing l Install nipples unions special fittings and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated J Install piping free of sags and bends K Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections L Install unions in copper tub
385. ia State University GSU 080 096 13 9 Pull Plates 630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel 10 Protective Plates 630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel 11 Door Stops 626 US26D Satin Chrome Plated Brass Bronze 12 Overhead Holders 630 Satin Stainless Steel 13 Thresholds 627 628 US27 US28 14 Weather stripping Aluminum PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect 1 Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer s instructions and recommendations Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way coordinate removal storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved Set units level plumb and true to line and location Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry sta
386. ial Coating i 2 Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H minimum when tested according to ASTM D 3363 Surface Burning Characteristics Maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723 certified by an NRTL Shop Applied Coating Color Black Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner treated with antimicrobial coating D Reinforcement Shapes and Plates ASTM A 36 A 36M steel plates shapes and bars black and galvanized 1 Where black and galvanized steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts isolate the different metals with butyl rubber neoprene or EPDM gasket materials E Tie Rods Galvanized steel 1 4 inch 6 mm minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches 900 mm or less 3 8 inch 10 mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches 900 mm 2 3 DUCT LINER A Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner Preformed cellular closed cell sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534 Type Il Grade 1 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of t
387. ial action 3 5 ADJUSTING A Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer END OF SECTION 262416 February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Section Includes 1 Receptacles receptacles with integral GFCI and associated device plates 2 Twist locking receptacles 3 Weather resistant receptacles 4 Snap switches and wall box dimmers 5 Floor service outlets poke through assemblies 1 3 DEFINITIONS A EMI Electromagnetic interference B GFCI Ground fault circuit interrupter C Pigtail Short lead used to connect a device to a branch circuit conductor D RFI Radio frequency interference E TVSS Transient voltage surge suppressor F UTP Unshielded twisted pair 1 4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A Coordination 1 Receptacles for Owner Furnished Equipment Match plug configurations 2 Cord and Plug Sets Match equipment requirements 1 5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of product February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2
388. icable movement joints 1 Applications Between tile and plumbing fixtures 2 Color s As selected by Design Professional from manufacturer s full line 3 Basis of Design Commercial 100 Silicone Caulk by Custom Building Products www custombuildingproducts com 4 Other Acceptable Manufacturers a Bostik www bostik com b LATICRETE International Inc www laticrete com c Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 8 TILE ACCESSORIES A Non Ceramic Trim Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum style and dimensions to suit application for setting using tile mortar or adhesive 1 Applications Use in the following locations Open edges of wall tile Open edges of floor tile Wall corners outside and inside Transition between floor finishes of different heights Thresholds at door openings Expansion and control joints floor and wall Floor to wall joints Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings Balcony and terrace edge trim and fascia 2 Acceptable Manufacturers a Schluter Systems www schluter com b Genesis APS International www genesis aps com c Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Trempa B Thresholds Marble white or gray honed finish 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame February 7 2014 TILE 093000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 opening 1 2 inch thick beveled one long edge with radiused corner
389. icensed in the state in which Project is located D Railing Sample Five 12 inch long Sample illustrating color finish sheen and concealed connection detail E Glass Sample Submit five 12 inch by 12 inch size glass illustrating color thickness and edge conditions F Supply installation templates required reinforcing and recessed anchorage devices in timely fashion to installers of related work that will receive products of this section 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Delegated Design Design railings including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer using performance requirements and design criteria indicated B General In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following 1 Aluminum The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1 65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1 95 2 Glass 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture 50 percent probability of breakage as listed in Mechanical Properties in AAMA s Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No 12 Structural Properties of Glass February 7 2014 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM 057210 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Structural Performance Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated 1 Handrails
390. ified and tested 4 Certificate of readiness signed by the Contractor certifying that HVAC amp R systems assemblies equipment components and associated controls are ready for testing 5 Certificate of completion certifying that installation prestart checks and startup procedures have been completed 6 Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC amp R systems subsystems equipment and associated controls are ready for testing Test and inspection reports and certificates Corrective action documents Verification of testing adjusting and balancing reports OoN PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A B C TESTING PREPARATION Certify that HVAC amp R systems subsystems and equipment have been installed calibrated and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents Certify that HVAC amp R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and that pretest set points have been recorded Certify that testing adjusting and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing adjusting and balancing reports have been submitted discrepancies corrected and corrective work approved February 7 2014 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D 3 2 3 3 E Set systems subsystems and equipment into
391. ilicone Sealants 1 Bostik Inc Product ChemCalk 1200 www bostik us com 2 Pecora Corporation Product 895 www pecora com 3 BASF Construction Chemicals Building Systems Product Sonolastic 150 www buildingsystems basf com February 7 2014 JOINT SEALERS 079005 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Polyurethane Sealants 1 Bostik Inc Product Chem Calk 900 www bostik us com 2 Pecora Corporation Product Dynatrol XL www pecora com 3 BASF Construction Chemicals Building Systems Product Sonolastic NP 1 www buildingsystems basf com Acrylic Sealants ASTM C920 1 Tremco Global Sealants Product TremFlex 834 www tremcosealants com Butyl Sealants 1 Bostik Inc Product Chem Calk 300 www bostik us com 2 Pecora Corporation Product BC 158 www pecora com 3 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants 1 Bostik Inc Product Chem Calk 600 www bostik us com 2 Pecora Corporation Product AC 20 www pecora com 3 BASF Construction Chemicals Building Systems Product Sonolac www buildingsystems basf com Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers 1 EMSEAL Joint Systems Ltd Product Backerseal Greyflex www emseal com 2 Sandell Manufacturing Company Inc Product Polyseal www sandellmfg com 2 2 SEALANTS A Sealants and Primers General Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound VOC content tha
392. iling components 3 Structural members to which duct will be attached 4 Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile 5 Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire rated construction 6 Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following a Lighting fixtures b Air outlets and inlets February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 c Speakers d Sprinklers e Access panels f Perimeter moldings 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A ASHRAE Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 Section 5 Systems and Equipment and Section 7 Construction and System Start up B ASHRAE IESNA Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 4 4 HVAC System Construction and Insulation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SINGLE WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A General Fabrication Requirements Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible based on indicated static pressure class unless otherwise indicated B Transverse Joints Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Figure 2 1 Rectangular Duct Transverse Joints for static pressure class applicable sealing requirements materials involved duct support intervals and other provisions in SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible C Longitudinal Seams
393. imary air static pressure and compare to manufacturers rated value Report measured static and airflow manufacturers rating based on measured static at each induction unit B Measure and report entering and leaving water temperature at each unit in full cooling C Document position of manual dampers as found 3 6 PROCEDURES FOR T amp B OF INDUCTION UNIT SYSTEMS A After units are cleaned measure and report primary air static pressure and compare to manufacturers rated value Report measured static and airflow manufacturers rating based on measured static at each induction unit B Measure and report entering and leaving water temperature and entering and leaving air temperature at each unit in full cooling and full heating mode Report calculated gom based on air temperatures C Document position of manual dampers as balanced February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system Check the sum of branch circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent B Prepare schematic diagrams of systems as built piping layouts using design drawings C Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following in addition
394. in sliced maximum moisture content of 6 percent of quality suitable for transparent finish 2 4 SHEET MATERIALS A Softwood Plywood PS 1 Grade A B Veneer core birch face species rotary cut B Particleboard ANSI A208 1 composed of wood chips sawdust or flakes of medium density made with waterproof resin binders of grade to suit application sanded faces 2 5 FASTENINGS A Fasteners Of size and type to suit application finishing nails in concealed locations and blind February 7 2014 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 nailing finish in exposed locations 2 6 FABRICATION A Shop assemble work for delivery to site permitting passage through building openings B Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection C When necessary to cut and fit on site provide materials with ample allowance for cutting Provide trim for scribing and site cutting 2 7 FINISHING A Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws B Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations C On items to receive transparent finishes use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish D Finish work in accordance with AWI AWMAC W1 Architectural Woodwork Standards Section 5 Finishing for Grade specified and as follows 1 Opaque a Color As selected by Architect b Sheen Semiglo
395. inal fuse rating local ambient temperature and adjusted fuse rating b Provide manufacturer s technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based 2 Dimensions and manufacturer s technical data on features performance electrical characteristics and ratings 3 Current limitation curves for fuses with current limiting characteristics 4 Time current coordination curves average melt and current limitation curves instantaneous peak let through current for each type and rating of fuse 5 Coordination charts and tables and related data 6 Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data For fuses to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data include the following 1 Ambient temperature adjustment information 2 Current limitation curves for fuses with current limiting characteristics 3 Time current coordination curves average melt and current limitation curves instantaneous peak let through current for each type and rating of fuse 4 Coordination charts and tables and related data February 7 2014 FUSES 262813 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
396. inal units to supply ducts with maximum 48 inch lengths of flexible duct Do not use flexible ducts to change directions L Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands M Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests and Inspections 1 2 3 4 Operate dampers to verify full range of movement Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed Operate fire smoke and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat response device is installed Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation END OF SECTION 23 33 00 February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A B 1 2 A B C 1 3 A B DESCRIPTION Section Includes 1 Air Terminal Units and accessories Related Sections 1 Common Work results for HVAC Section 23 05 00 SUBMITTALS Submit product data for each product specified in this section See 23 05 00 for additional general requirements Submit schedule showing air pressure loss at maximum cfm used on drawings QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements Conform to NFPA 90A Test air terminal units in accordance with ARI Standard 880 Appendix A PART 2
397. inate NEMA LD 3 as manufactured by WilsonArt Pionite Nevamar or Formica D Marmoleum Linoleum Sheet that provides a self sanitizing bactericidal resistant quality 2 3 MAILROOM FURNITURE COMPONENTS A Provide Hamilton Sorter Mail Center and Communications Furniture series components fully modular and reconfigurable 1 Select type and size of units and accessories to provide the functionality indicated on the Drawings B Sort Modules Thermally fused laminate on core particle board 1 inch thick vertical ends and 5 8 inch thick top bottom and interior partitions concealed fasteners locking to console frame 1 Sort module size configuration as indicated on the Drawings a Standard size 10 13 16 by 11 3 4 inches deep shelves 2 Fit each vertical section with full depth injection molded rigid PVC plastic shelf supports at 1 inch on center 3 Adjustable Polyethylene Shelving Removable and interchangeable polyethylene shelves of 1 8 inch polyethylene with memory retention with full width aluminum indexing support channel front and back rated capacity of minimum of 35 pounds manufacturer s standard quantity for unit size 4 Indexing channels covered with removable clear plastic cover holding paper index strips C Freestanding Modules Same construction and finish as sort modules with feet for floor installation 1 Sort module size configuration as indicated on the Drawings a Standard size 10 13 16 by 11 3 4 in
398. ination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity including other supports and seismic restraints Qualification Data For testing agency Welding certificates Air Mounting System Performance Certification Include natural frequency load and damping test data performed by an independent agency Field quality control test reports CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data For air mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications An independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910 7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Comply with seismic restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1 1 D1 1M Structural Welding Code Steel Seismic restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD preapproval by ICC ES or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction showing maximum seismic restraint ratings Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations If preapproved ratings are not available submitta
399. incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following Basis of Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements provide a comparable product by one of the following Capitol Manufacturing Company member of the Phoenix Forge Group Central Plastics Company Hart Industries International Inc Jomar International Matco Norca McDonald A Y Mfg Co Watts a division of Watts Water Technologies Inc Wilkins a Zurn company sa gt ea0o0p Standard ASSE 1079 Pressure Rating 125 psig 860 kPa minimum at 180 deg F 82 deg C End Connections Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous C Dielectric Nipples 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 2 Basis of Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements provide a comparable product by one of the following a Elster Perfection Corporation b Grinnell Mechanical Products Tyco Fire Products LP C Matco Norca February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 d Precision Plumbing Products Inc e Victaulic Company Standard IAPMO PS 66 Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545 Pressure Rating and Temperature 300 psig 2070 kPa at 225 deg F 107 deg C End Connections Male t
400. indicated as full floor to ceiling height install with long edge of board parallel to studs 3 Install adjacent boards without gaps 4 Size and Location As indicated on drawings 3 5 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site sawn cuts complying with manufacturer s instructions B Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members 3 6 TOLERANCES A Framing Members 1 4 inch from true position maximum B Surface Flatness of Floor 1 8 inch in 10 feet maximum and 1 4 inch in 30 feet maximum C Variation from Plane Other than Floors 1 4 inch in 10 feet maximum and 1 4 inch in 30 feet maximum END OF SECTION February 7 2014 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B Finish carpentry items Wood moldings 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B C Section 064100 Architectural Wood Casework Shop fabricated custom cabinet work Section 088000 Glazing Glass and glazing of wood partitions and screens Section 099000 Painting and Coating Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1 4 A ANSI A208 1 American National Standard for Particleboard 2009 B ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2010b C
401. ined point groups alarm conditions shall be displayed by flashing point blocks C Equipment state may be changed by clicking on the point block or graphic symbol and selecting the new state on off or setpoint Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the equipment changes The state colors shall be user definable The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several applications at a time to analyze total building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress Off the shelf graphic software shall be provided to allow the user to add modify or delete system graphic displays A clipart library of HVAC and automation symbols shall be provided including fans valves motors chillers AHU systems and standard ductwork diagrams The user shall have the ability to add custom symbols to the clipart library E System Configuration amp Definition February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 11 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 7 1 Network wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controller but shall be able to include data from any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global control strategies 2 Provide automatic backup and restore of all DDC controller databases on the wor
402. ing at final connection to each piece of equipment machine and specialty M Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls ceilings and floors N Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs O Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls ceilings and floors February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 2 3 3 3 4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Remove dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipes tubes and fittings before assembly Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1 20 1 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows 1 Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads 2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing Apply ASTM B 813 water flushable flux to end of tube Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA s Copper Tube Handbook Pressure Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing Join copper tube and pressure seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer Joints for Dissimilar Material Piping Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems TRANSITION F
403. intain an up to date instrument calibration instruction procedure Calibrating standard shall be of a higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested DEMONSTRATION All training shall be scheduled and take place in a location and date agreed upon by the Owner A course outline of the training program shall be forwarded to the Architect for delivery to the Owner at least three weeks in advance of presentation of each course All training hours shall take place between the hours of 8 00 AM to 6 00 PM Monday through Friday Maintenance Training 1 During the course of the installation several persons will be designated by the Owner for receiving maintenance training 2 The maintenance training courses shall include operation troubleshooting using both test hardware and diagnostic programs and failure repair of actual system hardware Servicing personnel shall receive detailed instructions in principles of operation set up adjustments and routine preventive maintenance diagnosis and corrective repair of all system components The training of service personnel shall be completed prior to substantial completion and systems acceptance by the Owner Provide two eight 8 hour maintenance training sessions 3 Contractor shall provide proposed course outlines TRAINING AND TESTING SCHEDULE Provide a schedule detailing the outline date and duration of all training and testing no later than 60 days after the award of contract Submit all
404. inted Remove grease mill scale weld splatter dirt and rust Where heavy coatings of scale are evident remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting clean by washing with solvent Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution ensuring weld joints bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned Prime paint entire surface spot prime after repairs Shop Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust Feather edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous Clean surfaces with solvent Prime bare steel surfaces Re prime entire shop primed item Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming Seal knots pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried sand between coats Back prime concealed surfaces before installation Metal Doors to be Painted Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 APPLICATION A Remove unfinished louvers grilles covers and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately Apply products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Where adjacent sealant is to be painted do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry Allow applied coats to dry before next coat
405. ion In this mode the system will ignore low priority safeties and acknowledge high priority safeties as required by UL 864 UUKL All keypad control serial communications control and normal customer start stop control inputs will be disregarded This Smoke Control Mode shall be designed to meet the intent of UL864 UUKL 24 Fireman s Override Mode Override 2 the bypass shall include a second programmable override input which will allow the user to configure the unit to acknowledge some digital inputs all digital inputs ignore digital inputs or any combination of the above This programmability allows the user to program the bypass unit to react in whatever manner the local Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ requires The Override 2 action may be programmed for Run to Destruction The user may also force the unit into Override 2 via the serial communications link 25 Class 10 20 or 30 programmable electronic motor overload protection shall be included PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 A B 3 02 A 3 03 A February 7 2014 INSTALLATION Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor The contractor shall install the drive in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the VFD installation manual Power wiring shall be completed by the electrical contractor to NEC code 430 122 wiring requirements based on the VFD input current Caution VFDs supplied witho
406. ional RS 232C port to communicate via telephone line VAV WSHP or Induction Units IUs may use canned programmed controllers Application specific controllers ASC may be used to provide operating equipment information over RS 485 serial communication for VFD s retrofitted to existing pumps and fans Physical output and input from primary DDC controllers indicated in sec 6 0 a shall be used to control all HVAC equipment DDC CONTROLLER DDC Controllers shall be stand alone multi tasking multi user real time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug in enclosed processors communication controllers power supplies and input output point modules Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases including 1 Control processes 2 Energy management applications 3 Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level alarm for each point in the system 4 Historical trend data for points specified 5 Maintenance support applications February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 6 Custom processes 7 Operator I O 8 Dial up communications 9 Manual override monitoring C Each DDC Controller shall support any combinatio
407. ions 1 The VFD shall have an EIA 485 port as standard The standard protocols shall be Modbus Johnson Controls N2 Siemens Building Technologies FLN and BACnet Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable All protocols shall be certified by the governing authority i e BTL Listing for BACnet Use of non certified protocols is not allowed 2 The BACnet connection shall be an EIA 485 MS TP interface operating at 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 76 8 Kbps The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs BTL and be BTL Listed The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller B ASC The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B ASC including but not limited to a Data Sharing Read Property B b Data Sharing Write Property B c Device Management Dynamic Device Binding Who ls I Am d Device Management Dynamic Object Binding Who Has I Have e Device Management Communication Control B 3 If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface the VFD manufacturer shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive Multiple VFDs sharing one gateway shall not be acceptable 4 Serial communication capabilities shall include but not be limited to run stop control speed set adjustment proportional integral deri
408. ions Install piping to allow application of insulation Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls ceilings and floors Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls gypsum board partitions and concrete floor and roof slabs Aboveground Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals 1 Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches 150 mm in diameter 2 Install cast iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches 150 mm and larger in diameter 3 Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size Position pipe in center of sleeve Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal Underground Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations Install cast iron wall pipes for sleeves Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals 1 Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation Select type and number of sealing elements re
409. ions and allow for input single phase operation when in the VFD mode Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the VFD mode are not acceptable Motor protection from single phase power conditions the bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass disengage the motor in a controlled fashion and give a single phase input power indication Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in bypass mode are not acceptable The bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation The bypass system shall be designed for stand alone operation and shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the system for repair replacement Serial communications shall remain functional even with the VFD removed Serial communications the bypass shall be capable of being monitored and or controlled via serial communications On board communications protocols shall include ModBus Johnson Controls N2 Siemens Building Technologies FLN P1 and BACnet Serial communication capabilities shall include but not be limited to bypass run stop control the ability to force the unit to bypass and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as current in amps kilowatt hours resettable operating hours resettable and bypass logic boar
410. is not required by this specification except as shown on the electrical drawings 2 For floors 7 and 22 thru 24 provide occupant override control in same location as existing key switch 3 Each override switch shall be a separately recognized binary input to the controller The controller shall be fully programmable to allow any override switch to be associated with any output zone or multiple zones 4 Initially set up override to turn on lights for 30 minutes if pushed one time and 60 minutes if pushed two or more times 5 Provide 365 day 24 hour programmable sweep off function to shut off the lighting outputs Each output shall have individual schedule A time delay shall be provided between each Off command February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 6 Provide Flash Before Off feature to flash or blink light on off for an adjustable amount of time before the unoccupied period begins and flash before the end of an override period Initially set flash for two minutes before Off 7 Provide remote after hours lighting requests for separate approved account users via web browser System shall log all after hours requests allow unique accounts and passwords for each user and provide for an afterhours request totalizer and billing report package Provide supervisory control to track and limit account user override capability 8 Provide normal hours use and
411. ision 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data include the following 1 Manufacturer s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices 1 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Source Limitations Obtain panelboards overcurrent protective devices components and accessories from single source from single manufacturer B Product Selection for Restricted Space Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items Comply with indicated maximum dimensions C Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application D Comply with NEMA PB 1 E Comply with NFPA 70 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Environmental Limitations 1 Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight wet work in spaces is complete and dry work above panelboards is complete and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period B Interruption of Existing Electric Service Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner without written permission obtained at least 2 days in advance 1 9 COORDINATION A Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
412. ition and return air damper position Floor Damper Operation from FCC at With switch in Negative Hand position supply dampers close and return and exhaust dampers open 2 With switch in Positive Hand position supply dampers open and return and exhaust dampers close 3 With switch in Auto Position all dampers close on signal from the fire alarm system as described with AHUs Activation of duct smoke detector shall signal fire alarm system and shut down Air Handling Systems Signal from fire alarm system including any space smoke detector pull station or sprinkler flow switch air systems shall stop and dampers close Central AHUs and EF Operation from the FCC 1 With any selector switch on floor 2 13 in either Positive or Negative Hand position AC 3 AC 4 R 2 E 10 E 11 and all associated controls operate February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 3 6 2 With any selector switch on floor 14 26 in either Positive or Negative Hand position AC 1 AC 2 R 1 E 10 and E 11 and all associated controls operate 3 In smoke purge mode a Outside air dampers shall open b Return air damper shall close C Relief spill air damper shall open d Supply return and exhaust fan shall operate to maintain purge duct static pressure setpoint 4 For this Phase fans for upper floors system will be disabled until variable speed dri
413. itions and concrete floor and roof slabs N Fire Barrier Penetrations Maintain indicated fire rating of walls partitions ceilings and floors at pipe penetrations Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials Refer to Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping for materials O Verify final equipment locations for roughing in P Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in requirements February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems B Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe C Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly D Soldered Joints Apply ASTM B 813 water flushable flux unless otherwise indicated to tube end Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA s Copper Tube Handbook using lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32 E Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1 20 1 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows 1 Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unle
414. ive of the county planning and or maintenance department and a representative of the hardware supplier to demonstrate product installation and adjustment in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations and Owner s requirements C Hardware manufacturers representative shall inspect hardware installation to confirm that all products are installed and adjusted according to manufacturer s recommendations A certificate of compliance shall be submitted with the project closeout documents 1 7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND PROTECTION A Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule and include basic installation instructions with each item or package B Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container C Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct D Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation shop or Project site E Provide secure lock up for door hardware delivered to the Project but not yet installed Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceabl
415. izes 6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by a continuous white or gray colored insulation Sizes larger than 6 AWG shall be identified by a distinctive white marking at its termination marking shall encircle the insulation Equipment grounding conductors sizes 6 AWG and smaller shall be insulated and individually identified with an outer finish that is green or green with one or more yellow stripes Equipment grounding conductors larger than 6 AWG shall be insulated and individually identified at time of installation at each end and at every point where the conductor is accessible by encircling the exposed insulation with green tape Multi conductor Cable Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal clad cable Type MC with ground wire CONNECTORS AND SPLICES Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following O AOO OS AFC Cable Systems Inc Hubbell Power Systems Inc O Z Gedney EGS Electrical Group LLC 3M Electrical Products Division Tyco Electronics Corp Description Factory fabricated connectors and splices of size ampacity rating material type and class for application and service indicated PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A Feeders Copper Solid for No 10 AWG and smaller stranded for No 8 AWG and larger B Branch Circuits Copper Solid for No 10 AWG and smaller
416. knurled faces 3 Runners U shaped sized to match studs 4 Ceiling Channels C shaped 5 Furring Hat shaped sections minimum depth of 7 8 inch 6 Resilient Furring Channels 1 2 inch depth for attachment to substrate through one leg only a Manufacturers Resilient Furring Channels 1 Same manufacturer as other framing materials 2 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements C Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board As specified in Section 054000 D Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories ASTM C645 galvanized sheet steel of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Manufacturers Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories a Same manufacturer as other framing materials b Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements E Ceiling Hangers Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required Partition Head to Structure Connections Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes screws and anti friction bushings preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition 1 Structural Performance Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American
417. kstation hard disk In addition all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on line without disrupting other system operations Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate DDC Controller Changes made at the DDC Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation ensuring system continuity 3 System configuration programming editing graphics generation shall be performed on line Alarm Management 1 Alarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers or PC location based on time of day alarm severity or point type 2 Alarm Notification shall be provided via two alarm icons to distinguish between routine maintenance type alarms and critical alarms These alarm icons shall be displayed when user is working in other Windows programs The BAS alarm display screen shall be displayed when the user clicks on the alarm icon 3 Alarm Display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top of the display The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of the associated point graphic and message 4 Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point to display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the event of an alarm CONTROL VALVES Pneumatic valves on the affected floors shall be replaced with electric actuated valves This section shall be responsible for selection of proper control valves for the
418. l Data Trend logs Initially provide trend logs for all binary points log indicates each change of state each on or off and provide trend logs for all analog points This data will be used for commissioning of the building Set points shall be user adjustable from central processing unit in BAS Room from graphic which displays values and from the local control panel Reference the Equipment Data Sheets Existing Equipment Schedules for setpoints to be used in setting up the BAS system Confirm final setpoints especially room or space temperature leaving air temperatures and humidity with Owner and CxA Prior to demolition confirm existing setpoints with hard copy print out or downloaded file from the existing DSC s Sensors Restore analog current sensing for pumps and fans AC 1 AC 2 AC 3 AC 4 AC 5 AC 6 R 1 R 2 R 4 P 6 P 7 P 9 P 10 after replacement of motors and drive hardware Dampers All outdoor and relief air dampers shall be fail safe type that fail closed unless specified otherwise New smoke dampers will be installed on 7 and 24 Dampers will be fail safe type that fail closed Voltage Coordination Coordinate analog point requirement of 0 10 V dc or 4 20 Ma with equipment February 7 2014 BAS SEQUENCES 230924 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 J 3 2 Coordinate voltage requirements of all control equipment especially those furnished with equipment or
419. l monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil This failed contactor condition shall be indicated on the bypass LCD display programmed to fire a Form C relay output and or over the serial communications protocol The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad indication that this time delay is in process A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 120 seconds There shall be a keypad adjustment to select manual or automatic transfer bypass The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will result in an automatic transfer to the bypass mode and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass The user may select whether the system shall automatically transfer from drive to bypass mode on the following drive fault conditions a Over current b Over voltage c Under voltage d Loss of analog input The following operators shall be provided a Bypass Hand Off Auto b Drive mode selector c Bypass mode selector d Bypass fault reset The bypass shall provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze fire smoke contacts and external start command All external safety interlocks shall
420. l piping clear of electrical equipment including disconnect switches starters and control panels E Pipe hangers shall support the piping Support from the coil is not acceptable F Where more than one coil is used the area of the branch piping to the individual coils shall equal or exceed the area of the combined branch piping Velocity through any branch shall not exceed 6 feet per second 3 5 JOINTS A Threaded Joints 1 Form tapered pipe threads in compliance with ANSI ASME B1 20 1 2 Use clean sharp dies to cut threads 3 Ream ends to restore pipe s inside diameter and deburr 4 Apply joint compound or sealant to male threads at all joints 5 Use compound or sealant which is compatible with the intended service B Flanged Joints C Weld flanges to pipe ends and equipment in accordance with ANSI ASME B31 1 February 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D E 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 D February Clean flange faces and install gaskets Compress gasket uniformly by tightening bolts in proper sequence COPPER TUBING Conform to bending procedures and techniques described in the Copper Tube Handbook CDA 404 0 R Brazing Conform to soldering and brazing procedures and techniques described in the Copper Tube Handbook CDA 404 0 R INSTALLED IN THIS WORK BUT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Sensing devices control valves Well
421. ld measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work 1 Locate concealed framing blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on shop drawings 2 Established Dimensions Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CABINETS A Quality Grade Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AW1 AWMAC WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade 2 2 WOOD BASED COMPONENTS A Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted B Provide sustainably harvested wood certified or labeled as specified in Section 016000 C Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 LUMBER MATERIALS A Softwood Lumber NIST PS 20 Graded in accordance with AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Grade ll Custom average moisture content of 5 10 percent species as scheduled Hardwood
422. le if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance including color and texture of railings 2 9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A B C Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes Mechanical Finish AA M32 Medium Satin Mechanical Finish as specified sand top rails handrails and intermediate rails in one direction only parallel to length of railing with 180 and 220 grit aluminum oxide abrasive After installation polish railings with No 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax then rub to a luster with a soft dry cloth Clear Anodic Finish AAMA 611 AA M12C22A41 Class 0 018 mm or thicker 2 10 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A B Surface Preparation Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish Directional Satin Finish No 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared February 7 2014 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM 057210 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B C Verify that reinforcement and anchoring devices are the correct type have been located correctly and have b
423. le layers of duct liner is prohibited Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted edge overlapping Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints except at corners of ducts unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches 300 mm transversely at 3 inches 75 mm from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches 450 mm longitudinally Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or Z profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall 2 4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A General Sealant and Gasket Requirements Surface burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723 certified by an NRTL B Water Based Joint and Seam Sealant 1 Application Method Brush on 2 Solids Content Minimum 65 percent 3 Shore A Hardness Minimum 20 4 Water resistant 5 Mold and mildew resistant 6 VOC Maximum 75 g L less water 7 Maximum Static Pressure Class 10 inch wg 2500 Pa positive and negative
424. les for any point In addition the user may pause the graph and take snapshots of screens to be stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis Exact point values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed D Dynamic Color Graphic Displays 1 Create Color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment including air handling units chilled water systems and hot water boiler systems shall be provided by the BAS contractor as indicated in the point I O summary of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme menu selection or text based commands Graphics software shall permit the importing of AutoCAD or Bitmap drawings for use in the system Dynamic temperature values humidity values flow values and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention and without pre defined screen refresh rates a Analog bars in 3 sizes shall be available for monitor and control of analog values high and low alarm limit settings shall be displayed on the analog scale The user shall be able to click and drag the pointer to change the setpoint b Provide the user the ability to display blocks of point data by def
425. less otherwise indicated solid lumber construction mortised and tenoned joints C Glass Uncoated clear fully tempered float glass 6 0 mm thick complying with Section 088000 Glazing 2 3 DOOR FACINGS A Interior Doors Wood veneer see drawings for wood species quarter sliced with random matched grain for opaque finish B Adhesive Type waterproof 2 4 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A Fabricate in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1400 Custom grade 1 Door Construction for Opaque Finish a Stile and Rail Construction Clear softwood may be edge glued for width and finger jointed b Flat Panel Construction Veneered wood based panel product 2 Stile and Rail Widths Manufacturer s standard but not less than the following a Stiles Top and Intermediate Rails 4 1 2 inches b Bottom Rails 9 inches February 7 2014 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B C D Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing Bond edge banding to cores Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions Do not machine for surface hardware Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings Glazed Openings Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated complying with Division 08 Section Glazing Install gla
426. less than 1 4 mils Interior Ferrous Metal Primers Factory formulated quick drying rust inhibitive latex based metal primer 1 Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 7 2 3 mils 2 PPG Industries Pitt Tech Pitt Tech Plus DTM Primer 90 Series Applied at a dry film thickness as recommended by the manufacturer 3 Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Procryl Universal Primer B66 310 Series Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2 0 4 0 mils 2 3 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A Interior Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel Factory formulated semi gloss acrylic latex enamel for interior application 1 Benjamin Moore Satin Impervo Alkyd low Lustre Enamel No 235 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 3 mils 2 PPG Industries 80 510 Series Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi Gloss Oil Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 5 mils 3 Sherwin Williams Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi Gloss Enamel A 40 Series Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 7 mils B Interior Satin Acrylic Epoxy Paint Factory formulated satin water borne acrylic epoxy paint for interior application 1 Benjamin Moore 524 AURA Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2 0 mils 2 PPG Industries Pitt Glaze WB1 No 16 510 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 5 mils 3 Sherwin Williams Pro Ind
427. let box are securely mounted Tests shall be diagnostic indicating damaged conductors high resistance at the circuit breaker poor connections inadequate fault current path defective devices or similar problems Correct circuit conditions remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones and retest as specified above DEON G Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections D Prepare test and inspection reports END OF SECTION 262726 February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 262813 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes 1 Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in enclosed switches ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated Include construction details material dimensions descriptions of individual components and finishes for spare fuse cabinets Include the following for each fuse type indicated 1 Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings a For each fuse having adjusted ratings include location of fuse orig
428. llation procedures 2 Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports fire resistance requirements acceptable sample installations and manufacturer s recommendations 3 Unless specified and approved all insulation used in conjunction with through penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed 4 Seal holes and penetrations to ensure an effective smoke seal 5 In areas of high traffic protect firestopping materials from damage If the opening is large install firestopping materials capable of supporting the weight of a human 6 Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein 7 All combustible penetrants e g non metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition B Dam Construction 1 When required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings damming or packing materials may be utilized Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system 3 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions and recommendations B Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets Finish surfaces of firestopping that are t
429. local fire department equipment C Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections D Prepare test and inspection reports 3 7 CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers B Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted other than with a factory finish 3 8 PIPING SCHEDULE A Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used downstream of control valves instead of specified fittings B Wet pipe sprinkler system NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller shall be the following 1 Standard weight black steel pipe with threaded ends uncoated gray iron threaded fittings and threaded joints 2 Standard weight black steel pipe with plain ends uncoated plain end pipe fittings and twist locked joints February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Standard weight black steel pipe with roll grooved ends uncoated grooved end fittings for steel piping grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping and grooved joints 4 Standard weight black steel pipe with plain ends steel welding fittings and welded joints 5 Thinwall black steel pipe with roll grooved ends uncoated grooved end fittings for steel piping grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping and grooved joints 6 Thinwall black steel pipe with plain ends uncoated plain end pipe fittings and twist locked joints T Thinwall black steel pipe with
430. lock 5 master keys for each master system and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system Deliver keys to Owner E Locksets Latchsets Deadbolts 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Best Access Systems 35H Series x 14H 2 Mortise Locksets and Latch sets as scheduled a b C gt Qo Chassis cold rolled steel handing field changeable without disassembly Latch bolts 3 4 inch throw stainless steel anti friction type Lever Trim through bolted accessible design cast or solid rod lever as scheduled Spindles independent break away Thumb turns accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate Deadbolts stainless steel 1 inch throw Electric operation Manufacturer installed continuous duty solenoid Strikes 16 gage curved stainless steel bronze or brass with 1 deep box construction lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing Scheduled Lock Series and Design Schlage L Series 17A Design Certifications 1 ANSI A156 13 1994 Grade 1 Operational Grade 1 Security 2 ANSI ASTM F476 84 Grade 30 UL Listed F Exit Devices 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Von Duprin Division of Ingersoll Rand CD98 98 Series 2 Characteristics a b Cc February 7 2014 Exit devices shall be UL listed for life safety All exit devices for fire rated openings shall have UL labels for Fire Exit Hardware All exit devices mounted on labeled wood doors shall be
431. lock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault If the battery fails the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up Capacitor back up is not acceptable The clock shall also be programmable to control start stop functions constant speeds PID parameter sets and output Form C relays The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock when in the off mode for a programmable time frame There shall be four 4 separate independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings The VFD s shall utilize pre programmed application macro s specifically designed to facilitate start up The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end user to create and save custom settings The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement The fans shall be designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required To extend the fan and bearing operating life the VFD shall cycle the cooling fans on and off as required The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load forward or reverse up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without t
432. low metal frames of type indicated Mineral Fiber Insulation ASTM C 665 Type blankets without membrane facing consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 Ib cu ft density with maximum flame spread and smoke development indexes of 25 and 50 respectively passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics Glazing Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 Glazing Bituminous Coating Cold applied asphalt mastic SSPC Paint 12 compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat Provide inert type noncorrosive compound free from asbestos fibers sulfur components and other deleterious impurities 2 3 STEEL DOOR FRAMES A Requirements for All Frames 1 Accessibility Comply with ANSI ICC A117 1 2 Glazed Lights Non removable stops on non secure side sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings 3 Hardware Preparation In accordance with BHMA A156 115 with reinforcement welded in place in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard 4 Finish Factory primed for field finishing 5 Combined Requirements If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement comply with all the specified requirements for each type for instance an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound rated doors where two requirements conflict comply with the most
433. ls based on independent testing are preferred Calculations including combining shear and tensile loads to support seismic restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following Ace Mountings Co Inc Amber Booth Company Inc California Dynamics Corporation Isolation Technology Inc Kinetics Noise Control Mason Industries Vibration Eliminator Co Inc Vibration Isolation Vibration Mountings amp Controls Inc 691 008 E Ea Elastomeric Hangers Single or double deflection type fitted with molded oil resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods Color code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range Spring Hangers Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert hanger with spring and insert in compression 1 Frame Steel fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency 2 Outside Spring Diameter Not
434. ltages specified C Where the Architect determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance equipment shall be removed and reinstalled one time only as directed by the Project Manager at no additional cost to the Owner Conveniently accessible is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors pumps belt guards transformers piping and duct work 3 4 CLEANING A During construction and prior to Owner acceptance of the building remove from the premises and dispose of packing material and debris caused by telecommunications work B Remove dust and debris from interiors and exteriors of electrical equipment Clean accessible current carrying elements prior to being energized 3 5 COMPLETION A General Upon completion of the work remove excess debris materials equipment apparatus tools and similar items Leave the premises clean neat and orderly B Results Expected Systems shall be complete and operational and controls shall be set and calibrated Testing start up and cleaning work shall be complete C Maintenance Materials Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Specification shall be delivered to the Owner 3 06 TESTING AND VERIFICATION See specific Division 27 sections for testing parameters of sub systems B T
435. lti Inc Product CP 643N www us hilti com d Specified Technologies Inc Product Firestop Collars www stifirestop com e Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements G Firestop Devices Cast In Type Sleeve and sealing material intended to be cast in concrete floor forms or in concrete on metal deck not requiring any additional materials to achieve penetration seal 1 Durability and Longevity Permanent 2 Manufacturers a 3M Fire Protection Products Product Fire Barrier Cast in Device www 3m com firestop b Hilti Inc Product CP 680 www us hilti com c Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements H Intumescent Putty Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain conforming to February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 the following 1 Potential Expansion Minimum 500 percent 2 Density 1 45 lb cu ft 3 Durability and Longevity Permanent 4 Color Black dark gray or red 5 Manufacturers a Grace Construction Products Product FSP 1000 www na graceconstruction com b 3M Fire Protection Products Product Fire Barrier Moldable Putty www 3m com firestop c Hilti Inc Product CP 618 www us hilti com d Specified Technologies Inc Product SSP Putty www stifirestop com e Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Reusable Firestopping Removable intumescent compressible s
436. lts are used as a means of reinforcing the work provide sleeves for each thru bolt or use sex screw fasteners 2 3 HARDWARE FINISHES A Match items to the manufacturer s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets or push pull units if no latch of lock sets B Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI or if none established match the Architect s sample C Provide quality of finish including thickness of plating or coating if any composition hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer s standards but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware D The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI BHMA A156 18 Materials and Finishes including coordination with the traditional U S finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products 1 Hinges Exterior 630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel 2 Hinges Interior 652 US26D Satin Chrome Plated Steel 3 Continuous Hinges 628 US28 Clear Anodized Aluminum finish to match doors aluminum entrance systems 4 Flush Bolts 626 US26D Satin Chrome Plated Brass Bronze 5 Locks 630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel 6 Exit Devices 628 US28 chassis 626 US26D covers and 630 US32D touchpads 7 Door Closers 689 AL Powder Coat 8 Push Plates 630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georg
437. lude water slinger on shaft between motor and seal Pump Bearings Permanently lubricated ball bearings C Motor Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing February 7 2014 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application 2 Comply with NEMA designation temperature rating service factor and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment a Enclosure Open dripproof b Motor Bearings permanently lubricated ball bearings C Efficiency Premium efficient PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PUMP INSTALLATION A Comply with HI 1 4 B Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors impellers couplings and accessories C Equipment Mounting Install in line pumps to be supported by adjacent piping 3 2 ALIGNMENT A Perform alignment service at flexibly couple base mounted pumps where the motors are replaced P 6 and P 7 in the Penthouse P 9 and P 10 in the Level CR mechanical room B Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame C
438. matic tuning of control loops 3 DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy management routines rm s gt e oaooD Time of day scheduling Calendar based scheduling Holiday scheduling Temporary schedule overrides Start Stop Time Optimization Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover Night setback control Enthalpy switchover economizer Peak demand limiting Temperature compensated duty cycling 4 DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom job specific processes defined by the user to automatically perform calculations and special control routines a A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC Controllers on the network In addition a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC Controllers on the network Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I O devices A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution of a remote device such as a printer or text message to cell phone and radio 5 Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non critical alarms minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost At no time sh
439. mb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated C Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations Extend grease fittings to accessible locations D Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope 3 6 CONCRETE BASES A Concrete Bases Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer s written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project 1 Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches 100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit 2 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor Unless otherwise indicated install dowel rods on 18 inch 450 mm centers around the full perimeter of the base 3 Install epoxy coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor 4 Place and secure anchorage devices Use supported equipment manufacturer s setting drawings templates diagrams instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded 5 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment 6 Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer s written instructions 7 Use 3000 psi 28
440. mber and nameplate data 3 9 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A Verify proper rotation of fans B Measure entering and leaving air temperatures C Record compressor data 3 10 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT TRANSFER COILS A Measure adjust and record the following data for each water coil February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 11 Entering and leaving water temperature Water flow rate Water pressure drop Dry bulb temperature of entering and leaving air Wet bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils Airflow Air pressure drop FNO OI CON Measure adjust and record the following data for each electric heating coil Nameplate data Airflow Entering and leaving air temperature at full load Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage Calculated kilowatt at full load Fuse or circuit breaker rating for overload protection Orn eO e Measure adjust and record the following data for each steam coil 1 Dry bulb temperature of entering and leaving air 2 Airflow 3 Air pressure drop 4 Inlet steam pressure Measure adjust and record the following data for each refrigerant coil Dry bulb temperature of entering and leaving air Wet bulb temperature of entering and leaving air Airflow Air pressure drop Refrigerant suction pressur
441. me material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available 2 When preformed sections are not available install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body 3 Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation 4 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes ale Seal split tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges k Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange 2 Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation 3 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation 4 Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows 1 Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation 2 Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive
442. ments G Installation Instructions Manufacturer s installation instructions and recommendations H Maintenance Data Manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Fabricator Qualifications Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed B Installer Qualifications Fabricator C Fire Test Response Characteristics Provide original fire test reports to ensure compliance with the following requirements February 7 2014 COUNTERTOPS 123600 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Burn Rate ASTM D635 Class CC1 for a nominal thickness of 1 5 mm 2 Self Ignition Temperature ASTM D1929 greater than 650 degrees F 3 Smoke Density ASTM D2848 less than 78 4 Flammability Classification ASTM E 84 smoke less than 450 flame spread less than 75 D Impact Resistance Provide Solid Surfacing Countertops that comply with the following requirements 1 Impact Strength Un notched 23 deg ASTM D4812 No breakage 2 Impact Strength Notched 23 deg ASTM D526 88J m 1 16 E Allowable Tolerances 1 Maximum Deflection 1 16 over 12 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store products in manufacturer s unopened packaging until ready for installation B Store and dispose of solvent based materials and materials used with solvent based materials in accordance with requirements of lo
443. motors 2 2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A Duty Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level B Capacity and Torque Characteristics Sufficient to start accelerate and operate connected loads at designated speeds at installed altitude and environment with indicated operating sequence and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor February 7 2014 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 2 4 POLYPHASE MOTORS Description NEMA MG 1 Design B medium induction motor Efficiency Premium Efficiency as defined in NEMA MG 1 Service Factor 1 15 Multispeed Motors Variable torque 1 For motors with 2 1 speed ratio consequent pole single winding 2 For motors with other than 2 1 speed ratio separate winding for each speed Multispeed Motors Separate winding for each speed Rotor Random wound squirrel cage Bearings Regreasable shielded antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading Temperature Rise Match insulation rating Insulation Class H Code Letter Designation 1 Motors 15 HP and Larger NEMA starting Code F or Code G 2 Motors Smaller than 15 HP Manufacturer s standard starting characteristic Enclosure Material Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324
444. mper Motors Modulating action Comply with NEMA designation temperature rating service factor enclosure type and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 1 Motor Sizes Minimum size as indicated If not indicated large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1 0 2 Controllers Electrical Devices and Wiring Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Division 26 Sections 3 Permanent Split Capacitor or Shaded Pole Motors With oil immersed and sealed gear trains 4 Spring Return Motors Equip with an integral spiral spring mechanism where indicated Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments Size for running torque rating of 150 in x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in x Ibf 5 Electrical Connection 115 V single phase 60 Hz Accessories 1 Test and reset switches damper mounted February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Air Balance Inc a division of Mestek Inc 2 Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc 3 Gre
445. mum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system VALVE TAG INSTALLATION Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems except check valves valves within factory fabricated equipment units shutoff valves faucets convenience and lawn watering hose connections and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing in connections of end use fixtures and units List tagged valves in a valve schedule Valve Tag Application Schedule Tag valves according to size shape and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs 1 Valve Tag Size and Shape 1 1 2 inches round 2 Valve Tag Color Natural 3 Letter Color Black END OF SECTION 23 05 53 February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 230593 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section 1 2 SUMMARY A Scope of Work Includes 1 Prior to construction to document existing conditions measure existing air and water systems a AC 1 AC 2 and R 1 in the mechanical penthouse OA RA and SA flow static pressures motor amp draw voltage motor speed fan speed
446. n Drain piping from cooling coils shall be not smaller than the drain pan outlets and shall not contain any 90 deg fittings For 90 deg changes in direction use Y and 45 deg fittings with cleanout plug 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 L Provide water seal trap with cleanout in each FCU drain line M For chilled and auxiliary cooling glycol water piping slope piping at uniform grade of 1 inch upward per 40 feet of run in direction of flow where space permits N For chilled and auxiliary cooling glycol water piping install eccentric reducers with the flat side on the top of horizontal piping O For condensate drain piping install eccentric reducers with the flat side on the bottom of horizontal piping P Install piping so that it does not leak 3 3 UNIONS A Install unions on threaded piping at valves and equipment Flanged devices do not require unions B Provide dielectric unions when joining two dissimilar metals 3 4 PIPING AT WATER COILS A Offset piping to minimize strain due to expansion and contraction Offset shall include at least two elbows in piping between main and coil B When coil is inside unit with externally mounted vibration isolation install piping with swing joints sized to allow for vibration G Piping shall not block the use of access doors panels filter valves or other equipment D Instal
447. n of surfaces and material installation instructions B Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919 D Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width to depth ratio neck dimension and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer except where specific dimensions are indicated February 7 2014 JOINT SEALERS 079005 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used Install sealant free of air pockets foreign embedded matter ridges and sags G Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges H Tool joints concave 3 4 CLEANING A Clean adjacent soiled surfaces 3 5 PROTECTION A Protect sealants until cured B Remove and replace damaged sealers END OF SECTION February 7 2014 JOINT SEALERS 079005 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES w C D Non fire rated steel frames Fire rated steel door frames Frames for sound rated doors Interior glazed light frames 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B C Section 087111 Door Hardware Hardware and weatherstripping Section 088000 Gla
448. n of industry standard inputs and outputs D Provide all processors power supplies and communication controllers so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input output termination module and wiring E Operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local point discrete on board hand off auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points F Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key accessed enclosure or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides G DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports H Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self diagnostics communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components The DDC Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication l Isolation shall be provided at all peer to peer network terminations as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards 587 1980 J In the event of the loss of normal power there shall be an ord
449. n of work Submit shop Drawings with record Drawings on hard copy Shop Drawings shall include equipment racks patch panels termination blocks connection details rack mounting details and any other details not included in the construction Drawings Any materials and equipment listed that are not in accordance with specification requirements may be rejected The approval of material equipment systems and shop Drawings is a general approval subject to the contract Drawings Specifications and verification of all measurements at the job Approval does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of shop drawing errors The Contractor shall carefully check and correct all shop Drawings prior to submission for approval Submittals for each section shall vary 1 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be the current model and new less than one 1 year from the date of manufacture unused and without blemish or defect Equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters Laboratories or certification by other recognized laboratory where subject to label service Manufacturers of equipment and materials pertinent to these items shall have been engaged in the manufacture of said equipment a minimum of three 3 years and if so directed by the Owner be able to furnish proof of their ability by submitting affidavits and descriptive data about their product including siz
450. n optional components G Manufacturer s Certificates Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience B Installer Qualifications Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Do not deliver equipment until spaces where it is to be installed are complete and cleaned B Store products in manufacturer s unopened packaging until ready for installation 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Maintain environmental conditions temperature humidity and ventilation within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer s absolute limits 1 8 WARRANTY A Manufacturer s limited lifetime warranty February 7 2014 MODULAR CASEWORK 125111 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Basis of Design Manufacturer Hamilton Sorter www hamiltonsorter com B Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 MATERIALS A Particleboard Industrial grade 40 to 50 pcf substrate B High Pressure Plastic Laminate NEMA LD 3 as manufactured by WilsonArt Pionite Nevamar or Formica C High Pressure Melamine Lam
451. n required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No 1168 B General Purpose Interior Sealant Acrylic emulsion latex ASTM C 834 Type OP Grade NS single component paintable 1 Color Colors as selected 2 Applications Use for a Interior wall and ceiling control joints b Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces c Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated C Bathtub Tile Sealant White silicone ASTM C920 Uses I M and A single component mildew resistant 1 Applications Use for a Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces b Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces D Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations Permanently tacky non hardening butyl sealant 1 Applications Use for concealed locations only a Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor February 7 2014 JOINT SEALERS 079005 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant ASTM C920 Grade NS Class 25 Uses NT I M A G O single component chemical curing non staining non bleeding capable of continuous water immersion non sagging type 1 Color Standard colors matching finished surfaces 2 Movement Capability Plus and minus 25 percent 3 Service Temperature Range 40 to 180 degrees F 4 Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35 Silic
452. n the drawings with matching welded miter corners end caps and internal splice connectors 1 Material Satin finish stainless steel 16 gage 0 065 inch J Blum 1452 a Diameter 2 1 2 inch 2 Material Clear anodized aluminum a Size 2 1 2 inches diameter 0 125 inch thickness J Blum 1132 Shoe J Blum 1142 Handrails Metal tubing handrail fastened to glass balusters at heights indicated with glass mount adaptor kit J Blum 224 1 Material Satin finish stainless steel 1 1 4 inches diameter 2 End Caps Match handrails 3 Brackets J Blum 275 4 Dimensions and Configurations As indicated on Drawings 2 4 FASTENERS A Fastener Materials Unless otherwise indicated provide the following 1 Aluminum Components Type 304 stainless steel fasteners 2 Stainless Steel Components Type 304 stainless steel fasteners 3 Dissimilar Metals Type 304 stainless steel fasteners Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction Select fasteners of type grade and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated Anchors General Anchors capable of sustaining without failure a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
453. nc f Stant g Tyler Pipe 2 Standards ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540 3 Description Stainless steel shield with stainless steel bands and tightening devices and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop 2 3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A Copper DWV Tube ASTM B 306 drainage tube drawn temper B Copper Drainage Fittings ASME B16 23 cast copper or ASME B16 29 wrought copper solder joint fittings C Copper Flanges ASME B16 24 Class 150 cast copper with solder joint end 1 Flange Gasket Materials ASME B16 21 full face flat nonmetallic asbestos free 1 8 inch 3 2 mm maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated 2 Flange Bolts and Nuts ASME B18 2 1 carbon steel unless otherwise indicated D Solder ASTM B 32 lead free with ASTM B 813 water flushable flux 2 4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A Transition Couplings February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 General Requirements Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD s or of different materials Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined 2 Fitting Type Transition Couplings Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting 3 Unshielded Nonpressure Transition Couplings a Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers
454. nd motor speed control The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings without derating the VFD The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics alpha numeric codes are not acceptable All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words The keypad shall include a minimum of 14 assistants including VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 k Start up assistant 2 Parameter assistants PID assistant Reference assistant I O assistant Serial communications assistant Option module assistant Panel display assistant g Low noise set up assistant 3 Maintenance assistant 4 Troubleshooting assistant 5 Drive optimizer assistants woan E All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering user units A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times The display shall be in complete English words alpha numeric codes are not acceptable Output Frequency Motor Speed RPM or Engineering units Motor Current Motor Torque Motor Power kW DC Bus Voltage Output Voltage F Serial Communicat
455. nd the face velocity of filters and coils 2 Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer 3 13 TOLERANCES A Set HVAC system s air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances 1 Supply Return and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans Plus or minus 10 percent 2 Air Outlets and Inlets Plus or minus 10 percent 3 Heating Water Flow Rate Plus or minus 10 percent 4 Cooling Water Flow Rate Plus or minus 10 percent 3 14 FINAL REPORT A General Prepare a certified written report tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems 1 Include a certification sheet at the front of the report s binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer 2 Include a list of instruments used for procedures along with proof of calibration B Final Report Contents In addition to certified field report data include the following 1 Pump curves 2 Fan curves 3 Manufacturers test data 4 Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers 5 Other information relative to equipment performance do not include Shop Drawings and product data C General Report Data In addition to form titles and entries include the following data 1 Title page 2 Name and address of the TAB contractor 3 Projec
456. nd to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation 3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application 4 Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated FINISHES Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation After adhesive has fully cured apply two coats of insulation manufacturer s recommended protective coating Color White Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE GENERAL Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range If more than one material is listed for a piping system selection from materials listed is Contractor s option Items Not Insulated Unless otherwise indicated do not install insulation on the following 1 Drainage piping located in crawl spaces 2 Underground piping 3 Chrome plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Condensate drain Insulation shall be one of the following 1 Flexible Elastomeric 1 2 inch thick Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas Piping Flexible elastomeric 1 inch thick February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13
457. ndards Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealers Weather stripping and Seals Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated 3 2 ADJUSTING CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING A Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made 1 Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors Adjust door control devices to function properly with final operation of heating and ventilating equipment B Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation Door Hardware Supplier s Field Service 1 Inspect door hardware items for correct installation and adjustment after complete installation of door hardware 2 Instruct Owner s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes 3 File written report of this inspection to Architect
458. ndary Water Systems SOO Calculated average dewpoint temperature is referenced to limit secondary chilled water temperature Operation of secondary water temperature below space dewpoint may result in condensation at induction units and water on floor C Calculate floor average and compare to each sensor on floor Compare calculated dewpoint for each floor and alarm if any combination sensor exceeds floor average by two 2 degrees F D Calculate building average and compare to each floor average Compare the average calculated dewpoint for all floors and alarm if any floor average exceeds building average of by two 2 degrees F E Provide graphic showing all monitored and calculated values Provide table showing all on each floor Provide table with all units grouped vertically by orientation South West North NE and SE with AC 1 and AC 3 zone supply air temperature 3 8 ROOM TYPE TEMPERATURE SENSORS LOCATIONS A Unless noted otherwise locate new sensors for handicapped accessibility in accordance with ADA requirements If near light switch position sensor six inches next to light switches and align centerline of sensor with centerline of light switch Where handicapped access is required locate 48 inches above floor B Do not locate sensor over heat generating controls such audio video or lighting dimmers For these locations locate sensor six to eight inches to left or right of dimmer C Do not locate sensor over induction units fin tu
459. ned codes and regulations or the Contract Documents require different materials methods of construction or other requirements the most restrictive shall govern In any conflict between a general provision and a special provision the special provision shall govern In case of differences between the drawings and the specifications or where the drawings and specifications are not clear the higher cost alternative shall be included in the contract and the subject shall be referred to the Architect for clarification and instructions February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 8 A 1 9 1 10 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Packing and Shipping All materials shall be packed to prevent damage during shipping Packing shall include plastic rap and crating Coordinate shipping of items to the jobsite to prevent exposure to weather Equipment will not be permitted to be stored outside Acceptance at Site Receive delivery of electrical equipment and protect from the weather at all times during storage and construction Storage and Protection Provide offsite storage of equipment if building is not totally enclosed and ready to accept equipment Manufacturer s recommendations with regard to storage and protection shall be followed Should any apparatus be subjected to possible damage by water it shall be replaced with new apparatus or at th
460. ness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours 3 4 ADJUSTING A Hanger Adjustments Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe B Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1 1 2 inches January 31 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 PAINTING A Touchup Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports Use same materials as used for shop painting Comply with SSPC PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces 1 Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 0 mils 0 05 mm B Touchup Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections C Galvanized Surfaces Clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780 3 6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment B Comply with MSS SP 69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections C Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for elec
461. ng Seals and Springs 2 Stainless Steel ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240 A 240M Type 304 0 015 inch thick 1 2 inch wide with closed seal 3 Springs Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands Spring size determined by manufacturer for application 2 9 CORNER ANGLES A Stainless Steel Corner Angles 0 024 inch thick minimum 1 by 1 inch 25 by 25 mm stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240 A 240M Type 304 February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application 1 Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects 2 Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 PREPARATION A Surface Preparation Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application 3 3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A Install insulation materials accessories and finishes with smooth straight and even surfaces free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings B Install insulation materials vapor barriers or retarders jackets and
462. ng Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only 2 Division 23 Section Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment for valve tags and schedules 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of valve or specialty indicated 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Source Limitations for Valves Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer B ASME Compliance 1 ASME B31 9 for building services piping valves 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Prepare valves for shipping as follows February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B 1 Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion 2 Protect threads flange faces grooves and weld ends 3 Set angle gate and globe valves closed to prevent rattling 4 Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces Use the following precautions during storage 1 Maintain valve end protection 2 Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature If outdoor storage is necessary store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 2 2 G A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures
463. ng members as indicated 1 Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1 1200 2 Laterally brace entire suspension system 3 Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift Studs Space studs as permitted by standard 1 Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations 2 Partitions Terminating at Ceiling Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 Partitions Terminating at Structure Attach top runner to structure maintain clearance between top of studs and structure and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer s instructions verify free movement of top of stud connections do not leave studs unattached to track Openings Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels using not less than double studs at jambs Standard Wall Furring Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center 1 Orientation Horizontal 2 Spacing As indicated Acoustic Furring Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center Locate joints over framing members Furring for Fire Ratings Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA 600 requirements Blocking Install blocking fo
464. ngitudinal centerline of duct Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints and 16 inches o c b On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches place pins 16 inches o c each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing C Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal rectangular ducts and plenums d Do not overcompress insulation during installation e Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1 2 inch 13 mm outward clinching staples 1 inch 25 mm o c Install vapor barrier consisting of factory or field applied jacket adhesive vapor barrier mastic and sealant at joints seams and protrusions a Repair punctures tears and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor barrier seal b Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F 10 deg C at 18 foot 5 5 m intervals Vapor stops shall consist of v
465. ngle manufacturer D Provide WI Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified E Provide WI Certified Compliance Certificate for installation Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Package deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard B Accept doors on site in manufacturer s packaging Inspect for damage C Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week Break seal on site to permit ventilation 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Coordinate the work with door opening construction door frame and door hardware installation B Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight wet work is complete and dry and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period 1 8 WARRANTY A Interior Doors Provide manufacturer s warranty for the life of the installation B Include coverage for delamination of veneer warping beyond specified installation tolerances defective materials and telegraphing core construction PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Wood Veneer Faced Doo
466. nished slab F Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits for which fewer bends are allowed Support within 12 inches 300 mm of changes in direction G Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls ceilings and floors unless otherwise indicated Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines H Support conduit within 12 inches 300 mm of enclosures to which attached l Stub ups to Above Recessed Ceilings 1 Use a conduit bushing to terminate stub ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure J Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No 4 AWG K Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets Install bushings on conduits up to 1 1 4 inch 85mm trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1 1 2 inch 41 mm trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts L Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts Install locknuts hand tight plus 1 4 turn more M Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path N Cut conduit perpendicular to the length For conduits 2 inch 53 mm trade size and larger use
467. notify Owner before starting the motor s 5 Test each motor for proper phase rotation 6 Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Certify compliance with test parameters 7 Correct malfunctioning units on site where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance otherwise replace with new units and retest 8 NETA ATS allows three methods to test and inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance the infrared thermographic method is the most thorough and costly Retain first subparagraph below if this method is preferred 9 Test and adjust controls remote monitoring and safeties Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment D Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections E Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results Include notation of deficiencies detected remedial action taken and observations after remedial action February 7 2014 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232913 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 6 ADJUSTING A Set field adjustable switches and overload relay pickup and trip ranges B Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements Initially
468. nsible for transformers power from control panel or junction box to actuators and other control components not shown on electrical Electrical power requirements for controls that are not shown on Electrical drawings or Division 26 specifications are responsibility of BAS sub Power for controls shall meet Division 26 requirements Power for controls shall be on separate circuits Circuits shall not be shared with non control loads Prior to bid communicate all power requirements to electrical bidders Communicate load and location of power required for BAS and controls to eliminate any gaps or overlap in scope of work between subs Prior to bid communicate all power requirements to fire alarm system bidders Prior to bid coordinate line of demarcation to eliminate any gaps or overlap between fire alarm system bidders and BAS section DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONTROLS The intent is to remove all existing un used and inoperative controls Includes panels power wiring low voltage wiring and pneumatic piping and components February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 17 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Un used and in operative air compressors driers and tanks shall be removed GSU facilities may want to take possession of air compressors and driers GSU has first right of refusal Coordinate with GSU END OF SECTION 23 09 23 February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION
469. nstallable connector shall be SC format for installation onto either multimode 50 125 micron fiber 2 The optical fiber field installable connector shall be compatible with 900 micron buffered fibers or 250 micron loose tube fibers 3 The optical fiber field installable connector shall have a maximum Loss of 5 dB 4 The optical fiber field installable connector shall have a typical Reflectance of 30 dB B Singlemode Fiber Connectivity 1 The optical fiber field installable connector shall be SC format for installation onto singlemode 8 3 125 micron fiber 2 The optical fiber field installable connector shall be compatible with 900 micron buffered fibers or 250 micron loose tube fibers 3 The preferred method of terminating loose tube singlemode fiber is pigtail splicing into a rack mounted optical fiber panel or wall mounted enclosure Pigtails shall be factory terminated and 3 meters in length A fiber enclosure with slack storage trays must be used when pigtail splicing method is used 4 The splice loss through each connector pair shall not exceed 0 50 dB 5 All singlemode connectors pigtails and field terminated shall be SC February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 271323 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A GENERAL GUIDELINES Provide optical fiber cable from each telecommunications room TR to the main telecommuni
470. nstant Start or Programmed Start Designed for type and quantity of lamps served Operate from 50 60 Hz 120V or 277V source with sustained variations of 10 Provide lamp end of life EOL protection circuit Sound Rating Class A Input current Total Harmonic Distortion Rating Less than 10 percent Transient Voltage Protection IEEE C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Category A or better Operating Frequency 42 kHz or higher Lamp Current Crest Factor 1 7 or less 10 BF 0 85 or higher 11 Power Factor 0 98 or higher 12 Parallel Lamp Circuits Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82 11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail CONOARWN Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed start ballasts Electronic Programmed Start Ballasts for T8 T5 and TSHO Lamps Comply with ANSI C82 11 and the following 1 Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps 2 Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement February 7 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 A BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS Description Electronic programmed rapid start type complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82 11 designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi le
471. nstruction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work C Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops 3 9 PIPING SCHEDULE A Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated B Aboveground soil and waste piping NPS 4 DN 100 and smaller shall be any of the following 1 2 3 4 Service class cast iron soil pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI or heavy duty hubless piping couplings and coupled joints Copper DWV tube copper drainage fittings and soldered joints Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings Unshielded nonpressure transition couplings C Aboveground vent piping NPS 4 DN 100 and smaller shall be any of the following Service class cast iron soil pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI or heavy duty hubless piping couplings and coupled joints Copper DWV tube copper drainage fittings and soldered joints Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings Unshielded nonpressure transition couplings END OF SECTION 221316 February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 223300 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes 1
472. nt flat Class 1 clear Quality Q3 glazing select 2 Comply with ASTM C 1048 B Silicone Sealant ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Uses NT A G O single component neutral curing non sagging non staining fungus resistant non bleeding 1 IRN Manufacturers a Dow Corning Corporation Product 999 A Silicone Building amp Glazing Sealant www dowcorning com b Tremco Sealants Product Spectrum 2 www tremcosealants com c Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements Color Color as selected Movement Capability Plus and minus 25 percent Service Temperature Range 65 to 180 degrees F Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 35 2 5 GLAZING GASKETS A Dense Compression Gaskets Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal made from one of the following 1 2 3 4 Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864 EPDM complying with ASTM C 864 Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115 Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115 B Soft Compression Gaskets Extruded or molded closed cell integral skinned neoprene or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509 Type Il black of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal 1 Application Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State
473. nterface wiring diagrams 5 Panel layouts 6 System riser diagrams D Auto CAD compatible as built drawings E PDF of actual Graphics F Submittal for Cx Review Controls programming or block logic shall be submitted for review to verify that the programming conforms to the design intent by the Cx Agent Submit for Cx Agent review once before implementation once as a virtual simulation and once again after implementation to verify proper performance With each submittal include actual graphic Sample template or example graphics are not acceptable G Upon project completion submit operation and maintenance manuals consisting of the following 1 Index sheet listing contents in alphabetical order 2 Manufacturer s equipment parts list of all functional components of the system Auto CAD disk of system schematics including wiring diagrams 3 Description of sequence of operations 4 As Built interconnection wiring diagrams 5 Operator s Manual 6 Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations and all trunk data 7 List of connected data points including panels to which they are connected and input device ionization detector thermostat etc 8 Conduit routing diagrams 1 5 WARRANTY A BAS Section shall provide all services materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire BAS system for a period of one year after final completion B The adjustment required testing and repair
474. ntial barricades if necessary G Remove exposed piping valves meters equipment supports and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities H Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected in same manner as other utilities to remain 3 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only 1 Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown 2 Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation 3 Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition B Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied 1 Provide erect and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction indicated on drawings 2 Provide sound retardant partitions of construction indicated on drawings in locations indicated on drawings C Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications take care to prevent water and humidity damage D Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work 1 Remove rotted wood corroded metals and deteriorated masonry and concrete r
475. ntifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading 3 Motors 1 20 HP and Smaller Shaded pole type 4 Thermal Protection Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation Thermal protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range C Electronically Commutated Motors 1 2 Motors shall be General Electric ECM variable speed brushless DC motors specifically designed for use with a single phase 277 volt 60 Hertz electrical input Motor shall be complete with and operated by a single phase integrated controller inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electrically commutate the stator All motors shall be designed for synchronous rotation Motor rotor shall be permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses Motor shall have built in soft start and slewed speed change ramps Motor shall be able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation Motor shall be permanently lubricated with ball bearings Motor shall be direct coupled to the blower Motor shall maintain a minimum of 65 efficiency over its entire operating range PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 230513 February 7 2014 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 0
476. ntifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A Color Coding Conductor Tape Colored self adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils 0 08 mm thick by 1 to 2 inches 25 to 50 mm wide 2 2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A Engraved Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label Punched or drilled for screw mounting White letters on a dark gray background Minimum letter height shall be 3 8 inch 10 mm February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 CABLE TIES A Plenum Rated Cable Ties Self extinguishing UV stabilized one piece self locking 1 Minimum Width 3 16 inch 5 mm 2 Tensile Strength at 73 deg F 23 deg C According to ASTM D 638 7000 psi 48 2 MPa 3 UL 94 Flame Rating 94V 0 4 Temperature Range Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F Minus 46 to plus 140 deg 5 Color Black PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A Verify identity of each item before installing identification products B Power Circuit Conductor Identification 600 V or Less For conductors in pull and junction boxes use color coding conductor tape to identify the phase il Color Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification 600 V or Less Use colors listed below for feeder and branch circuit conductors a Colors for 208 120 V Circuits 1 Phase A Bl
477. ntractor shall insure that the manufacturer provides the Owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group with the appropriate warranty certification within 30 calendar days of the final project completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A All products shall be provided as specified without exception unless approved in writing by Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group prior to the bid B Non compliant products installed as a part of this Contract shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the Contractor s C All products shall be NEW 2 2 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved 48 Port Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair Patch Panel 1 Manufacturer Ortronics a Part Number OR PHD66U48 B Approved 12 Port Optical Fiber Enclosure Rack Mounted 1 Manufacturer Corning a Part Number CCH 01U b Multi Mode Fiber Insert Panel 6 Port SC Connector Part Number CCH CP06 E7 c Single Mode Fiber Insert Panel 6 Port SC Connector Part Number CCH CP06 59 C Approved 72 Port Optical Fiber Enclosure Rack Mounted 1 Manufacturer Corning a Part Number CCH 04U b Multi Mode Fiber Insert Panel 6 Port SC Connector Part Number CCH CP06 E7 c Single Mode Fiber Insert Panel 6 Port SC Connector Part Number CCH CP06 59 D Approved 144 Port Optical Fiber Enclosure Rack Mounted 1 Manufacturer ADC Tyco Elect
478. o longer than 4 feet i e the furniture feed must not be located more than 4 feet from the system furniture cable entrance 5 The whip must be permanently attached to the wall cover plate and no gap between the cover plate and the whip shall be visible from the outside Similarly the whip should go into the system furniture raceway without any visible gaps between the whip and the furniture and it shall be permanently attached to the raceway 6 No more than 10 Category 6 cables shall be routed via a system furniture feed Use additional system furniture feeds for additional cable capacity 7 If the contractor installing the furniture feed system will not install the data voice cabling at the same time pull strings must be provided from the conduit in the ceiling in the backbox whip and to the system furniture outlet openings as to allow easy installation of the cabling by the installers If the Drawings do not indicate any data voice outlets to be installed in the furniture the contractor shall prepare at least two outlets in the furniture for future use i e route the pull strings and leave two knockouts in the raceway free for use Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 8 Contractor shall ensure that the cabling path from the ceiling to the conduits backbox whip and furniture at all times maintains a 1 bend radius in accor
479. o match leaves 5 Size Size hinges in accordance with specified manufacturer s published recommendations 6 Quantity Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to 5 0 high Furnish one hinge for each additional 2 1 2 feet or fraction thereof B Continuous Hinges 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a b Cc Markar Select Products Zero 2 Characteristics a Continuous gear hinges to be manufactured of extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy with anodized finish or factory painted finish as scheduled b All hinges are to be manufactured to template Uncut hinges shall be non handed and shall be a pinless assembly of three interlocking extrusions applied to the full height of the door and frame without mortising c Vertical door loads shall be carried on chemically lubricated polyacetal thrust bearings The door and frame leaves shall be continually geared together for the entire hinge length and secured with a full cover channel Hinge to operate to a full 1800 d Hinges to be milled anodized and assembled in matching pairs Fasteners supplied shall be 410 stainless steel plated and hardened e Provide UL listed continuous hinges at fire doors Continuous hinges at fire doors suffix FR shall meet the required ratings without the use of auxiliary fused pins or studs f Provide continuous hinges at restroom doors C Pivot Sets 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Dor O Matic b Glynn Johnson c LCN Division of Ingersoll
480. o remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification 3 05 CLEANING February 7 2014 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270510 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 A Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces B Leave finished work in a neat and clean condition with no evidence of spill overs or damage to adjacent surfaces 3 06 IDENTIFICATION A Refer to section 27 05 53 for labeling details END OF SECTION February 7 2014 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270510 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 1 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section This specification describes the products and execution requirements relating to Pathways for Communications Systems SUBMITTALS Provide product data WORK INCLUDED T
481. oducts having factory applied primers are not considered factory finished 2 Items indicated to receive other finishes 3 Items indicated to remain unfinished 4 Fire rating labels equipment serial number and capacity labels and operating parts of equipment 5 Non metallic roofing and flashing 6 Stainless steel anodized aluminum bronze terne and lead items 7 Marble granite slate and other natural stones 8 Floors unless specifically so indicated 9 Ceramic and other tiles 10 Brick architectural concrete cast stone integrally colored plaster and stucco 11 Glass 12 Acoustical materials unless specifically so indicated 13 Concealed pipes ducts and conduits 1 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A 40 CFR 59 Subpart D National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings U S Environmental Protection Agency current edition B ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint Related Coatings Materials and Applications 2011 C ASTM D4442 Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood Base Materials 2007 D GreenSeal GS 11 Paints 1993 February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E SSPC PM1 Good Painting Practice SSPC Painting Manual Vol 1 Society for Protective Coatings Fourth Edition 1 3 DEFINITIONS A Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpre
482. of adjacent structures 3 Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations stop work and notify Architect and Owner hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials lead PCB s and mercury Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials 1 Dismantle existing construction and separate materials 2 Set aside reusable recyclable and salvageable materials store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse 3 2 EXISTING UTILITIES A Coordinate work with utility companies notify before starting work and comply with their requirements obtain required permits B Protect existing utilities to remain from damage Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction February 7 2014 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024100 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 D Do not close shut off or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner E Do not close shut off or disrupt existing utility branches or take offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner F Locate and mark utilities to remain mark using highly visible tags or flags with identification of utility type protect from damage due to subsequent construction using substa
483. of air outlets b Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals oA Measure room temperature at each thermostat temperature sensor Compare the reading to the set point d Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position e Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report B Final Inspection 1 After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report request that a final inspection be made by Commissioning Authority 2 The TAB contractor s test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Commissioning Authority 3 Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8 hour business day 4 If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed the measurements shall be noted as FAILED February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 13 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 5 If the number of FAILED measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection the testing and
484. of any outlet a maximum of 10 before it is permanently installed Orientation of outlet boxes horizontal or vertical shall be as indicated on the architectural elevations Install all outlet boxes in finished areas flush with the wall Maintain 1 4 or less space between outlet box front and finished wall surface Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and shall not depend on the coverplate to hold it secure to the wall Outlet boxes installed back to back in fire rated walls shall be separated horizontally by a minimum of 24 PULL BOXES Pull boxes shall be secured independent of the conduit entries into the box Pull boxes shall be secured to the building structure In ceiling applications pull boxes shall not be supported with ceiling wires Conduits entering pull boxes shall connect to pull boxes using die cast zinc connectors Pull boxes shall be free from burrs dirt and debris Pull boxes shall be installed in accordance with ANSI TIA EIA 569 A Pull boxes shall be grounded in accordance with J STD 607 A CABLE TRAY SYSTEM Install trays in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that the cable tray equipment complies with requirements of the NEC All open trays shall be installed a minimum of six 6 inches away from any light fixture Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints sleeves crossover and other locations where tray continuity is interrupted Support all pathways from building construction
485. of equal capacity and quality 3 2 PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS A Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems B Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion pump sizing and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings C Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas D Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise E Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal F Install piping to permit valve servicing G Install piping at indicated slopes H Install piping free of sags and bends l Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections J Install piping to allow application of insulation K Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure L Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls ceilings and floors M Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls gypsum board part
486. of owner CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING Startup Testing This testing shall be completed before the Owner s Representative is notified of the system demonstration 1 Calibrate and prepare for service of all instruments controls and accessory equipment furnished under this specification February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 15 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults Verify that terminations are tight Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually Perform calibration procedures per manufacturers recommendations Verify that all binary output devices relays solenoid valves two position actuators and control valves magnetic starters etc operate properly and that the normal positions are correct Verify that all analog output devices actuators etc are functional that start and span are correct and that direction and normal positions are correct Check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel Verify that the system operation adheres to the Sequences of Operation Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules Tune all DDC loops and optim
487. oints as specified in the point I O summary Application Specific Controllers ASC 1 Each DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote application specific controllers ASCs through LAN Device Networks Each ASC shall operate as a stand alone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network Each ASC shall be a microprocessor based multi tasking and real time digital control processor Provide the following types of ASCs as a minimum a Terminal Equipment Controllers b Provide for control of each piece of equipment including but not limited to the following Variable Air Volume VAV boxes WSHP IU Induction Units oA Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control 3 15 PSI pneumatic allowing for interface to a variety of modulating actuators Terminal controllers utilizing proprietary control signals and actuators shall not be acceptable As an alternative provide DDC Controllers or other ASCs with industry standard outputs for control of all terminal equipment including pneumatic actuation Connection of a POT to a DDC or ASC Controller shall not interrupt nor interfere with normal network operation in any way prevent alarms from being transmitted or preclude cen
488. ok Method F102 withgrout Over interior concrete substrates install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113 latex portland cement bond coat with grout unless otherwise indicated 1 Use crack isolation membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated 2 Where waterproofing membrane is indicated install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F122 with latex portland cement grout Metal Edge Strips Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet wood or other flooring that finishes with flush with top of tile Grout Sealer Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout sealer manufacturer s written instructions 3 5 CLEANING A C D On completion of placement and grouting clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter 1 Remove latex portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible 2 Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer s written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning When recommended by tile manufacturer apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to comple
489. ollowing a Cooper AH1221L b Hubbell HBL1221L February 7 2014 WIRING DEVICES 262726 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 7 2 8 C Leviton 1221 2L d Pass amp Seymour PS20AC1 L 2 Description Single pole with factory supplied key in lieu of switch handle DECORATOR STYLE DEVICES Convenience Receptacles Square face 125 V 15 A comply with NEMA WD 1 NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5 15R and UL 498 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following Cooper 6252 Hubbell DR15 Leviton 16252 Pass amp Seymour 26252 apg GFCI Convenience Receptacles Square face 125 V 15 A comply with NEMA WD 1 NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5 15R UL 498 and UL 943 Class A 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Cooper VGF15 b Hubbell GF15LA Cc Leviton 8599 d Pass amp Seymour 1594 Toggle Switches Square Face 120 277 V 15 A Comply with NEMA WD 1 UL 20 and FS W S 896 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Cooper 7621 single pole 7623 three way b Hubbell DS115 single pole DS315 three way Cc Leviton 5621 2 single pole 5623 2 three way d Pass amp Seymour 2621 single pole 2623 three way WALL PLATES Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices Plate Securing Scr
490. olor and Pattern To be selected from manufacturer s full line Basis of Design Manufacturers 1 Abet Laminati www abellaminati com 2 Lamin Art www laminart com g Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Formica CorporationNone N A www formica com February 7 2014 COUNTERTOPS 123600 2 7 O2a0 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Panolam Industries International Inc Nevamar www nevamar com 3 Wilsonart International Inc www wilsonart com h Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 Exposed Edge Treatment Square substrate built up to minimum 1 1 4 inch thick covered with matching laminate 3 Back and End Splashes Same material same construction 4 Fabricate in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Premium Grade B Solid Surfacing Countertops Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate 1 Basis of Design Product The design of Solid Surfacing Countertops as manufactured by Corian a Flat Sheet Thickness 1 2 inch minimum b Sheet Size Maximum 4 x 8 or 4 x 10 c Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings Complying with ISSFA 2 and NEMA LD 3 polyester resin mineral filler and pigments homogenous non porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools no surface coating color and pattern consistent throughout thickness 1 Surface Burning Characteri
491. om Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig Pump rpm Impeller diameter in inches Motor make and frame size Motor horsepower and rpm Voltage at each connection Amperage for each phase Full load amperage and service factor Seal type Test Data Indicated and Actual Values February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 12 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Static head in feet of head or psig Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig Actual impeller size in inches Full open flow rate in gpm Full open pressure in feet of head or psig Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig Final total pressure in feet of head or psig Final water flow rate in gpm Voltage at each connection Amperage for each phase a E E L Instrument Calibration Reports 1 Report Data Instrument type and make Serial number Application Dates of use Dates of calibration Papp 3 15 INSPECTIONS A Initial Inspection 1 After testing and balancing are complete operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report 2 Check the following for each system a Measure airflow of at least 10 percent
492. ompany shall provide a water management and service program to include the following initial water analysis and recommendations system start up assistance training of operating personnel periodic field service and consultation any necessary log sheets and record forms and any required laboratory and technical assistance all performed by a qualified full time local representative customer report charts and log sheets plus laboratory and technical assistance at no additional charge The initial supply of chemicals water February 7 2014 WATER TREATMENT 232500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 management and service shall be for the period from initial system cleanout to date of substantial completion when the systems are being operated by the Contractor A 90 day supply of chemicals water management and service shall be provided to the Owner for a period of 90 days from the date of substantial completion beneficial occupancy at no additional charge The water management program after the date of substantial completion shall include one service visit at 30 to 40 days after that date Microbiological test of cooling water reported by a State approved laboratory shall be made within three weeks of the date of substantial completion SYSTEM CLEANOUT AND PREPARATION Flush system with water to remove all the loose debris which could later be circulated and deposited in locations
493. on b Locate duct static as shown on drawings or if not shown locate 2 3 distance c Modulate fan speed to maintain duct static pressure in fan discharge d Provide cascading control logic to reset fan discharge setpoint based on floor level duct static pressure e Monitor operation during warranty period and adjust logic to minimize fan energy b For AC 4 duct static pressure will be sensed on each floor and at fan discharge a For floors with Terminal Units installed Initially 6 thru 11 modulate smoke damper or combination fire smoke damper on each floor to maintain duct static pressure of 0 5 inches with auto setpoint adjustment based on dampers position b Locate duct static as shown on drawings or if not shown locate 2 3 distance c Modulate fan speed to maintain duct static pressure in fan discharge d Provide cascading control logic to reset fan discharge setpoint based on floor level duct static pressure e Monitor operation during warranty period and adjust logic to minimize fan energy Cc For R 1 duct static pressure will be sensed at inlet to fan on 27th floor discharge of fan and on each floor a Modulate smoke damper or combination fire smoke damper on each floor to maintain return plenum static pressure of 0 03 inches b Locate duct static as shown on drawings or if not shown locate in plenum near core at location approved by engineer c Modulate fan speed to maintain duct static pressure in
494. on Warp 1 8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string corner to corner over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area C Maximum Vertical Distortion Bow 1 8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string top to bottom over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area D Maximum Width Distortion Cup 1 8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string edge to edge over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area February 7 2014 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 ADJUSTING A Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement B Adjust closers for full closure C Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements END OF SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS February 7 2014 081433 4 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University SECTION 087111 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A rommoogm oyovore FA amp Hinges Continuous Hinges Pivots Key control system Lock cylinders and keys Lock and latch sets Bolts Exit devices Push Pull units Closers Overhead holders Miscellaneous door control devices Door trim units Protection plates Weather stripping for exterior doors Sound stripping for interior doors Automatic drop seals door bottoms Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors Thresholds 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B C D Section 081213
495. on 26 Section Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed B Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim faucets fittings and other specified components C Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage Replace damaged fixtures and components D Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components then retest Repeat procedure until units operate properly E Install fresh batteries in sensor operated mechanisms 3 5 ADJUSTING A Operate and adjust faucets and controls Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures fittings and controls February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Operate and adjust hot water dispensers Replace damaged and malfunctioning units C Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream D Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops E Install fresh batteries in sensor operated mechanisms 3 6 CLEANING A Clean fixtures faucets and other fittings with manufacturers recommended cleaning methods and materials Do the following 1 Remove faucet spouts and strainers remove sediment and debris and reinstall strainers and spouts 2 Remove sediment
496. on and seismic control devices to indicate capacity range PoON gt PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance B Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast in place anchors to verify actual locations before installation C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected February 7 2014 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 2 APPLICATIONS A Strength of Support and Seismic Restraint Assemblies Where not indicated select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits 3 3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A Piping Restraints 1 Comply with requirements in MSS SP 127 2 Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o c and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o c 3 Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet B Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure C Attachment to Structure If specific attachment is not indicated anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams at upper truss chords of bar joists or at concr
497. oncrete inserts before concrete is placed fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts l Load Distribution Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment J Pipe Slopes Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31 9 for building services piping 3 2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor B Grouting Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth G Provide lateral bracing to prevent swaying for equipment supports 3 3 METAL FABRICATIONS A Cut drill and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports B Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations C Field Welding Comply with AWS D1 1 D1 1M procedures for shielded metal arc welding appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work and with the following 1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals 2 Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap 3 Remove welding flux immediately 4 Finish welds at exposed connections so no rough
498. one Sealant ASTM C920 Grade NS Class 25 Uses NT A G M O single component solvent curing non sagging non staining fungus resistant non bleeding 1 Color Standard colors matching finished surfaces 2 Movement Capability Plus and minus 25 percent 3 Service Temperature Range 65 to 180 degrees F 4 Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 35 2 3 ACCESSORIES A B Primer Non staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application Joint Cleaner Non corrosive and non staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer compatible with joint forming materials Joint Backing Round foam rod compatible with sealant ASTM D 1667 closed cell PVC oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width Bond Breaker Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant 3 2 PREPARATION 90D Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and ASTM C1193 Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement 3 3 INSTALLATION A Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer s requirements for preparatio
499. ontractor shall insure that the manufacturer provides the Owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technology Group with the appropriate warranty certification within 30 calendar days of the final project completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STATION CABLING 1 Approved Copper Station Cable Manufacturer s Berk Tek Belden CommScope Mohawk Superior Esse OUP ON St 2 2 ACCEPTABLE STATION CABLING TYPES 1 Category 6 unshielded twisted pair 1 100 ohm Category 6 23AWG 4 pair unshielded twisted pair CMP rated color blue 2 The horizontal balanced twisted pair cable shall meet or exceed the Category 6 transmission characteristics per ANSI TIA 568 C 2 3 0 EXECUTION A Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations and best industry practices B Aplastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg 200 Ib shall be co installed with all cable installed in any conduit C Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSI TIA EIA 569 A maximum fill for the particular raceway type D Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination no splices E The cable s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded Refer to manufacturer s requirements F If aJ hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch 1 2 to 1 5 meter intervals At no point
500. operating mode to be tested e g normal shutdown normal auto position normal manual position unoccupied cycle emergency power and alarm conditions Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists Check safety cutouts alarms and interlocks with smoke control and life safety systems during each mode of operation Testing Instrumentation Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work provide copies of reports sample forms checklists and certificates to the CxA Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work Provide technicians instrumentation and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC amp R systems at the direction of the CxA 1 The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification Notice will not include data points to be verified 2 The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments by model and serial number that were used when original data were collected 3 Failure of an item includes other than sound a deviation of more than 10 percent Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing adjusting and balancing report For sound
501. or custom enclosures and cabinets Include plans elevations sections and attachment details February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 METAL CONDUITS TUBING AND FITTINGS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 AFC Cable Systems Inc 2 Allied Tube amp Conduit a Tyco International Ltd Co 3 Anamet Electrical Inc 4 Electri Flex Company 5 O Z Gedney a brand of EGS Electrical Group 6 Picoma Industries a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc 7 Republic Conduit 8 Robroy Industries 9 Southwire Company 10 Thomas amp Betts Corporation 11 Western Tube and Conduit Corporation 12 Wheatland Tube Company a division of John Maneely Company B Listing and Labeling Metal conduits tubing and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application C GRC Comply with ANSI C80 1 and UL 6 D IMC Comply with ANSI C80 6 and UL 1242 E EMT Comply with ANSI C80 3 and UL 797 F FMC Comply with UL 1 zinc coated steel G LFMC Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360 H Fittings for Metal Conduit Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B
502. or field paint finish G Finish of Cabinet Interior White enamel 2 4 ACCESSORIES A Graphic Identification Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style size spacing and location Locate as indicated by Architect 1 Identify bracket mounted fire extinguishers with the words FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter decals applied to mounting surface PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify existing conditions before starting work B Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located February 7 2014 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging 1 Remove and replace damaged defective or undercharged fire extinguishers D Proceed with installation only after satisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions B Install fire extinguisher and cabinets plumb and level 54 inches from finished floor to top of fire extinguisher C Secure rigidly in place D Place extinguishers in cabinets END OF SECTION February 7 2014 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 123600 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Countertops for architectural cabinetwork 1 2 RELATED R
503. or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b 2 Piping e f During installation notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction 1 Roughing in Inspection Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures 2 Final Inspection Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in Piping Tests Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements Reinspection If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections make required corrections and arrange for reinspection Reports Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction Tests Fill domestic water piping Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired If testing is performed in segments submit a separate report for each test complete with diagram of portion of piping tested Leave new altered extended or replaced domestic water piping unco
504. or vertical applications 5 Frames a 16 gauge galvanized steel b Mitered and welded corners c flangeless frames for installing in ducts 6 Blades a Multiple or single blade b Parallel or opposed blade design Cc Stiffen damper blades for stability d Galvanized roll formed steel 0 064 inch 1 62 mm thick 7 Blade Axles Galvanized steel 8 Bearings a Molded synthetic b Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 inch wg 750 Pa or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft 9 Blade Seals Vinyl 10 Accessories a Include locking device to hold single blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration 2 4 CONTROL DAMPERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 American Warming and Ventilating a division of Mestek Inc 2 Arrow United Industries a division of Mestek Inc 3 Cesco Products a division of Mestek Inc 4 Greenheck Fan Corporation 5 Lloyd Industries Inc 6 McGill AirFlow LLC 7 Metal Form Manufacturing Inc 8 Nailor Industries Inc 9 NCA Manufacturing Inc 10 Pottorff 11 Ruskin Company 12 Vent Products Company Inc 13 Young Regulator Company B Low leakage rating with linkage outside airstream and bearing AMCA s Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage C Frames at 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel February 7 2014 AIR D
505. orage and handling 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Basis of Design Manufacturer 1 Julius Blum amp Co Inc ww juliusblum com B Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 MATERIALS A Stainless Steel Tubing ASTM A554 Type 304 B Stainless Steel Bars Shapes and Moldings ASTM A276 Type 304 C Aluminum Tubing ASTM B221 B221M extruded tubes Alloy 6063 T52 D Aluminum Reinforcing ASTM B221 B221M extruded shapes Alloy 6061 T6 E Aluminum Bars Shapes and Moldings ASTM B221 B221M extruded shapes Alloy 6063 T52 F Glass Tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048 February 7 2014 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM 057210 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM A Glass Tempered float glass Kind FT fully tempered Condition A uncoated Type 1 transparent flat glass Quality Q3 Thickness as required for installation design loads Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials 1 Glass Color Clear 2 Thickness As indicated on Drawings Top Rail Channel tubing as indicated o
506. orgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Letter Color White 3 Background Color Black 4 Maximum Temperature Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F 71 deg C 5 Minimum Label Size Length and width vary for required label content but not less than 3 by 1 inch 6 Minimum Letter Size 1 2 inch Include secondary lettering two thirds to three fourths the size of principal lettering Ta Adhesive Contact type permanent adhesive compatible with label and with substrate B Label Content Include equipment s Drawing designation or unique equipment number Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated plans details and schedules plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified C Equipment Label Schedule For each item of equipment to be labeled on 8 1 2 by 11 inch A4 bond paper Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated plans details and schedules plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data 2 2 PIPE LABELS A General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels Preprinted color coded with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction B Self Adhesive Pipe Labels Printed plastic with contact type permanent adhesive backing C Pipe Label Contents Include identification of piping service using same designations or abb
507. orities having jurisdiction 3 Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities February 7 2014 SUMMARY 011000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GEORGIA BASED MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A All major facility projects shall include Georgia products such that not less than 10 percent of all building materials used in a project are harvested extracted or manufactured in the State of Georgia where such products are commercially available The following sections of the Official Code of Georgia Annotated O C G A contain laws referencing the purchase of Georgia products Additional information regarding these laws may be obtained through the Department of Administrative Services 1 50 5 60 61 Preference for Georgia Supplies materials equipment and agriculture products 2 50 5 62 Preference for Local Sellers of Georgia Products 3 50 5 63 Preference for Georgia Forest Products PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION February 7 2014 SUMMARY 011000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 024100 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes B Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 011000 Summary Limitations on
508. orizontal conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within three feet of each outlet junction box backboard enclosure or cabinet Support conduits from structural steel members with spring steel type or beam conduit clamps and to non metallic structural members with one hole conduit straps For exposed conduits and where conduits must be suspended below structure single conduit runs shall be supported from structure by hanger rod and conduit clamp assembly and multiple conduits shall be supported by trapeze type support suspended from structure Do not attach conduits to ceiling suspension system channels or suspension wires 2 Each horizontal home run conduit can serve from one 1 to three 3 outlet boxes For one 1 outlet box a 3 4 conduit shall be used minimum For two 2 outlet boxes a 1 conduit shall be used minimum For three 3 outlet boxes a 1 1 4 conduit shall be used minimum 3 3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES A Exact locations of the outlet boxes shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor and other trades Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B 3 4 A moo o 3 5 A H The approximate locations of the outlets are indicated on the Drawings The exact locations shall be determined at the building The right is reserved to change without additional cost the exact location
509. orner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop 1 Align adjacent solid surface material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop Carefully dress joints smooth remove surface scratches and clean entire surface 2 Install countertops with no more than 1 8 inch in 96 inch sag bow or other variation from a straight line 3 Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o c and to walls with adhesive 4 Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant G Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood finish flush with surrounding surfaces February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 ADJUSTING A Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects where not possible to repair replace woodwork Adjust joinery for uniform appearance B Adjust installed work Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly D Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces Touch up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas 3 4 CLEANING A Clean casework counters shelves hardware fittings and fixtures END OF SECTION February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL
510. ose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested 3 Roughing in Plumbing Test Procedure Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing in Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow but not less than 10 foot head of water 80 kPa From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection water level must not drop Inspect joints for leaks 4 Finished Plumbing Test Procedure After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight Plug vent stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 inch wg 250 Pa Use U tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks 5 Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained 6 Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A Clean interior of piping Remove dirt and debris as work progresses B Protect drains during remainder of co
511. output contact closure The broken belt indication shall be programmable to be a system drive and bypass indication The broken belt condition sensing algorithm shall be programmable to cause only a warning or a fault and or system shutdown VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 February 7 2014 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC The bypass shall incorporate an internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC for use by others to power external devices There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control Regardless of the source of a run command keypad command time clock control digital input or serial communications the bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open motor does not operate When the damper is fully open a normally open dry contact end switch shall close The closed end switch is wired to a bypass system input and allows motor operation Up to four separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided When any safety is opened the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close This feature will also operate in Fireman s override smoke control mode The bypass control shal
512. ove corrosion and foreign matter C Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough 3 2 3 3 Device Installation 1 Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete 2 Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors 3 Do not remove surface protection such as plastic film and smudge covers until the last possible moment 4 Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches 152 mm in length 5 When there is a choice use side wiring with binding head screw terminals Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise two thirds to three fourths of the way around terminal screw 6 Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer 7 When conductors larger than No 12 AWG are installed on 15 or 20 A circuits splice No 12 AWG pigtails for device connections 8 Tighten unused terminal screws on the device 9 When mounting into metal boxes remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes allowing metal to metal contact Receptacle Orientation 1 Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right Device Plates Do not use oversized or extra deep plates Repair wall finishes and remount outlet
513. oved identification on fire retardant treated material Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes Minimize field cutting 2 9 FABRICATION Cabinet Style Flush overlay B Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts Flush style C Drawer Construction Technique Dovetail joints D Assembly Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings E Edging Fit shelves doors and exposed edges with specified edging Do not use more than one piece for any single length F Fitting When necessary to cut and fit on site provide materials with ample allowance for cutting Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting G Plastic Laminate Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes Fit corners and joints hairline secure with concealed fasteners Slightly bevel arises Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut outs 1 Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces 2 Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern February 7 2014 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center I Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures inserts appliances outlet boxes and fixtu
514. oveground Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied Products shall not contain asbestos lead mercury or mercury compounds Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871 Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795 Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin Comply with ASTM C 553 Type Il and ASTM C 1290 Type III with factory applied FSK jacket Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in Factory Applied Jackets Article 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a CertainTeed Corp SoftTouch Duct Wrap b Johns Manville Microlite C Knauf Insulation Friendly Feel Duct Wrap d Manson Insulation Inc Alley Wrap 4 DUCT INSULATION 230713 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 2 2 3 e Owens Corning SOFTR All Service Duct Wrap ADHESIVES Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated Mineral Fiber Adhesive Comply with MIL A 3316C Class 2 Grade A 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provid
515. owing Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc Square D a brand of Schneider Electric PON General Requirements Comply with UL 489 NEMA AB 1 and NEMA AB 3 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Inverse time current element for low level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers Field replaceable rating plug rms sensing with the following field adjustable settings Instantaneous trip Long and short time pickup levels Long and short time time adjustments Ground fault pickup level time delay and l t response PON Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let through ratings less than NEMA FU 1 RK 5 February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter GFCI Circuit Breakers Single and two pole configurations with Class A ground fault protection 6 mA trip G Ground Fault Equipment Protection GFEP Circuit Breakers With Class B ground fault protection 30 mA trip H Features and Accessories 1 Standar
516. p Ladder Racks 271123 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 271126 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER STRIPS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B Applicable requirements of Division 27 Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full C This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Rack Mounted Power Strips 1 2 SUBMITTALS A Provide product data 1 3 WORK INCLUDED A The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor equipment materials supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Furnish and install all Power Strips PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A Approved Power Strip manufacturer s 1 Chatsworth Products Inc 2 Ditek 3 Geist 4 ITW Linx 2 2 POWER STRIPS A Power Strip 1 The power strip shall be equipped with a minimum of six 6 3 prong 120 VAC outlets 12 cord and an on off switch 2 The pow
517. p drawn powder coated metal covers no DOOR HARDWARE 087111 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 seams H Power Operators 1 Where low kinetic energy as defined by ANSI Standard Al 56 19 power operators are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the disabled provide electrically powered 4620 Series operators complying with the 1990 ADA for opening force and time to close standards Full closing force shall be provided when the power or assist cycle ends All power operator systems shall include the following features and functions a Provisions for separate conduits to carry high and low voltage wiring in compliance with the National Electrical Code section 725 31 b When an obstruction or resistance to the opening swing is encountered the operator will continue attempting to open the door If the obstruction or resistance remains the operator will again pause the door c The operator will be designed to prevent damage to the mechanism if the system is actuated while the door is latched or if the door is forced closed during the opening cycle d All covers mounting plates and arm systems shall be powder coated and successfully pass a minimum of 100 hours testing as outlined in ANSI Standard Al56 18 e UL listed tor use on labeled doors All operators shall be non handed with spring power over a range of at least four sizes either 1 through 4 or 2 through 5
518. pass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating SCCR of 100 000 amps and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label 4 The drive and bypass package shall be seismic certified and labeled to the IBC a Seismic importance factor of 1 5 rating is required and shall be based upon actual shake table test data as defined by ICC AC 156 5 Drive Isolation Fuses To ensure maximum possible bypass operation fast acting fuses exclusive to the VFD shall be provided to allow the VED to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection This maintains bypass operation capability in the event of a VFD failure Bypass designs which have no such fuses or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 February 7 2014 6 10 11 12 13 The system VFD and Bypass tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to operate from a line of 30 35 nominal voltage range The system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain sealed in over this voltage tolerance at a minimum The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance window of nominal voltage 30 35 This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil failure during brown out low line condit
519. penetrates walls or is supported by them including electrical and other types of equipment raceways piping encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements and adjacent surfaces Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels 1 10 WARRANTY 1 Warranty Period One year from date of Substantial Completion February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A Enclosures Surface mounted cabinets 1 Rated for environmental conditions at installed location 2 Hinged Front Cover Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover 3 Finishes a Panels and Trim Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer s standard two coat baked on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat b Back Boxes Galvanized steel 4 Directory Card Inside panelboard door mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover B Incoming Mains Location As required G Phase Neutral and Ground Buses 1 Material Tin plated aluminum 2 Equipment Ground Bus Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductors bonded to box D Conductor Connectors Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes 1 Main and Neutral Lugs Mechanical type 2 Ground Lugs and B
520. ple and seal patches similar to butt joints P For above ambient services do not install insulation to the following 1 Vibration control devices 2 Testing agency labels and stamps 3 Nameplates and data plates 4 Manholes 5 Handholes 6 Cleanouts 3 3 PENETRATIONS A Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations That Are Not Fire Rated Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions B Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions ate Comply with requirements in Division07 Section Penetration Firestopping for firestopping and fire resistive joint sealers 3 4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles B Insulation Installation on Fittings Valves Strainers Flanges and Unions February 7 2014 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 2 Install insulation over fittings valves strainers flanges unions and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and
521. plumbing fixtures NSF Standard Comply with NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components Health Effects for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water Select combinations of fixtures and trim faucets fittings and other components that are compatible Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures 1 Stainless Steel Residential Sinks ASME A112 19 3 Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for sink faucets Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray ASME A112 18 3M Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose Thread Outlet ASME A112 18 3M Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray ASSE 1025 Faucets ASME A112 18 1 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers ASSE 1011 Hose Coupling Threads ASME B1 20 7 Integral Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers ASSE 1001 NSF Potable Water Materials NSF 61 Pipe Threads ASME B1 20 1 0 Supply Fittings ASME A112 18 1 1 Brass Waste Fittings ASME A112 18 2 OON OV OV Pe O Ne Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings 1 Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers ASSE 1001 2 Brass and Copper Supplies ASME A112 18 1 February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A Furnis
522. pment and deliver to Owner If pipe insulation or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss expansion pump sizing and other design considerations Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F G 3 3 Install piping to permit valve servicing Install piping at indicated slopes Install piping free of sags and bends Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connect
523. ponent maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA E Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation F Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period February 7 2014 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 CxA S RESPONSIBILITIES A Provide Project specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC amp R systems assemblies equipment and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract B Direct commissioning testing C Verify testing adjusting and balancing of Work are complete D Provide test data inspection reports and certificates in Systems Manual 1 6 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan 1 Plan for delivery and review of submittals systems manuals and other documents and reports 2 Identification of installed systems assemblies equipment and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase 3 Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer s prestart and startup checklists for HVAC amp R systems assemblies equipment and components to be ver
524. pressure readings a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing Variations in background noise must be considered 4 Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS Provide technicians instrumentation and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CXA Scope of HVAC amp R testing shall include entire HVAC amp R installation from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions Test all operating modes interlocks control responses and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors The CxA along with the HVAC amp R Contractor testing and balancing Contractor and HVAC amp R Instrumentation and Control Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans procedures and checklists for HVAC amp R systems subsystems and equipment Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible February 7 2014 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 F Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions Before simulating condi
525. products that meet the requirements of third party time temperature testing D Construction Joints Gaps 1 Firestopping shall be provided between the edges of floor slabs and exterior walls between the tops of walls and the underside of floors in the control joint in masonry walls and floors and in expansion joints February 7 2014 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270510 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Smoke Stopping 1 As required by the other Sections Smoke Stops shall be provided for Through Penetrations Membrane Penetrations and Construction Gaps with a material approved and tested for such application 3 02 EXAMINATION A Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected B Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products Verify that all pipes conduit cable and other items that penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops 3 03 INSTALLATION A General 1 Installation of firestops shall be performed by an applicator installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer s detailed insta
526. quired for pipe material and size Position pipe in center of sleeve Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal Fire Barrier Penetrations Maintain indicated fire rating of walls partitions ceilings and floors at pipe penetrations Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials Refer to Division 07 Section Penetration Firestopping for materials Verify final equipment locations for roughing in Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in requirements PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe C Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly D Soldered Joints Apply ASTM B 813 water flushable flux unless otherwise indicated to tube end Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA s Copper Tube Handbook using lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32 E Brazed Joints Construct joints according to AWS s Brazing Handbook Pipe and Tube Chapter using
527. r Structures 2010 D ASTM C864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets Setting Blocks and Spacers 2005 ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2011 ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2006 G ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass 2004 H ASTM C1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 2009e1 ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2009 J ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2010b K ASTM E1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings 2009a L GANA GM GANA Glazing Manual Glass Association of North America 2009 M GANA SM FGMA Sealant Manual Glass Association of North America 2008 N GANA LGDG Laminated Glazing Reference Manual Glass Association of North America 2009 1 4 DEFINITIONS A Glass Manufacturers Firms that produce primary glass fabricated glass or both as defined in February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C referenced glazing publications Glass Thicknesses Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036 Interspace Space between lites of an insulating glass unit 1 5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMEN
528. r does not operate When the damper is fully open a normally open dry contact end switch shall close The closed end switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided When either safety is opened the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close The keypad shall display start enable 1 or 2 missing The safety input status shall also be transmitted over the serial communications bus The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad indication that this time delay is active A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 120 seconds Start delay shall be active regardless of the start command source keypad command input contact closure time clock control or serial communications and when switching from drive to bypass Seven 7 programmable preset speeds Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible motor noise The VFD shall have selectable software for optimization of motor noise energy consumption a
529. r other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material B Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond Prime substrates in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions or recommendations Confine primers to areas of bond do not allow spillage or migration onto exposed surfaces D Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage E Ensure that anchoring devices back up materials clips sleeves supports and other related February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F materials used in the actual fire tests are provided Installation is not to proceed until submittals have been completed 3 3 INSTALLATION A B C D Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer s instructions completely closing openings Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction Remove combustible forming materials unless they are a required component of the tested assembly Install labelling required by code 3 4 CLEANING A Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials 3 5 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION OF PENETRATIONS A B Near fire and smoke barriers mark each exposed penetration with label identifying it as a fire stopped or smoke stopped assembly Mark each fire and smoke barrier above lay in ceiling
530. r support of plumbing fixtures toilet partitions wall cabinets toilet accessories and hardware Bolt or screw steel channels to studs 3 4 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A Acoustic Insulation Place tightly within spaces around cut openings behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions B Acoustic Sealant Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members 2 In non fire rated construction seal around all penetrations by conduit pipe ducts and rough in boxes 3 5 BOARD INSTALLATION A F Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer s instructions Install to minimize butt end joints especially in highly visible locations Single Layer Non Rated Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing Install panels with face side out Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings 1 Stagger abutting end joints not less than on framing member in alternate courses of panels 2 At stairwells and other high walls install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire resistance ra
531. r to fail to maintain space comfort condition during any such period Perform cutover of controls that cannot meet these conditions outside of above hours TRAINING The contractor shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to designated personnel in the operation of the system installed Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach The contractor shall provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system installed All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8 00 am to 3 30 PM weekdays Provide training for Owner s designated operating personnel Training shall include 1 Explanation of drawings operations and maintenance manuals 2 Walk through of the job to locate control components 3 Operator workstation and peripherals 4 DDC controller and ASC operation function 5 Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming 6 Operation of portable operator s terminal TAs Explanation of adjustment calibration and replacement procedures 8 Student binder with training modules Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of the hardware and software additional training must be available from the Contractor If such training is required by the Owner it will be contracted at a later date PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SYSTEM PERFORMANC
532. r to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe tube and fitting materials and joining methods B Pipe Threads ASME B1 20 1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings 2 2 JOINING MATERIALS A Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below B Solder Filler Metals ASTM B 32 lead free alloys Include water flushable flux according to ASTM B 813 February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A Description Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded solder joint plain or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials B Insulating Material Suitable for system fluid pressure and temperature C Dielectric Couplings Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining threaded ends and 300 psig 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 225 deg F 107 deg C D Dielectric Nipples Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining plain threaded or grooved ends and 300 psig 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 225 deg F 107 deg C 2 4 ESCUTCHEONS A Description Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates with an ID to closely fit around pipe tube and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening B One Piece Deep Pattern T
533. ration for a minimum period of two years Prototype or custom made equipment is not acceptable unless so specified Manufacturer s instructions shall be obtained and used for the installation of all equipment and devices where such manufacturers instructions are available PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS 3 4 thick softwood face plywood backboard with equipment mounting sides finish grade and all sides and edges painted with at least two coats of fire retardant black paint PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 A INSTALLATION Applicable provisions of the latest edition of NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction published by the National Electrical Contractors Association NECA shall set the standard for installation of materials and equipment and for workmanship Install all materials in a neat and orderly manner Cover conduits boxes cabinets and other enclosures with plastic covers or caps to prevent entrance of plaster concrete or other debris when work is not being done Materials and equipment shall be installed using tools and equipment designed for the particular application February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 2 3 3 3 4 Manufacturer s instructions shall be obtained and used for the installation of all equipment and devices where such manufacturer s instructions are available PHASE ROT
534. relative humidity level measurement Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct location 3 2 PREPARATION A Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives follow the recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings Remove sub floor ridges and bumps Fill minor low spots cracks joints holes and other defects with sub floor filler to achieve smooth flat hard surface Prohibit traffic until filler is cured Clean substrate Apply primer as required to prevent bleed through or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed 3 3 INSTALLATION a D OTW Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub floor conditions Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set Fit joints tightly Set flooring in place press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion Where type of floor finish pattern or color are different on opposite sides of door terminate flooring under centerline of door Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates and where indicated 1 Metal Strips Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel Screws 2 Resilient Strips Attach to substrate using adhesive Scribe flooring to walls columns cabinets floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tigh
535. rements Interior Type A AWPA U1 Use Category UCFA Commodity Specification H low temperature low hygroscopic type chemically treated and pressure impregnated capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes a Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood b Treat rough carpentry items as indicated c Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet C Preservative Treatment February 7 2014 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Manufacturers a Arch Wood Protection Inc www wolmanizedwood com b Viance LLC www treatedwood com c Osmose Inc www osmose com d Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade AWPA U1 Use Category UC3B Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0 25 Ib cu ft retention 1 Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent 2 Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete 3 Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade a Treat lumber in other locations as indicated Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade AWPA U1 Use Category UC2 and U
536. repare test and inspection reports END OF SECTION 223300 February 7 2014 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components 1 Faucets for sinks 2 Laminar flow faucet spout outlets 3 Kitchen sinks Related Sections include the following i Division 22 Section Domestic Water Piping Specialties for backflow preventers floor drains and specialty fixtures not included in this Section 2 Division 22 Section Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers DEFINITIONS ABS Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene plastic Accessible Fixture Plumbing fixture that can be approached entered and used by people with disabilities Cast Polymer Cast filled polymer plastic material This material includes cultured marble and solid surface materials Cultured Marble Cast filled polymer plastic material with surface coating Fitting Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops faucets and spouts shower heads and tub spouts drains and tailpie
537. reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 J 3 2 3 3 D Examine terminal variable air volume terminal units and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning Examine heat transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions Record default set points if different from indicated values PREPARATION Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step by step procedures Complete system readiness checks and prepare reports Verify the following Permanent electrical power wiring is complete Hydronic systems WSHP only are filled clean and free of air Automatic temperature control systems are operational Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed Balance smoke and fire dampers are open Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational Ceilings
538. res and fittings Verify locations of cutouts from on site dimensions Prime paint cut edges PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Verify adequacy of backing and support framing B Verify location and sizes of utility rough in associated with work of this section 3 2 INSTALLATION A Set and secure custom cabinets in place assuring that they are rigid plumb and level B Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components C Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops D Carefully scribe casework abutting other components with maximum gaps of 1 32 inch Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose m Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned Adjust hardware so center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated 1 Install cabinets with no more than 1 8 in 96 inch sag bow or other variation from a straight line 2 Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish 3 Fasten wall cabinets through back bear top and bottom at ends and not more than 16 inches o c with No 10 wafer head screws sized for 1 inch penetration into wood framing blocking or hanging strips F Securely anchor countertops by screwing through c
539. reviations as used on Drawings pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction 1 Flow Direction Arrows Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction 2 Lettering Size At least 1 1 2 inches 38 mm high 2 3 DUCT LABELS A Color coded self adhesive duct markers include a die cut or detachable directional arrow B Letter Color White C Background Color Blue yellow or green D Maximum Temperature Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F 71 deg C E Minimum Label Size Length and width vary for required label content but not less than 16 x 2 1 4 F Minimum Letter Size 1 inch G Adhesive Contact type permanent adhesive compatible with label and with substrate H Duct Label Contents Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 4 VALVE TAGS A Valve Tags Stamped or engraved with 1 4 inch 6 4 mm letters for piping system abbreviation B and 1 2 inch 13 mm numbers 1 Tag Material Brass 0 032 inch minimum thickness and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware 2 Fasteners Brass wire link or beaded chain Valve Schedules For e
540. rimers for a particular substrate use primer categorized as best by the manufacturer C Volatile Organic Compound VOC Content 1 Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following a 40 CFR 59 Subpart D National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings b Ozone Transport Commission OTC Model Rule Architectural Industrial and Maintenance Coatings www otcair org specifically 1 Opaque Flat 50 g L maximum 2 Opaque Nonflat 150 g L maximum 3 Opaque High Gloss 250 g L maximum 4 Varnishes 350 g L maximum c Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located d USGBC LEED NC Rating System Version 2 2 EQ Credit 4 2 for interior wall and ceiling finish all coats anti corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal clear wood stains and finishes sanding sealers other sealers shellac and floor coatings 2 Determination of VOC Content Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction D Colors As indicated on drawings 1 Extend colors to surface edges colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect 2 In finished areas finish pipes ducts conduit and equipment the same color as the wall ceiling they are mounted on under 2 5 ACC
541. ripping or component damage flying start The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over current over voltage under voltage or loss of input signal protective trip The number of restart attempts trial time and time between attempts shall be programmable The overload rating of the drive shall be 110 of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes 130 overload for 2 seconds The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC UL table 430 250 for 4 pole motors The VFD shall have internal 5 impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients The 5 impedance may be from dual positive and negative DC bus VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 reactors or 5 AC line reactors VFD s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor The input current rating of the VFD shall be no more than 3 greater than the output current rating VFD s with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring protection devices and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430 120 Input and output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient surge protection system consisting of 4 120 joule rated MOV s phase to phase and phase to ground a capacitor clamp and 5 impedance rea
542. ristics 1 Air Pressure Within Shaft Sustained loads of 5 Ibf sq ft with maximum mid span deflection of L 240 2 Acoustic Attenuation STC of 35 39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413 based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90 2 2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A Manufacturers Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories 1 Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC www clarkdietrich com 2 Dietrich Metal Framing www dietrichindustries com 3 Marino Ware www marinoware com 4 Telling Industries Product Metal Drywall Framing Series www tellingindustries com 5 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements B Non Loadbearing Framing System Components ASTM C645 galvanized sheet steel of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated with maximum ried of wall framing of L 240 at 5 psf Exception The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used the metal is continuously dimpled the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754 a Acceptable Products 1 Dietrich Metal Framing UltraSteel tm www dietrichindustries com 2 Clark Western Building Systems UltraSteel tm www clarkwestern com 2 Studs C shaped with flat or formed webs with
543. rned over to owner in printed and electronic format four 4 weeks prior to job completion 2 06 AS BUILT PLAN A Description At the completion of the project provide an as built floor plan of each floor to the owner PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 LABELING REQUIREMENTS A Labeling shall be done in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI TIA EIA 606 document manufacturer s recommendations and best industry practices B All spaces pathways outlets cables termination hardware grounding system and equipment shall be labeled with machine generated labels All labels shall be clear with black text All cables shall be labeled with machine generated wrap around labels E A total of three 3 labels per horizontal cable are required at the following intervals 6 from outlet 18 from outlet 12 from termination block patch panel F Labeling scheme shall be alphanumeric G Provide and generate all labeling no labels will be furnished by the owner H Labels shall be developed and printed using a software program Software program and all in puts shall be turned over to the owner at the end of the project 3 02 INSTALLATION A All labels shall be installed straight February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Provide labels at locations as indicated on the Drawings and as follows Outlet face plat
544. roduct Requirements woan Glazing Sealant Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 50 Use NT Acceptable Manufacturers BASF Building Systems Omniseal 50 Dow Corning Corporation 795 May National Associates Inc Bondaflex Sil 295 Pecora Corporation 895 Polymeric Systems Inc PSI 641 Sika Corporation Construction Products Division SikaSil C995 Tremco Incorporated Spectrem 2 Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements sa 72 a0C0p Glazing Sealant Neutral curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use NT ie Acceptable Manufacturers Dow Corning Corporation 799 May National Associates Inc Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN Polymeric Systems Inc PSI 631 Schnee Morehead Inc an ITW company SM5731 Poly Glaze Plus Tremco Incorporated Proglaze SSG Substitutions Refer to Section 016000 Product Requirements 2200p 2 7 GLAZING TAPES A Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes Preformed butyl based 100 percent solids elastomeric tape nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and February 7 2014 GLAZING 088000 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
545. roduct indicated B Shop Drawings Include Product Data for components 1 Trapeze pipe hangers 2 Metal framing systems 3 Equipment supports 1 6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A Welding certificates 1 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Structural Steel Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1 1 D1 1M Structural Welding Code Steel B Pipe Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A Copper Pipe Hangers 1 Description MSS SP 58 Types 1 through 58 copper coated steel factory fabricated components 2 Hanger Rods Continuous thread rod nuts and washer made of copper coated steel 2 2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A Description MSS SP 69 Type 59 shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from structural carbon steel shapes with MSS SP 58 carbon steel hanger rods nuts saddles and U bolts 2 3 FASTENER SYSTEMS A Powder Actuated Fasteners Threaded steel stud for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull out tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used B Mechanical Expansion Anchors Insert wedge type zinc coated stainless steel anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull out tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used January 31 2014
546. ronics a Left Side Part Number NGF TB4MLU7 or Equivalent Pre Terminated ADC Unit b Right Side Part Number NGF TB1MRU7 or Equivalent Pre terminated ADC unit c Single Mode Fiber Insert Panel E Approved Wall Mounted S110 Field Termination Kits 1 Manufacturer Siemon a 50 pair S110 wiring block with legs Part Number S110AW1 50 b 100 pair S110 wiring block with legs Part Number S110AW2 100 c 200 pair S110 wiring block with legs Part Number S110AW2 200 d 300 pair S110 wiring block with legs Part Number S110AW2 300 F Approved Wall Mounted S110 Horizontal Cable Managers al Manufacturer Siemon a 1 RMS Wire manager with Legs b Part Number S110A1RMS February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS 271119 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 0 EXECUTION A Category 6 patch panel terminations shall be compliant with ANSI TIA 568 C 2 0 standards and manufacturer recommendations B Fiber optic patch panel terminations shall be compliant with ANSI TIA 568 C 3 0 standards and manufacturer recommendations C Unless exact location is specified in the drawing set Contractor shall coordinate the placement of all patch panels with the owner Georgia State University Information Systems and Technologies D Unless exact location is specified in the drawing set the contractor shall coordinate the placement of all Category 6 patch panels with th
547. rranty Period Six years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Fire Extinguishers 1 JL Industries Inc www jlindustries com 2 Larsen s Manufacturing Co www larsensmfg com 3 Potter Roemer www potterroemer com B Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories 1 JL Industries Inc www jlindustries com 2 _Larsen s Manufacturing Co www larsensmfg com 3 Potter Roemer www potterroemer com 4 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A Fire Extinguishers General Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes whichever is more stringent B Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers 4A 80BC Stainless steel tank with pressure gage 1 Class A B C 2 Size 10 3 Finish Baked enamel red color 2 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A Metal Formed galvanized steel sheet 0 036 inch thick base metal B Cabinet Configuration Recessed type 1 Sized to accommodate accessories 2 Trim Flat 1 inch wide face 3 Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams Form perimeter trim and door stiles C Door 0 036 inch thick reinforced for flatness and rigidity latch Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge Provide nylon catch Cabinet Mounting Hardware Appropriate to cabinet Pre drill for anchors Weld fill and grind components smooth nmo Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door Primed f
548. rs 1 Graham Wood Doors www grahamdoors com 2 Eggers Industries www eggersindustries com 3 Haley Brothers www haleybros com 4 Marshfield DoorSystems Inc www marshfielddoors com February 7 2014 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 5 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 DOORS AND PANELS A B All Doors See drawings for locations and additional requirements 1 Quality Level Custom Grade in accordance with AWI AWMAC MW1 Architectural Woodwork Standards 2 Wood Veneer Faced Doors 5 ply unless otherwise indicated Interior Doors 1 3 4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated flush construction 1 Provide solid core doors at all locations 2 Fire Rated Doors Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International Building Code positive pressure UL or WH ITS labeled without any visible seals when door is open 3 Smoke and Draft Control Doors In addition to required fire rating provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3 0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0 10 inch w g pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures with S label if necessary provide additional gasketing or edge sealing 4 Sound Retardant Doors Minimum STC of 41 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413 tested in accordance with ASTM E1408 2 3 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A
549. rt takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units Where flow pattern is not obvious mark each pipe at branch 3 Near penetrations through walls floors ceilings and inaccessible enclosures 4 At access doors manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping 5 Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 6 Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet 15 m lt Insert dimension gt along each run Reduce intervals to 25 feet 7 6 m lt Insert dimension gt in areas of congested piping and equipment T On piping above removable acoustical ceilings Omit intermediately spaced labels 3 4 3 5 Pipe Label Color Schedule 1 Condenser Water Piping a Background Color Green b Letter Color White 2 Refrigerant Piping a Background Color Yellow b Letter Color Black 3 Condensate Drain Piping a Background Color Green b Letter Color White DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION Install self adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes 1 Green For cold air supply ducts 2 Blue For exhaust outside relief return and mixed air ducts 3 ASME A13 1 Colors and Designs For hazardous material exhaust Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maxi
550. rts 9500 VO OT R 0N B Related Sections 1 Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications for structural steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports 2 Division 23 Section Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping for pipe guides and anchors 3 Division 23 Section Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment for vibration isolation devices 4 Division 23 Section s Metal Ducts for duct hangers and supports 1 3 DEFINITIONS A MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Structural Performance Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE SEI 7 1 Design supports for multiple pipes including pipe stands capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems system contents and test water 2 Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components 3 Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction January 31 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A Product Data For each type of p
551. ruary 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 1 7 A A B C jurisdiction Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive mastic tapes and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency 1 Insulation Installed Indoors Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 50 or less 2 Insulation Installed Outdoors Flame spread index of 75 or less and smoke developed index of 150 or less DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Packaging Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation type and grade and maximum use temperature COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of supports hangers and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 February 7 201 A INSULATION MATERIALS Comply with requirements in Duct Insulation Schedule General Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule and Ab
552. s 3 Adjustable non continuous cable support sling shall be suitable for use in air handling spaces C Bridle Rings Februray 7 2014 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Bridle rings shall be made of steel rated for indoor use in non corrosive environments 2 Bridle rings shall be UL listed 3 Shall have an ultimate static load limit of 50 lbs depending on application select threaded unthreaded or wood screw variety 2 8 VELCRO STRAPS A Velcro Straps 1 Cables shall be fastened to support structures with Velcro straps 2 Velcro straps installed in air handling spaces must be plenum rated a Plenum Velcro strap color shall be red PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PENETRATIONS A Holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures shall be cut with a diamond core drill or concrete saw upon approval of the structural engineer of record for the base of building Pneumatic hammer impact electric hand or manual hammer type drills shall not be allowed except where permitted by the Project Manager as required by limited working space X ray all floor penetrations accordingly B Holes shall be located so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams C Holes shall be laid out in advance The Project Manager shall be advised prior to drilling through structural sections for determination of proper layout D
553. s 5 8 inch b Ceilings 1 2 inch Paper Faced Products a Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC ToughRock Gypsum Wallboard b National Gypsum Company Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard c Temple Inland Inc Gypsumboard and Gypsum Board Fire Resistant Panels Type X and Type TGC d USG Corporation Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels e Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements C Ceiling Board Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396 C1396M sizes to minimize joints in place ends square cut 1 Application Ceilings unless otherwise indicated 2 Thickness 1 2 inch 3 Edges Tapered February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 4 Products Georgia Pacific Gypsum LLC ToughRock CD Ceiling Board National Gypsum Company High Strength Brand Ceiling Board Temple Inland Inc Span24 Ceiling Board USG Corporation Sheetrock Brand Sag Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements Dapp D Shaftwall and Coreboard Type X 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide beveled long edges ends square cut 1 Paper Faced Type Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C1396 C1396M water resistant faces 2 Products CertainTeed Corporation ProRoc Brand Shaftliner Type X National Gypsum Company Gold Bond Brand 1 Fire Shield Shaftliner Temple
554. s Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels February 7 2014 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232913 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FULL VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS A General Requirements for Full Voltage Controllers Comply with NEMA ICS 2 general purpose Class A B Combination Magnetic Controller Factory assembled combination of magnetic controller OCPD and disconnecting means 1 Fusible Disconnecting Means a NEMA KS 1 heavy duty horsepower rated fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses b Lockable Handle Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position 2 Configuration nonreversing 3 Contactor Coils Pressure encapsulated type a Operating Voltage Depending on contactor NEMA size and line voltage rating manufacturer s standard matching control power or line voltage 4 Power Contacts Totally enclosed double break silver cadmium oxide assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring 5 Control Circuits 24V ac obtained from integral CPT with primary and secondary fuses CPT shall be Class B and of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot indicating and control devices 6 Auxiliary Contacts provide one N O contact and one N C contact
555. s The purpose is to demonstrate the calibration response and action of every point and system Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Contractor As each control input and output is checked a log shall be completed showing the date technician s initials and any corrective action taken or needed Demonstrate compliance with System Performance Demonstrate compliance with Sequences of Operation through all modes of operation Demonstrate complete operation of Operator Interface Additionally the following items shall be demonstrated a DDC Loop Response The Contractor shall supply trend data output in a graphical form showing the step response of each DDC loop The test shall show the loop s response to a change in set point which represents a change of actuator position of at least 25 of its full range The sampling rate of the trend shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes depending on the speed of the loop The trend data shall show for each sample the set point actuator position and controlled variable values Any loop that yields unreasonably under damped or over damped control shall require further tuning by the Contractor February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 16 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 3 5 3 6 b Interface to the building fire alarm system 10 Any tests that fail to demonstrate the
556. s determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE SEI 7 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated Shop Drawings The sprinkler contractor shall submit sprinkler RCP plans that are coordinated with lights diffusers walls speakers and fire alarm devices for review and approval by the Architect prior to installation Delegated Design Submittal For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data For qualified Installer and professional engineer Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings Working plans prepared according to NFPA 13 that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction including hydraulic calculations if applicable Welding certificates Field Test Reports and Certificates Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 Include Contractor s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping Field quality control reports CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and maintenance data QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications 1 Installer s responsibilities include designing fabricating and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility Base calculations on res
557. s Section 2 Start stop and operating status of heat pump unit 3 Data inquiry to include supply air room air temperature and humidity and entering water temperature 4 Occupied and unoccupied schedules Electrical Connection Single electrical connection with fused disconnect Capacities and Characteristics see equipment schedules PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of water source heat pumps B Examine roughing in for piping and electric installations for water source heat pumps to verify actual locations of piping connections and electrical conduit before installation C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Equipment Mounting Install water source heat pumps with continuous thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical limit stop of size required to support weight of water source heat pump unit 1 Comply with requirements for seismic restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 2 Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment February 7 2014 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP 238146 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 3 CO
558. s for hollow metal frames Furnish setting drawings templates and directions for installing anchorages including sleeves concrete inserts anchor bolts and items with integral anchors Deliver such items to project site in time for installation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Steel Frames 1 Assa Abloy Ceco Curries or Fleming www assaabloydss com 2 Windsor Republic Doors www republicdoor com 3 Steelcraft www steelcraft com 4 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 MATERIALS A Cold Rolled Sheet Steel ASTM A 1008 A 1008M Commercial Steel CS Type B suitable for exposed applications B Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A 653 A 653M Commercial Steel CS Type B with minimum A40 ZF120 metallic coating C Frame Anchors ASTM A 591 A 591M Commercial Steel CS 40Z 12G coating designation mill phosphatized 1 For anchors built into exterior walls steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 A 1008M or ASTM A 1011 A 1011M hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 A 153M Class B February 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 o Inserts Bolts and Fasteners Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 A 153M Power Actuated Fasteners in Concrete Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated fabricated from corrosion resistant materials with clips of other accessory devices for attaching hol
559. s for temperature control sensors TESTING Hydrostatically test each piping system when complete including all valves fittings temperature control devices and piping system components Minimum Test Pressure 1 1 2 operating pressure Maximum test pressure lowest test pressure rating of any system components Duration Four hours without any loss of pressure Pneumatic testing is not acceptable ADJUSTING Ready hydronic systems for testing and balancing Adjust temperature controls so that all coils receive full flow Set equipment operating temperatures to design requirements CLEANING See Section 15056 for piping cleaning requirements Replace any start up strainers with final strainers after flushing is complete and before balancing All piping shall be flushed out or blown out after pressure testing is complete and before being put into use After start up and testing strainer screens shall again be removed and cleaned 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Contractor to maintain log of flushing and strainer cleaning dates and times Log shall include comments regarding strainer cleaning 3 11 COMMISSIONING A Operate system for testing and balancing END OF SECTION 15510 February 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION
560. s of adjacent equipment or building structure D Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators E Attachment to Structure If specific attachment is not indicated anchor bracing and restraints to structure to flanges of beams to upper truss chords of bar joists or to concrete members 3 5 CONNECTIONS A Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section Air Duct Accessories B Comply with SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible for branch outlet and inlet and terminal unit connections 3 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Perform tests and inspections B Duct System Cleanliness Tests at Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 7 3 8 2 Test sections of metal duct system chosen randomly by Owner for cleanliness according to Vacuum Test in NADCA ACR Assessment Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems a Acceptable Cleanliness Level Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0 75 mg 100 sq cm Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections Prepare test and inspection reports START UP Air Balance Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC DUCT
561. s on top side without holes cracks or open seams 1 Applications Provide at the following locations a At doorways where tile terminates b At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height 2 9 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A Tile Cleaner A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A D Verify that sub floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile Verify that sub floor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub floor surfaces Verify that concrete sub floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits 1 Moisture emission rate Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours 2 Alkalinity pH range of 5 9 Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct location 3 2 PREPARATION A B C D Protect surrounding work from damage Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean Seal substrate surface cracks with filler Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances
562. s with words identifying it as a fire or smoke barrier at intervals required by authorities having jurisdiction 3 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A B C D Inspect completed installations for completeness and correct installation If installed work is to be covered in completed work inspect and obtain approval prior to covering Obtain the approval of the authority having jurisdiction Submit the report of the inspection to the Architect 3 7 PROTECTION A B D Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials Use methods and materials approved by the manufacturer of the penetration seals and of surfaces to be cleaned Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation Protect installed work during the curing period Repair damaged materials in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions END OF SECTION February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 079005 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B Sealants and joint backing Hollow gaskets 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B C Section 078400 Firestopping Firestopping sealants Section 088000 Glazing Glazing sealants and accessories Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Acoustic sealant 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS muUo WwW ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants 2010 ASTM C919 Standard
563. scale 1 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fire detection and alarm system is existing Simplex 4100 series voice evacuation system Work consists of new devices and hardware and programming for new devices B System Design 1 Provide a complete design for the fire alarm system 2 System design shall be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer as specified here in 3 System addition hall comply with all applicable codes and standards for the State of Georgia City of Atlanta and Georgia State University including all codes and standards referenced by the above 4 Coordinate with Division 23 requirements for smoke control Coordinate with mechanical design drawings 5 Coordinate with Division 21 requirements for sprinkler system devices Coordinate with sprinkler design drawings 6 Coordinate with Division 8 requirements for door hardware Coordinate with architectural design drawings 1 5 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product required B Shop Drawings For fire alarm system Include plans elevations sections details calculations and attachments to other work 1 Comply with recommendations in the Documentation Section of the Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems Chapter in NFPA 72 February 7 2014 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Provide voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits
564. scent lighting loads Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high intensity discharge HID lighting circuits PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Receive inspect handle and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1 1 B Examine panelboards before installation Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work D Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1 1 B Mount top of cabinet 78 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated C Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box D Install filler plates in unused spaces E Comply with NECA 1 3 3 IDENTIFICATION A Identify field installed conductors interconnecting wiring and components provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems B Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads incorporate Owner s final room designations Obtain approval before installing
565. sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation 3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application 4 Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated 3 4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION A Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes Februrary 7 2014 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials 2 Where vapor barriers are indicated seal longitudinal seams end joints and protrusions with vapor barrier mastic and joint sealant 3 For insulation with factory applied jackets on above ambient surfaces secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches 150 mm o c 4 For insulation with factory applied jackets on below ambient surfaces do not staple 3 5 longitudinal tabs Instead secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor barrier mastic and flashing sealant Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties 1 Install preformed sections of sa
566. sh Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word union Match size and color of pipe labels C Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated Installation shall conform to the following a 2 Make removable union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation When union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of union Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for unions except divide the two part section on the vertical center line of valve body When covers are made from block insulation make two halves each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric Secure this wire frame with its attached insulation to flanges with tie wire Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats After first coat is dry apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish 3 5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer s recommende
567. shall be available End of Section February 7 2014 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 11 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes Single wall rectangular ducts and fittings Sheet metal materials Duct liner Sealants and gaskets Hangers and supports Seismic restraint devices S a a T Related Sections 1 Division 23 Section Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC for testing adjusting and balancing requirements for metal ducts 2 Division 23 Section Nonmetal Ducts for fibrous glass ducts thermoset fiber reinforced plastic ducts thermoplastic ducts PVC ducts and concrete ducts 3 Division 23 Section HVAC Casings for factory and field fabricated casings for mechanical equipment 4 Division 23 Section Air Duct Accessories for dampers sound control devices duct mounting access doors and panels turning vanes and flexible ducts PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexibl
568. shall cable s rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels G Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50 cables H Cable shall be installed above fire sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves fire alarm conduit boxes or other control devices February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Cables shall be routed through conduit cable trays spaces below raised floors open ceiling areas non ventilated spaces above ceiling tile and through plenum air handling spaces above ceiling tile Coordinate with General Contractor GC Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid fire sprinkler systems duct work o or lighting fixture supports or cables Where support is required the contractor shall install appropriate support systems as prescribed in ANSI TIA 568 C 2 Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination point There shall be no splices Horizontal cables shall not be bundled in groups of more than 50 cables A plastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg 200 Lbs shall be installed with any cable installed in conduits A pull cord is not required for conduit sleeves of less than 4 in length Contractor
569. spaces exposed to view rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view wax coated where exposed to acids chemicals or other corrosive fumes END OF SECTION 211313 February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 A B 1 3 A SUMMARY This Section includes the following 1 Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems 2 Dielectric fittings 3 Escutcheons 4 Plumbing demolition DEFINITIONS Finished Spaces Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms furred spaces pipe chases unheated spaces immediately below roof spaces above ceilings unexcavated spaces crawlspaces and tunnels Concealed Interior Installations Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants Examples include above ceilings and in chases QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services circuit breakers and conduit sizes are appropriately modified If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified equipment shall comply with requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPE TUBE AND FITTINGS A Refe
570. spection and Testing Form in the Records Section of the Inspection Testing and Maintenance Chapter in NFPA 72 B Reacceptance Testing Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances C Fire alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections D Prepare test and inspection reports 3 6 DEMONSTRATION A Train Owner s maintenance personnel to adjust operate and maintain fire alarm system END OF SECTION 283111 February 7 2014 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 5
571. spring power adjustable for 50 increase in closing power and fully mortised door tracks All closers shall be certified to exceed ten million 10 000 000 full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory All closers overhead surface and concealed shall be of one manufacturer and carry manufacturer s ten year warranty electric closers to have two year warranty Access Free Manual Closers Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A 117 1 provisions for door opening force Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code Where possible mount closers inside rooms Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification Combination Door Closers and Holders Provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and automatically close door under fire conditions Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors provided with normally closed switching contacts Where Combination Door Closers Holder and Detectors are scheduled provide integral UL Listed photo electric 24V detector module Closers shall be provided with fully dee
572. ss E Back prime woodwork items to be field finished prior to installation PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B Verify adequacy of backing and support framing Verify mechanical electrical and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install work in accordance with AWI AWMAC W1 Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated Set and secure materials and components in place plumb and level Carefully scribe work abutting other components with maximum gaps of 1 32 inch Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps Install hardware supplied by Section 08711 Hardware in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A Set exposed fasteners Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations Sand work smooth B Site Finishing See Section 099000 C Before installation prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials February 7 2014 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 4 TOLERANCES A Maximum Variation from True Position 1 16 inch B Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials 1 32 inch END OF SECTION February 7 2014 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SEC
573. ss dry seal threading is specified 2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds 3 4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated 1 Install unions in piping NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment 2 Wet Piping Systems Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals 3 5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS A Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated B Install equipment level and plumb parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces unless otherwise indicated C Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service maintenance and repair or replacement of components Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum interference to other installations Extend grease fittings to accessible locations D Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope END OF SECTION 220500 February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 A A
574. ss using manufacturer s standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920 Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings Miter wood moldings at corner joints 2 5 FACTORY FINISHING A B Finish wood doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings Wood doors that are not indicated to be factory finished may be field finished Shop Priming Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section Painting Seal all four edges edges of cutouts and mortises with primer B Opaque Finish 1 Grade Custom 2 Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range 3 Sheen Satin PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A B C Verify existing conditions before starting work Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment 3 2 INSTALLATION A a ee Pe Install doors in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and AWI AWMAC Quality Standards requirements Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3 4 inch Machine cut for hardware Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware Coordinate installation of glazing 3 3 TOLERANCES A Conform to specified quality standard for fit clearance and joinery tolerances B Maximum Diagonal Distorti
575. ssure Piping Gasketed Joints Join according to ASTM D 3139 K Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints Join according to ASTM D 3212 L PE Piping Heat Fusion Joints Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels Join according to ASTM D 2657 1 Plain End Pipe and Fittings Use butt fusion 2 Plain End Pipe and Socket Fittings Use socket fusion M Fiberglass Bonded Joints Prepare pipe ends and fittings apply adhesive and join according to pipe manufacturer s written instructions 3 4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 Install unions in piping NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment 2 Install flanges in piping NPS 2 1 2 DN 65 and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment 3 Dry Piping Systems Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals 4 Wet Piping Systems Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals 3 5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS A Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated B Install equipment level and plu
576. stalled Comply with the requirements for checking and coordination of Shop Drawings specified in the Mechanical General Provisions Section 23 05 00 Promptly upon receipt of a copy of the Air Distribution Shop Drawing for any floor or area check the proposed routing of the HVAC piping against the work shown on the shop drawings and arrange to coordinate the work to avoid interference Submittal shall clearly indicate where products are to be applied Provide table showing each piping system with pipe size pipe material and fitting material and piping location PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPING A Auxiliary cooling condenser water 1 Size Up to 2 inch a Pipe Copper Type L Hard Drawn ASTM B88 February 7 2014 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 b Fitting Wrought Copper or bronze solder joint pressure fittings Brazed ASTM B16 22 B Drain Pipe for AC Unit Condensate Computer Room Units 1 Size Up to 2 inch a Pipe Copper Type DWV ASTM B88 b Fitting Wrought Copper Brazed 2 2 BRAZING A All Water Systems With Copper Piping 1 Sil fos silver copper phosphorus brazing filler metal B FITTINGS C General Pressure ratings of all fittings shall be equal to or greater than the design pressure of the systems in which they are installed All fittings shall be manufactured from a material that is compatible with the pipe material D R
577. stics Flame spread 25 maximum smoke developed 450 maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 2 Finish on Exposed Surfaces Semi gloss gloss rating of 25 to 50 d Color and Pattern As indicated on drawings e Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Schober Inc Product Lumicor www schober com Dupont www corian com Formica Corporation www formica com 4 Avonite Surfaces www avonitesurfaces com Wilsonart International Inc www wilsonart com Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements f Other Components Thickness 1 2 inch minimum g Exposed Edge Treatment Built up to minimum 1 1 4 inch thick edge profile as indicated on drawings h Back and End Splashes Same sheet material square top minimum 4 inches high 2 2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A Wood Based Components 1 Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted 2 Provide sustainably harvested wood certified or labeled as specified in Section 016000 Plywood for Supporting Substrate PS 1 Exterior Grade A C veneer grade minimum 5 ply minimum 3 4 inch thick join lengths using metal splines Adhesives Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined Joint Sealant Mildew resistant silicone sealant Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range 2 3 FABRICATION A Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable with top surface of joints flush
578. structions common to most piping systems 2 Dielectric fittings 3 Mechanical sleeve seals 4 Sleeves 5 Escutcheons 6 Grout 7 HVAC demolition 8 Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections 9 Concrete bases 10 Supports and anchorages 1 2 DEFINITIONS A Finished Spaces Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms furred spaces pipe and duct chases unheated spaces immediately below roof spaces above ceilings unexcavated spaces crawlspaces and tunnels B Exposed Interior Installations Exposed to view indoors Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms C Exposed Exterior Installations Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions Examples include rooftop locations D Concealed Interior Installations Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants Examples include above ceilings and chases E Concealed Exterior Installations Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures Examples include installations within unheated shelters 1 3 SUBMITTALS A Welding certificates 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Steel Support Welding Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1 1 Structural Welding Code Steel B Steel Pipe Welding Qualify processes and operators according to ASME
579. substitute such item for the specified item with supporting data and samples it required to permit a fair evaluation of the proposed substitute with respect to quality serviceability warranty and cost When a substitute item is proposed all costs associated with changes to incorporate the substituted item shall be borne by the Contractor without incurring additions to the Contract QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications Manufacturers shall have minimum 5 years experience in the manufacture of the indicated products Regulatory Requirements All products including equipment furnished for the electrical installation shall bear the Listing Mark or Classification Marking label of UL where such marking is available or other approved testing agency Products which are not listed will not be acceptable The work under Division 26 shall comply with relevant portions of the following The most stringent shall apply where a code conflict occurs Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act Americans with Disabilities Act ADA State of Georgia Accessibility Code NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NEC 2011 with Georgia Amendments NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems NFPA 101 Life Safety Code ASME A17 1 Elevator Code ASHRAE Standard 90 1 2007 wN gt 60 00 0 g 2 Where different sections of any of the aforementio
580. t construction methods unless otherwise indicated Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting seam marks roller marks stains discolorations and other imperfections MATERIALS Galvanized Sheet Steel Comply with ASTM A 653 A 653M 1 Galvanized Coating Designation G60 Z180 G90 Z275 2 Exposed Surface Finish Mill phosphatized Reinforcement Shapes and Plates Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel ducts Tie Rods Galvanized steel 1 4 inch 6 mm minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches 900 mm or less 3 8 inch 10 mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches 900 mm MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS Standard Steel Manual Volume Dampers 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following Air Balance Inc a division of Mestek Inc American Warming and Ventilating a division of Mestek Inc McGill AirFlow LLC Nailor Industries Inc Pottorff Ruskin Company Trox USA Inc Vent Products Company Inc FOTP February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Comply with AMCA 500 D testing for damper rating 3 Low leakage rating with linkage outside airstream and bearing AMCA s Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage 4 Suitable for horizontal
581. t joints Install feature strips where indicated 3 4 TILE FLOORING A Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed unless manufacturer s instructions say otherwise B Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set C Set flooring in place press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion D Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern E Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door terminate flooring under centerline February 7 2014 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 of door F Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates and where indicated Scribe flooring to walls columns cabinets floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints 3 5 RESILIENT BASE A B D Fit joints tightly and make vertical Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints Miter internal corners At external corners use premolded units At exposed ends use premolded units Install base on solid backing Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions 3 6 CLEANING A B Remove excess adhesive from floor base and wall surfaces without damage Clean in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 7 PR
582. t name 4 Project location 5 Architect s name and address 6 Engineer s name and address 7 Contractor s name and address 8 Report date 9 Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report 10 Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report Number each page in the report February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 11 Summary of contents including the following a Indicated versus final performance b Notable characteristics of systems Cc Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment Data for terminal units including manufacturer s name type size and fittings Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following Settings for outdoor return and exhaust air dampers Conditions of filters Cooling coil wet and dry bulb conditions Face and bypass damper settings at coils Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter Inlet vane settings for variable air volume systems Settings for supply air static pressure controller Other system operating conditions that affect performance FOTP D System Diagrams Include sc
583. t require servicing are accessible 3 Place and secure anchorage devices Use setting drawings templates diagrams instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded 4 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment B Install electric domestic water heaters level and plumb according to layout drawings original 3 2 3 3 3 4 C design and referenced standards Maintain manufacturer s recommended clearances Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible CONNECTIONS Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section Domestic Water Piping Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties Where installing piping adjacent to electric domestic water heaters allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic water heaters IDENTIFICATION Identify system components FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections 1 Leak Test After installation charge system and test for leaks Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist 2 Operational Test After electrical circuitry has been energized start units to confirm proper operation 3 Test and adjust controls and safeties Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment Electric domestic water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections P
584. table non continuous support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 Ibs H To avoid electromagnetic interference EMI pathways shall provide minimum clearances of four feet from motors or transformers one foot from conduit and cables used for electrical power distribution and five inches from fluorescent lighting Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical power cables or conduits l Bridle rings shall be installed in ceiling spaces where cables cannot be supported by j hooks 3 7 VELCRO STRAPS A Velcro straps shall be installed around cables at intervals of 12 minimum B Do not over cinch cables 3 8 SYSTEM FURNITURE FEEDS Provide all system furniture feeds in accordance with construction Drawings B Wall system furniture data voice feeds 1 Data voice system furniture feeds shall be installed next to the power feeds where possible but shall be kept separate in the furniture raceway 2 The wall feed shall consist of a double gang steel backbox in the wall Two 1 5 conduits shall be routed from the double gang box inside the wall and stubbed up above the ceiling The box shall be located at the same height as the power feed box or centered at 6 A F F 3 The backbox shall have a double gang stainless steel cover plate with a 2 opening on the center to allow the cabling to exit the wall 4 All cabling exiting the cover plate shall be routed inside a plastic or rubber whip which must be n
585. tainless steel c Provide units sized as shown in Hardware Headings N Push Pull Sets 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing February 7 2014 DOOR HARDWARE 087111 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Characteristics a Provide mounting systems as shown in hardware sets b Material to be description i e solid rod tubular cast etc stainless steel c Provide Push Pull sets sized as shown in Hardware Headings O Protective Plates 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a Glynn Johnson b Ives c Rockwood Manufacturing 2 Characteristics a Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self tapping screws b Materials 1 Metal Plates Stainless Steel 050 inch U S 18 gage 3 Fabricate protection plates not more than 2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side 4 Heights a Kick plates to be 10 inches in height b Mop plates to be 4 inches in height c Armor plates to be 34 inches in height Armor plates on fire doors to comply with NFPA 80 P Thresholds 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a National Guard Products Inc b Reese Industries c Zero Weather stripping Co Inc 2 Types Indicated in Hardware Headings Q Weather stripping 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a National Guard Products Inc b Rees
586. tall framed instructions in a location visible from fire alarm control unit 3 4 GROUNDING A Ground fire alarm control unit and associated circuits 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests and Inspections 1 Visual Inspection Conduct visual inspection prior to testing a Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its Completion Documents February 7 2014 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 Preparation Table in the Documentation Section of the Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems Chapter b Comply with Visual Inspection Frequencies Table in the Inspection Section of the Inspection Testing and Maintenance Chapter in NFPA 72 retain the Initial Reacceptance column and list only the installed components 2 System Testing Comply with Test Methods Table in the Testing Section of the Inspection Testing and Maintenance Chapter in NFPA 72 3 Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer s written instructions 4 Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer s written instructions 5 Factory authorized service representative shall prepare the Fire Alarm System Record of Completion in the Documentation Section of the Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems Chapter in NFPA 72 and the In
587. talled in concrete slab or conduits 1 1 2 inch and smaller passing through a concrete slab against corrosion where conduit enters and leaves concrete by wrapping conduit with vinyl all weather electrical tape 5 Protect all conduits entering and leaving concrete floor slabs from physical damage during construction 6 Provide expansion fittings in all conduits where length or run exceeds 200 feet or where conduits pass through building expansion joints 7 Install all conduits penetrating or routed within rated fire floors to maintain the fire rating of the floor Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall Refer to architectural documents 8 Conduits installed within concrete floor slabs which are in direct contact with grade or which penetrate the building roof shall be galvanized rigid steel G R S intermediate metal conduit Il M C or Schedule 40 heavy wall PVC Telecommunications cables shall not occupy conduits with power cables Metallic conduits shall be grounded in accordance with J STD 607 A For runs that total more than 100 feet in length insert pull boxes so that no segment between boxes exceeds the 100 feet limit except when floor duct is being used Conduit runs shall not have more than two 2 90 degree bends between pull points Telecommunications conduit system shall contain no condulets also know as an LB Horizontal Conduits 1 Support h
588. tantiation exists B Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience C Installer Qualifications Company specializing in performing the work of this section and 1 Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991 Approval of Firestop Contractors or meeting any two of the following requirements With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type Licensed by authority having jurisdiction Approved by firestopping manufacturer e wN D Installing Mechanic s Qualifications Trained by firestopping manufacturer and able to provide evidence thereof 1 7 MOCK UP A Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project 1 Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions install one assembly for each different combination 2 Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening install minimum of 1 linear ft B Obtain approval of authority having jurisdiction before proceeding If accepted mock up will represent minimum standard for the Work D If accepted mock up may remain as part of the Work Remove and replace mock ups not accepted 1 8 FIELD CONDITIONS A Comply with firestopping manufacturer s recommendations for
589. tary Drain 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 DN 80 and smaller 2 Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 2 percent downward in direction of flow 3 Vent Piping 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI s Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook Chapter IV Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA s Copper Tube Handbook Do not enclose cover or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls ceilings and floors Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls ceilings and floors JOINT CONSTRUCTION Join hubless cast iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI s Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook for hubless piping coupling joints Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 Use ASTM B 813 water flushable lead free flux and ASTM B 32 lead free alloy solder SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION Transition Couplings 1 Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD s 2 In Drainage Piping Unshielded nonpressure transition couplings February 7 2014 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 4 25 Park Pla
590. tate University GSU 080 096 13 L Install faucet flow control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns Include adapters if required M Install traps on fixture outlets 1 Exception Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps 2 Exception Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated N Install hot water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink O Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork Use deep pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section Common Work Results for Plumbing P Seal joints between fixtures and walls floors and countertops using sanitary type one part mildew resistant silicone sealant Match sealant color to fixture color Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants 3 3 CONNECTIONS A Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping fittings and specialties B Connect fixtures with water supplies stops and risers and with traps soil waste and vent piping Use size fittings required to match fixtures C Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D Connect wiring according to Divisi
591. tatic pressure differential in inches wg f Preheat coil static pressure differential in inches wg g Cooling coil static pressure differential in inches wg h Heating coil static pressure differential in inches wg i Outdoor airflow in CFM j Return airflow in CFM k Outdoor air damper position Return air damper position m Vortex damper position F Apparatus Coil Test Reports 1 Coil Data System identification Location Coil type Number of rows Fin spacing in fins per inch o c Make and model number Face area in sq ft Tube size in NPS Tube and fin materials Circuiting arrangement mse oa0TD 2 Test Data Indicated and Actual Values Air flow rate in CFM Average face velocity in fom Air pressure drop in inches wg Outdoor air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Return air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Entering air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Leaving air wet and dry bulb temperatures in deg F Water flow rate in gpm Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig Entering water temperature in deg F Leaving water temperature in deg F Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types Refrigerant suction pressure in psig Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F Inlet steam pressure in psig OPRZT ATT Ta 9Da90TD G Fan Test Reports For supply return and exhaust fans include the following 1 Fan Data February 7 2014 TESTING ADJUSTING AND
592. tation of terms used in this section 1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter 2 Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter 3 Semi gloss refers to a medium sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter 4 Full gloss refers to high sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter 1 4 SUMMARY A Paint exposed surfaces except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain neutral If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces If a color of finish is not indicated Architect shall select from the full range of colors and finishes available 1 Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts including color coding hangers exposed steel and iron supports and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory applied final finish B Do not paint prefinished item concealed surfaces finished metal surfaces operating parts and labels 1 Prefinished items include the following factory finished components a Architectural woodwork b Acoustical wall panels c Metal toilet enclosures d Elevator entrance doors and frames e Elevator eq
593. te installation The contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not B The work shall include but not be limited to the following 1 Perform all Labeling PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 01 LABELS All labels shall be vinyl B All labels shall have an adhesive backing for permanent attachment All labels shall be of sufficient size Minimum sizes shall be as follows 1 1 1 2 W x 3 16 H for Outlets Outlet cables Patch panels Ground wires Backbone cable pairs 2 4 W x 1 H for 9290p a Backbone cables b Equipment racks C MDF frames February 7 2014 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 d Active hardware and multiplexers 2 02 LABEL HOLDERS A Labels attached to backbone cable bundles shall be installed on a label holder of sufficient size Label holder to be plastic and have tie wrapping provisions 2 03 SOFTWARE PROGRAM A Software program shall be of the following types or similar 1 PANDUIT labeling program 2 Brady labeling program 3 Thomas amp Betts labeling program 4 Excel customized 2 04 TEMPORARY LABELS A Vinyl labels hand written with permanent marker 2 05 CHARTS A Provide printed charts containing required punch down and cross connect information Charts to be computer generated File information shall be tu
594. ted tile walls and floors Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to percent staining damage and wear Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed Before final inspection remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces 3 6 PROTECTION A B Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation Protect finished floor surface in accordance with TCNA Protecting New Tilework END OF SECTION February 7 2014 TILE 093000 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B Suspended metal grid ceiling system Acoustical units 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 079005 Joint Sealers Acoustical sealant 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A C D ASTM C636 C636M Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels 2008 ASTM E580 E580M Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions 2011 ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products 2008e1 UL FRD Fire Resistance Directory Underwriters Laboratories Inc current edition 1 4 SUBMITTALS
595. ted assembly 3 Exception Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels Double Layer Non Rated Use gypsum board for first layer placed parallel to framing or furring members with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing Use glass mat faced gypsum board at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer Fire Rated Construction Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing Installation on Metal Framing Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board 3 6 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A Control Joints Place control joints in accordance with ASTM C 840 consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated 1 Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long 2 At exterior soffits not more than 30 feet apart in both directions Corner Beads Install at external corners using longest practical lengths Edge Trim Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated 3 7 JOINT TREATMENT A General Treat gypsum board joints interior angles edge trim control joints penetrations fastener heads surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration Promptly r
596. ted experience C Fabricator Qualifications Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience 1 6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements 1 7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A Protect work from moisture damage 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner B Coordinate the work with plumbing rough in electrical rough in and installation of associated and adjacent components PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A Quality Grade Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI AWMAC WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade B Interior Woodwork Items 1 Moldings Bases Casings and Miscellaneous Trim Clear white pine prepare for paint finish 2 Loose Shelving Birch plywood prepare for paint finish 2 2 WOOD BASED COMPONENTS A Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted B Provide sustainably harvested wood certified or labeled as specified in Section 016000 C Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site 2 3 LUMBER MATERIALS A Softwood Lumber southern pine species quarter sawn maximum moisture content of 6 percent with vertical grain of quality suitable for transparent finish B Hardwood Lumber white oak species pla
597. tem number UL Classification system numbers are as follows Threaded Firestop System a Block Wall W J 3049 b Dry Wall W L 3138 Threaded Firestop System Vertical a Slab F A 3010 Smooth Firestop System 4 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270510 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a Block Wall W J 3048 b Dry Wall W L 3137 4 Split Sleeve Firestop System a Block Wall W J 3047 b Dry Wall W L 3136 2 04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A Thru Wall Fitting Firestop System 1 The device shall be classified for use in one two three and four hour rated gypsum concrete and block walls and provide a maximum L rating of six cfm The devices shall also been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc to UL2043 and determined to be suitable for use in air handling spaces B Threaded Smooth and Split Sleeve Firestop Systems 1 Shall conform to both Flame F and Temperature T ratings as required by local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions 2 The F rating must be a minimum of one 1 hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item s The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positiv
598. temperature and conditions during and after installation Maintain minimum temperature before during and for 3 days after installation of materials B Provide ventilation in areas where solvent cured materials are being installed 1 9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A Perform firestopping and smokestopping work after completion of work which penetrates fire and smoke barriers but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration Coordinate with installers of such other work PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A Firestopping at Uninsulated Metallic Pipe and Conduit Penetrations of diameter 4 inches or February 7 2014 FIRESTOPPING 078400 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 less Any material meeting requirements 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 1014 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W L 1003 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W L 1003 F Rating 1 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W L 1003 F Rating 1 hour Firestopping at Combustible Pipe and Conduit Penetrations of diameter 4 inches or less Any material meeting requirements 1 Floors UL Design No C AJ 2001 F Rating 2 hour 2 Stairway Walls UL Design No W L 2002 F Rating 2 hour 3 Corridor Walls UL Design No W L 2002 F Rating 1 1 2 hour 4 Other Interior Partitions UL Design No W L 2002 F Rating 3 4 hour Firestopping at Uninsulated Metallic
599. terials C Communications and electrical room mounting boards D Concealed wood blocking nailers and supports 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Gypsum based sheathing 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ASTM A153 A153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating Hot Dip on Iron and Steel Hardware 2009 B ASTM A653 A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc Coated Galvanized or Zinc lron Alloy Coated Galvannealed by the Hot Dip Process 2010 C ASTM C1396 C1396M Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2009a D ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2010b E AWPA C2 Lumber Timber Bridge Ties and Mine Ties Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes American Wood Protection Association 2003 F AWPA C9 Plywood Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes American Wood Protection Association 2003 G AWPA C20 Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes American Wood Protection Association 2003 H AWPA C27 Plywood Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes American Wood Protection Association 2002 AWPA U1 Use Category System User Specification for Treated Wood American Wood Protection Association 2010 PS 1 Structural Plywood 2007 K PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard National Institute of Standards and Technology Department of Commerce 2005
600. th end connections made of cadmium plated steel assemblies with brackets swivel and bolts designed for restraining cable service and with an automatic locking and clamping device or double cable clips Hanger Rod Stiffener Steel tube or steel slotted support system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod February 7 2014 METAL DUCTS 233113 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 DUCT INSTALLATION A Drawing plans schematics and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system Indicated duct locations configurations and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings B Install ducts according to SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible unless otherwise indicated C Install ducts with fewest possible joints D Install factory or shop fabricated fittings for changes in direction size and shape and for branch connections E Unless otherwise indicated install ducts vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines F Install ducts close to walls overhead construction columns and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building G Install ducts with a
601. the composite Operating and Shop Maintenance Manual Each manual shall contain but not be limited to 1 A statement of guarantee including date of termination and name and phone number of the person to be called in event of equipment failure February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 6 1 7 2 Individual factory issued manuals containing all technical information on each piece of equipment installed In the event such manuals are not obtainable from the factory it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to compile and include them Advertising brochures or operational instructions shall not be used in lieu of the required technical manuals SUBSTITUTIONS Throughout the Specifications types of material may be specified by manufacturer s name and catalog number in order to establish standards of quality and performance Where one or more manufacturers are listed for a product without the words or equal provide the equipment of one of the manufacturers listed Where one or more manufacturers are listed followed by the words or equal provide the product of one of the manufacturers listed or request a substitution of a product of equal quality performance and function as specified in Division 01 However the burden is upon the requester to prove such equivalence He must request the Architect s approval in writing to
602. ther work 1 Wiring Diagrams For power signal and control wiring February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A B Field quality control reports 1 Test procedures used 2 Test results that comply with requirements 3 Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements C Manufacturer s field service report 1 6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A Operation and Maintenance Data For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency operation and maintenance manuals In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data include the following 1 Manufacturer s written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers 2 Time current coordination curves average melt for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device 1 7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents 1 Fuses Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type but no fewer than three of each size and type 2 Fuse Pullers Two for each size and type 3 1 8 QUA
603. thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules C Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service Install accessories that do not corrode soften or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state D Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs E Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered F Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing G Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer H Install insulation with least number of joints practical l Where vapor barrier is indicated seal joints seams and penetrations in insulation at hangers supports anchors and other projections with vapor barrier mastic 1 Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments 2 For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic 3 Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer February 7 20
604. thru bolted mounted on the door per the door manufacturers requirements All trim shall be thru bolted to the lock stile case All exit devices shall be made of brass bronze stainless steel or aluminum material plated anodized or powder coated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware Provide glass bead conversion kits to shim exit devices on doors with raised glass heads All exit devices shall be one manufacturer No deviation will be considered All series exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper which decelerates the DOOR HARDWARE 087111 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 touchpad on its return stroke and eliminates noise associated with exit device operation All exit devices shall be non handed Touchpad shall extend a minimum of 1 2 of the door width and shall be a minimum of 2 3 16 in height Plastic touchpads are not acceptable All latchbolts to be the deadlocking type Latchbolts shall have a self lubricating coating to reduce wear Plated or plastic coated latchbolts are not acceptable Plastic linkage and dogging components are not acceptable Lever trim shall be solid case material with a break away feature to limit damage to the unit from vandalism Surface vertical rod devices shall be UL labeled for fire door 180 and 90 minute metal doors and 20 minute wood doors applications without the use of bottom rod assemblies
605. time delay relays C One N C and one N O auxiliary contact PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers with Installer present for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work 3 2 INSTALLATION A Wall Mounted Controllers Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural steel channels bolted to wall For controllers not at walls provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems B Install fuses in each fusible switch enclosed controller C Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section Fuses D Install heaters in thermal overload relays Select heaters based on actual nameplate full load amperes after motors have been installed E Comply with NECA 1 3 3 IDENTIFICATION A Identify enclosed controllers components and control wiring Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems 1 Identify field installed conductors interconnecting wiring and components provide warning signs 2 Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate 3 Label each enclosure mounted control and pilot device February 7 2014 ENCLOSED COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLER
606. ting a Lighting Fixtures b Ballasts C Lamps d Lighting Control Systems February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Product Data Manufacturers technical product literature including specifications and installation instructions for each component and system as listed in Products Part 2 of each section Shop Drawings Dimensioned drawings and layouts showing location of system components accessories and secondary systems Include wiring diagrams connections and special installation details Coordination Drawings Detailed layout drawings showing primary elements components and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components 1 Indicate clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment 2 Indicate locations where space is limited and sequencing and coordination will affect efficient installation of the Work Quality Control Submittals Provide the following for record 1 Test Reports 2 Certificates 3 Manufacturers Instructions 4 Manufacturers Field Reports Contract Close out Submittals Provide tab pages with metal or plastic reinforced holes to separate each major item or closely related group of items with typed item names on the tabs Supply a table of contents at the beginning of each volume listing all items the manufacturers and the name address and phone num
607. ting work with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work Examine rough in for embedded and built in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable Prepare written report endorsed by the Installer listing conditions detrimental to performance of the work Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 PREPARATION A Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory Restore exposed finish by grinding filling and dressing as required to make area smooth flush and invisible on exposed faces Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted with bituminous coating prior to installation Prior to installation adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness alignment twist and plumbness to the following tolerances 1 Squareness Plus or minus 1 16 measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head 2 Alignment Plus or minus 1 16 measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of February 7 2014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 wall Twist Plus or minus 1 16 measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines and perpendicular to plane of
608. tion before testing adjusting and balancing E Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing F Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting adjusting and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations 1 Downstream from manual volume dampers control dampers backdraft dampers and equipment 2 Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers to reset or reinstall fusible links Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers 3 Control devices requiring inspection 4 Elsewhere as indicated G Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure February 7 2014 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 H Access Door Sizes DOV NS One Hand or Inspection Access 8 by 5 inches Two Hand Access 12 by 6 inches Head and Hand Access 18 by 10 inches Head and Shoulders Access 21 by 14 inches Body Access 25 by 14 inches Body plus Ladder Access 25 by 17 inches l Label access doors according to Division 23 Section Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment to indicate the purpose of access door J Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment K Connect term
609. tion utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample store and display system data for points as specified in the I O summary a Any point physical or calculated may be designated for trending Any point regardless of physical location in the network may be collected and stored in each DDC Controllers point group Two methods of collection shall be allowed either by a pre defined time interval or upon a pre defined change of value Sample intervals of minute to 7 days shall be provided Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing Data samples All trend data shall be available for use in 3rd party personal computer applications b DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance Operator initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for operator selected PID control loops as identified in the point I O summary Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC Controller from a network workstation or remotely using dial in modems For all loop tuning functions access shall be limited to authorized personnel through password protection DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run time hours for digital input and output points and automatically sample calculate and store consumption totals for analog and digital pulse input type p
610. tions calibrate testing instruments Provide equipment to simulate loads Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation After tests return settings to normal operating conditions The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC amp R system document the deficiency and report it to the Owner After deficiencies are resolved reschedule tests If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests HVAC amp R systems subsystems and equipment Testing Procedures HVAC amp R Instrumentation and Control System Testing Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections Instrumentation and Control for HVAC and Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans Pipe system cleaning flushing hydrostatic tests and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections HVAC amp R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning flushing and hydrostatic testing plan Provide cleaning flushing testing and treating plan
611. to discoloration sagging or irregular shape 2 Indications that panels are mold damaged include but are not limited to fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration 3 10 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE Level 1 Above finished ceilings concealed from view Level 2 Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry Level 3 Walls scheduled to receive textured wall finish Level 4 Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish PSEC WwW Level 5 Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi gloss or gloss paint finish END OF SECTION February 7 2014 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 8 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 093000 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A B C Tile for floor applications Stone thresholds Non ceramic trim 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A B Section 079005 Joint Sealers Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Installation of tile backer board 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A B C D ANSI ASSE A10 20 Safe Operating Practices for Tile Terrazzo and Marble Work 2006 ANSI A108 Series A118 Series A136 1 American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile 2011 ANSI A137 2 American National Standard Specifications for Glass Tile 2011 TCNA HB Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 2011 1 4 SUBMITTALS A B See Section 013000 Administrative
612. to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use ASHRAE Compliance 1 ASHRAE 15 2 Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62 1 Section 5 Systems and Equipment and Section 7 Construction and Startup ASHRAE IESNA Compliance Applicable requirements in ASHRAE IESNA 90 1 Section 6 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning February 7 2014 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP 238146 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 E Comply with NFPA 70 F Comply with safety requirements in UL 484 for assembly of free delivery water source heat pumps G Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct system connections 1 6 COORDINATION A Coordinate layout and installation of water source heat pumps and suspension components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including light fixtures HVAC equipment fire suppression system components and partition assemblies 1 7 WARRANTY A Special Warranty Manufacturer s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water source heat pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period 1 Failures include but are not limited to refrigeration components 2 Warranty Period Five 5 years from date of Substantial Completion Includes refrigeration circuit coils reversing valve expansion valve and compressor for a total of 5 years PART 2 P
613. to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties k Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body 2 Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation 3 Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application 4 Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer s recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated Februrary 7 2014 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 6 A B 3 7 3 8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE GENERAL Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range If more than one material is listed for a piping system selection from materials listed is Contractor s option INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Domestic Hot Water Insulation shall be one of the following 1 Flexible Elastomeric 3 4 inch 19 mm thick 2 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation Type l 1 2 inch 1
614. to the general preparation procedures specified above 1 Open all manual valves for maximum flow 2 Check liquid level in expansion tank 3 Check makeup water station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent 4 Check flow control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow 5 Set differential pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open 6 Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers 7 Check pump motor load If motor is overloaded throttle main flow balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded 8 Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated 3 8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A Motors 1 2 HP and Larger Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data 1 Manufacturer s name model number and serial number 2 Motor horsepower rating 3 Motor rpm 4 Efficiency rating 5 Nameplate and measured voltage each phase 6 Nameplate and measured amperage each phase 7 Starter thermal protection element rating B Motors Driven by Variable Frequency Controllers Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation Record observations including name of controller manufacturer model number serial nu
615. trally initiated commands and system modification Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password controlled WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE SOFTWARE Basic Interface Description 1 Operator workstation interface software shall be an extension of the existing operator interface software February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 9 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Provide a graphical user interface which shall minimize the use of keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device and point and click approach to menu selection C The software shall provide a multi tasking type environment that shall allow the user to run several applications simultaneously These Windows applications shall run simultaneously with the BAS software 1 Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed simultaneously on line and in any combination via user sized windows a Dynamic color graphics and graphic control b Alarm management routing to designated locations and customized messages c Week at a Glance Time of day scheduling d Trend data definition and presentation e Graphic definition and construction f Program and point database editing on line 2 If the software is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time 3 Report and alarm printing shall be accomplished via Windows program manager
616. trative Requirements for submittal procedures Shop Drawings Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals Product Data Provide data on metal framing gypsum board accessories and joint finishing system Product Data Provide manufacturer s data on partition head to structure connectors showing compliance with requirements Test Reports For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754 provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies For fire resistance rated assemblies provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency STC Rated Assemblies For STC rated assemblies provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency Samples Submit five samples of predecorated gypsum board 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating finish color and texture Samples Submit five samples of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating finish color and texture 1 5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Sore materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather condensation direct sunlight construction traffic and other causes
617. trolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing D Use copper plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing E Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types 1 Adjustable Copper Clevis Hangers MSS Type 1 For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes NPS 1 2 to NPS 2 F Hanger Rod Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types 1 Steel Turnbuckles MSS Type 13 For adjustment up to 6 inches 150 mm for heavy loads 2 Steel Clevises MSS Type 14 For 120 to 450 degF 49 to 232 degC piping installations 3 Swivel Turnbuckles MSS Type 15 For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings 4 Malleable Iron Sockets MSS Type 16 For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments 5 Steel Weldless Eye Nuts MSS Type 17 For 120 to 450 deg F 49 to 232 deg C piping installations G Building Attachments Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections install the following types 1 Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts MSS Type 18 For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling 2 Side Beam or Channel Clamps MSS Type 20 For attaching to bottom flange of beams channels or angles January 31 2014 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC P
618. tructural value of joined pieces Cut drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 32 inch unless otherwise indicated Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces Cut reinforce drill and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware screws and similar items Connections Fabricate railings with nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated 2 7 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION A B General Fabricate to sizes and shapes required provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels 1 Clean cut or flat grind edges at butt glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces 2 Grind smooth exposed edges including those at open joints to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces Infill Panels Provide tempered glass panels for straight sections 2 8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A B Comply with NAAMM s Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable temporary protective covering before shipment Appearance of Finished Work Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptab
619. ts G Qualification Data For firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses names and address of architects and owners and other information specified 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Fabricator Qualifications Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience 1 Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project B Perform work in accordance with AWI AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated Custom quality unless other quality is indicated for specific items C Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience D Manufacturer Qualifications Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI and familiar with the AWI AWMAC QSI E Quality Certification Provide inspection and quality certification of completed custom cabinets in accordance with AWI AWMAC Quality Certification Program F Source Limitations Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodworking including wood doors when veneer matching includes door faces 1 6 MOCK U
620. ts provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36 month period Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report Warranties Sample of special warranties 1 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating Glass Units with Sputter Coated Low E Coatings A qualified insulating glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated glass manufacturer Glass Testing Agency Qualifications A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated Source Limitations for Glass Obtain laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method Glazing Publications Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards 1 GANA Publications GANA s Laminated Glazing Reference Manual and GANA s Glazing Manual 2 IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass SIGMA TM 3000 North American Glazing Guidelines for Seal
621. ts indicated on Drawings If mounting heights of boxes are not indicated give priority to ADA requirements Install boxes with height measured as indicated on symbol legend Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure Do not support boxes by conduits SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling FIRESTOPPING Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section Firestopping February 7 2014 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 5 PROTECTION A Protect coatings finishes and cabinets from damage and deterioration 1 Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by manufacturer 2 Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
622. tten report of tests inspections observations and verifications indicating and interpreting results If adjustments are made to lighting system retest to demonstrate compliance with standards 3 4 STARTUP SERVICE A Burn in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly prior to occupancy by Owner Burn in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed for at least 100 hours at full voltage 3 5 ADJUSTING A Occupancy Adjustments When requested within 3 months of date of Substantial Completion provide on site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions Provide one visit to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose Some of this work may be required after dark 1 Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect END OF SECTION 265100 February 7 2014 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 270000 COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Applicable requirements of Division 01 General Requirements shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Specifications Standards and Codes B All work shall be in accordance with the following 1 The 2002 edition of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70 2 The 1999 edition of the Standard Building Code 3 The 1
623. tudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs E Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered F Do not weld brackets clips or other attachment devices to piping fittings and specialties G Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing H Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer l Install insulation with least number of joints practical J Where vapor barrier is indicated seal joints seams and penetrations in insulation at hangers supports anchors and other projections with vapor barrier mastic 1 Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments 2 For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic 3 Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer 4 Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation Install shields over jacket arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger support and shield K Apply adhesives mastics and sealants at manufacturer s recommende
624. ture Range 0 to plus 180 deg F Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C 5 Color White 2 5 SEALANTS A FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants at DPPN N Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company CP 76 b Eagle Bridges Marathon Industries 405 C Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 95 44 d Mon Eco Industries Inc 44 05 Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates Fire and water resistant flexible elastomeric sealant Service Temperature Range Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C Color Aluminum For indoor applications sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers 2 6 FACTORY APPLIED JACKETS A When factory applied jackets are indicated comply with the following February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 FSK Jacket Aluminum foil fiberglass reinforced scrim with kraft paper backing
625. types swings undercuts beveling blocking for hardware factory machining factory finishing cutouts for glazing and other details 1 Provide the information required by AWI AWMAC WI Architectural Woodwork Standards 2 Include certification program label C Specimen warranty D Test Reports Show compliance with specified requirements for the following 1 Sound retardant doors and frames sealed panel tests are not acceptable E Shop Drawings Illustrate door opening criteria elevations sizes types swings undercuts required special beveling special blocking for hardware factory machining criteria factory finishing criteria identify cutouts for glazing February 7 2014 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 F Samples Submit five samples of door construction 8x10 inch in size cut from top corner of door G Samples Submit five samples of door veneer 8x10 inch in size illustrating wood grain H Manufacturer s Installation Instructions Indicate special installation instructions Warranty executed in Owner s name 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing B Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience Obtain flush wood doors from si
626. uary 7 2014 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Coordinate the work with door opening construction door frame and door hardware installation B Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight wet work in spaces is complete and dry and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period 1 8 WARRANTY A See Section 017800 Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements B Include coverage for warping beyond specified installation tolerances and defective materials C Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors D Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from the Date of Substantial Completion 1 Interior Doors Five years 2 Glass Vision Panels Three years PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Stile and Rail Wood Doors 1 Eggers Industries www eggersindustries com 2 Maiman Company www maiman com 3 Marshfield Door Systems Inc www marshfielddoors com 4 Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements 2 2 DOORS A Quality Level Custom Grade in accordance with AWI AWMAC WI Architectural Woodwork Standards B Interior Doors 1 3 4 inches thick un
627. uary 7 2014 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 1 25 Park Place Phase Two Georgia State University c Seismic ratings based upon calculations alone are not acceptable Certification of Seismic rating must be based on testing done in all three axis of motion 4 Acceptable Manufactures a ABB ACH Series b Alternate manufacturer s requests must be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval at least 20 working days prior to bid Approval does not relieve the supplier of specification requirements 5 The VFD manufacturer shall have available a comprehensive HVAC Drive Computer Based Training CBT product The CBT product shall include detailed interactive sections covering VFD unpacking proper mechanical and electrical installation and programming The CBT product shall allow the user to provide just in time training to new personnel or refresher training for maintenance and repair personnel on the user s site The CBT product shall be repeatable precise and shall include record keeping capability The CBT product shall record answers to simulations and tests by student ID number The CBT product must be professionally produced and have interactive sections student tests and include video clips of proper wiring and installation 1 1 SUBMITTALS A Submittals shall include the following information 1 Outline dimensions conduit entry locations and weight 2 Customer connection and power wiring diagrams 3 Compl
628. ubstitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements ON Co Nos D Fibered Compound Firestopping Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non asbestos fibers conforming to the following 1 Density 4 lb cu ft 2 Durability and Longevity Permanent 3 Color Manufacturer s standard color 4 Manufacturers a A D Fire Protection Systems Inc Product A D Fire Barrier Mineral Wool www adfire com b Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements E Fiber Firestopping Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening conforming to the following 1 Density 4 0 lb cu ft 2 Durability and Longevity Permanent 3 Manufacturers a A D Fire Protection Systems Inc Product Fire Barrier Seal w Fire Barrier Mineral Wool joint backing www adfire com b Pecora Corporation Product Dynatrol Sealant w Ultra Block joint backing www pecora com c Substitutions See Section 016000 Product Requirements F Firestop Devices Wrap Type Mechanical device with incombustible filler and collar and flanged stops intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed conforming to the following 1 Durability and Longevity Permanent 2 Manufacturers a Grace Construction Products Product Flamesafe FireStop Device FSD www na graceconstruction com b 3M Fire Protection Products Product Fire Barrier Plastic Pipe Devices www 3m com firestop c Hi
629. uded and the engineer shall be notified of the discrepancy 1 4 WORK INCLUDED A The Communications Infrastructures installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following B Voice Data Cabling Infrastructure February 7 2014 COMMUNICATIONS 270000 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Telecommunications conduits raceways cable tray racks cabinets and equipment mounting boards as indicated on the Drawings D Grounding and Bonding 1 5 DEFINITIONS A Terms The following definitions of terms supplement those of the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and are applicable to DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 1 Provide As used herein shall mean furnish install and test if applicable complete 2 Infrastructure As used herein shall mean cable installed in conduit raceway cable tray or j hooks with all required boxes fittings connectors and accessories completely installed 3 Work As used herein shall be understood to mean the materials completely installed including the labor involved 1 6 DRAWINGS A Drawings are generally diagrammatic and show the arrangement and location of pathways outlets support structures and equipment The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly Should conditions on the job make it n
630. ufacturer no exceptions B Paints and Coatings 1 Benjamin Moore amp Co www benjaminmoore com 2 PPG Industries Inc PPG www porterpaints com 3 Sherwin Williams www sherwin williams com 2 2 INTERIOR PRIMERS A Block Fillers Factory formulated latex block filler for interior applications 1 Benjamin Moore Super Spec Masonry Interior Exterior Hi Build Block Filler No 206 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8 5 mils 2 PPG Industries 6 15 SpeedHide Interior Exterior Masonry Hi Fill Latex Block Filler Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7 0 mils 3 Sherwin Williams Preprite Interior Exterior Latex Block Filler B25W25 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8 0 mils B Interior Concrete and Masonry Primers Factory formulated alkali resistant acrylic interior primer for interior application 1 Benjamin Moore Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer amp Underbody No 216 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mil 2 PPG Industries 6 2 SpeedHide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mils 3 Sherwin Williams Loxon Concrete amp Masonry Primer Sealer Interior Exterior Latex A24W8300 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2 1 mils C Interior Gypsum Board Primers Factory formulated latex based primer for interior application 1 Benjamin Moore Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer amp Underbody No 216
631. ufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 2 5 a Panduit Corp b Wiremold Legrand Surface Nonmetallic Raceways Two or three piece construction complying with UL 5A and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer s standard colors Product shall comply with UL 94 V O requirements for self extinguishing characteristics 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following a Panduit Corp b Wiremold Legrand BOXES ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following Adalet Cooper Technologies Company Cooper Crouse Hinds EGS Appleton Electric Erickson Electrical Equipment Company FSR Inc Hoffman a Pentair company Hubbell Incorporated Killark Division Kraloy Milbank Manufacturing Co 10 Mono Systems Inc 11 O Z Gedney a brand of EGS Electrical Group 12 RACO a Hubbell Company 13 Robroy Industries 14 Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company 15 Stahlin Non Metallic Enclosures a division of Robroy Industries 16 Thomas amp Betts Corporation 17 Wiremold Legrand CONOR WhY gt General Requirements for Boxes Enclosures and Cabinets Boxes enclosures and cabinets installed
632. ught copper fittings and brazed joints 7 Pipe Insulation Refrigerant minimum 3 8 inch thick flexible elastomeric insulation on piping exposed to airflow through the unit Maximum 25 50 flame spread smoke development indexes according to ASTM E 84 H Filters Disposable glass fiber flat type 1 inch thick treated with adhesive and having a minimum of 80 percent arrestance according to ASHRAE 52 1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value of 5 according to ASHRAE 52 2 l Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC and Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls J Controls February 7 2014 WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP 238146 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 K L 1 Basic Unit Controls Low and high voltage protection Overcurrent protection for compressor and fan motor Random time delay three to ten seconds start on power up Time delay override for servicing Control voltage transformer oaoop 2 BAS interface requirements as further described in Division 23 Sections Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC and Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls a Interface relay for scheduled operation b Interface relay to provide indication of fault at central workstation C Provide BAC net interface for the following functions 1 Set point adjustment for set points identified in thi
633. uilding Code 2012 and NFPA 13 2013 and include proper protection of any space that is currently not protected This may includes but is not limited to electrical room mechanical spaces janitor s closets coat closets etcetera D Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction 1 Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure 10 percent 2 Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications a Building Service Areas Ordinary Hazard Group 1 b Electrical Equipment Rooms Ordinary Hazard Group 1 C General Storage Areas Ordinary Hazard Group 1 d Mechanical Equipment Rooms Ordinary Hazard Group 1 e Office and Public Areas Light Hazard 3 Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler a Office Spaces 225 sq ft 20 9 sq m b Storage Areas 130 sq ft 12 1 sq m c Mechanical Equipment Rooms 130 sq ft 12 1 sq m d Electrical Equipment Rooms 130 sq ft 12 1 sq m e Other Areas According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated 4 Total Combined Hose Stream Demand Requirement According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated a Light Hazard Occupancies 100 gpm 6 3 L s February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 b Ordinary Hazard Occupancies 250 gpm 15 75 L s Seismic Performance Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motion
634. uipment f Finished mechanical and electrical equipment g Light fixtures 2 Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces a Foundation spaces b Furred areas c Ceiling plenums d Utility tunnels e Pipe spaces f Duct shafts g Elevator shafts 3 Finished metal surfaces include the following a Anodized aluminum b Copper and copper alloys 4 Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following a Valve and damper operators b Linkages c Sensing devices d Motor and fan shafts 5 Labels Do not paint over UL FMG or other code required labels or equipment names identification performance ratings or nomenclature plates February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 5 SUBMITTALS A B G H See Section 013000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures Product Data Provide data on all finishing products including VOC content Use of paint products containing greater than 6 one hundredths of one percent 0 06 lead by weight is prohibited Samples Submit five paper chip samples 8x10 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled Certification By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified Certification By manuf
635. ults of fire hydrant flow test a Engineering Responsibility Preparation of working plans calculations and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer Welding Qualifications Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application NFPA Standards Sprinkler system equipment specialties accessories installation and testing shall comply with the following Ls NFPA 13 2013 Installation of Sprinkler Systems February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPING MATERIALS A Comply with requirements in Piping Schedule Article for applications of pipe tube and fitting materials and for joining methods for specific services service locations and pipe sizes 2 2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A Standard Weight Black Steel Pipe ASTM A 53 A 53M Type E Grade B Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method B Thinwall Black Steel Pipe ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795 A 795M threadable with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10 Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method C Black Steel Pipe Nipples ASTM A 733 made of ASTM A 53 A 53M
636. um Start Stop routines Alarms and Interlocks a Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm b Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic as well as to ensure that the fail safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction C Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating value of the variable and interlock action 3 3 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE A Demonstration 1 on OND Prior to acceptance the control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification These tests shall occur after the Contractor has completed the installation started up the system and performed its own tests The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation startup and debugging process and as specified in the Control System Checkout and Testing Article in Part 3 of this specification The CxA will be present to observe and review these tests Approved checklists and forms shall be completed for all systems as part of the demonstration Demonstrate actual field operation of each control and sensing point for all modes of operation including day night occupied unoccupied fire smoke alarm seasonal changeover and power failure mode
637. um diameter of the wall penetration for 1 2 and 4 inch sizes shall be 1 1 4 2 7 16 and 4 1 2 inches respectively Smooth Firestop Device Unique Firestop Products a Smooth steel sleeve device incorporating flat washers secured by sliding compression couplers The device shall be available in 1 2 and 4 inch sizes Maximum diameter of the wall penetration for 1 2 and 4 inch sizes shall be 1 1 4 2 7 16 and 4 1 2 inches respectively Split Sleeve Firestop Device Unique Firestop Products a Threaded steel sleeve halves incorporating split couplings and slotted washers to fit the specific diameter of the opening The device shall be available in 1 2 and 4 inch sizes Maximum diameter of the wall penetration for 1 2 and 4 inch sizes shall be 1 1 4 2 7 16 and 4 1 2 inches respectively Fire Rated Cable Pathway STI EZ PATH a Fire rated cable pathway device modules shall be comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 100 percent cable fill 2 03 UL CLASSIFICATION A Thru Wall Fitting The firestop device for use in through penetration firestop systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc to UL1479 ASTM E 814 and bear the U S and Canadian UL Classification Mark B Threaded Smooth and Split Sleeve Firestop Devices Firestopping sealants and devices shall be 2 3 February 7 201 used together as a firestop system All firestop systems shall bear a UL Classification sys
638. unless more stringent requirements are indicated including those in referenced glazing publications Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass minimum edge and face clearances and adequate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that when installed could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants as determined by preconstruction testing Install setting blocks in sill rabbets sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches 1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements 2 Provide 1 8 in
639. urce and manufacturer as for panelboards and switchboards B Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURERS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Products 2 General Electric Company 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D Schneider Electric 2 2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A Description Factory assembled and tested air cooled units for 60 Hz service February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B Cores Grain oriented non aging silicon steel C Coils Continuous windings without splices except for taps 1 Internal Coil Connections Brazed or pressure type 2 Coil Material Aluminum 2 3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561 B Cores One leg per phase C Enclosure Ventilated NEMA 250 Type 2 1 Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound sealing out moisture and air D Transformer Enclosure Finish Comply with NEMA 250 1 Finish Color Gray E Taps for Transformers 7 5 to 24 kVA Manufacturer s standard F Taps for Transformers 25 kVA
640. ures with tubular waste piping 3 Use chair type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures C Install back outlet wall mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports D Install counter mounting fixtures in and attached to casework E Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing in drawings F Install water supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation 1 Exception Use ball gate or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture Valves are specified in Division 22 Section General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping G Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system H Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system l Install trap seal liquid in dry urinals J Install faucet spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns Include adapters if required K Install water supply flow control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves February 7 2014 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 4 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia S
641. urr after cutting 5 Install sleeves for floor penetrations Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches 50 mm above finished floor level or as indicated D Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non Fire Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies 1 Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening 2 Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies END OF SECTION 260544 February 7 2014 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 260544 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 A A A A A B C RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY Section Includes 1 Identification for equipment enclosures 2 Identification for conductors 3 Cable ties ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each electrical identification product indicated QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 70 COORDINATION Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors Install ide
642. urrs Bevel plain ends of steel pipe E Remove scale slag dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipes tubes and fittings before assembly F Flanged Joints Select appropriate gasket material in size type and thickness suitable for water service Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31 9 G Threaded Joints Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1 20 1 Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID Join pipe fittings and valves as follows 1 Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads 2 Damaged Threads Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged H Twist Locked Joints Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain end pipe fitting Rotate retainer lugs one quarter turn or tighten retainer pin l Welded Joints Construct joints according to AWS D10 12M D10 12 using qualified processes and welding operators according to Quality Assurance Article 1 Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated Do not use welded joints for galvanized steel pipe February 7 2014 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 J Steel Piping Roll Grooved Joints Roll rounded edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606 Assemble coupling with housing gasket lubricant and bolts Join steel pipe and groove
643. us Configured Terminators Mechanical type 3 Feed Through Lugs Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device 4 Subfeed Double Lugs Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device E Future Devices Mounting brackets bus connections filler plates and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices F Panelboard Short Circuit Current Rating Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short circuit current available at terminals Rating to equal or exceed that of panelboard to be replaced 2 2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following 1 Eaton Electrical Inc Cutler Hammer Business Unit 2 General Electric Company GE Consumer amp Industrial Electrical Distribution 3 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 4 Square D a brand of Schneider Electric B Panelboards NEMA PB 1 power and feeder distribution type February 7 2014 PANELBOARDS 262416 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C Mains Circuit breaker orLugs only D Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A Bolt on circuit breakers plug in circuit breakers where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for removal 2
644. use the following 1 Shutoff Service Ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller butterfly valves for piping larger than NPS 2 2 Flow Measuring Balancing Service Flow measuring balancing valves B If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted C Select valves with the following end connections 1 For Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller Solder joint valve end option D Install all flow measuring balancing and shutoff valves in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations with the necessary straight pipe on the upstream and downstream of the valve E Install manual air vents at the high points of each piping system F Install automatic air vents where shown on drawings and at the top of each closed piping system G Air vent outlets shall be connected to 1 2 inch 3 8 inch copper tubing routed to accessible location H Install all air vents in easily accessible areas l Provide Needle Valve at each manual air vent bleed point J Provide nipples and couplings to make the test plugs thermometer and gauges extend through the insulated pipe K Mount thermometers and pressure gages to be read by a person standing on the floor L Provide snubber at each pressure gauge M Provide Gauge Cock for isolation at each pressure gauge February 7 2014 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 7 25 Park Place Phase Two
645. ustrial Pre Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy K45 150 Series Applied at a dry film thickness of npt less than 1 5 mils C Interior Satin Acrylic Paint Factory formulated satin acrylic emulsion latex paint for interior application 1 Benjamin Moore Aura Satin Waterborne Interior Paint C274 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 3 mils 2 PPG Industries Inc PPG 6 3511 Speedhide Interior Satin Acrylic Latex Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 3 mils 3 Sherwin Williams SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series Applied at a dry film thickness as recommended by the manufacturer written instructions February 7 2014 PAINTING AND COATING 099000 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 4 PAINTS AND COATINGS GENERAL A Paints and Coatings Ready mixed unless intended to be a field catalyzed coating 1 Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags 2 Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project s work from a single production run 3 Do not reduce thin or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer s product instructions B Primers Where the manufacturer offers options on p
646. ut internal reactors have substantially higher input current ratings which may require larger input power wiring and branch circuit protection The contractor shall complete all wiring in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual START UP Certified factory start up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center A certified start up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer PRODUCT SUPPORT Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly familiar with the VFD products offered shall be locally available at VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 10 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 04 both the specifying and installation locations A toll free 24 365 technical support line shall be available A computer based training CD or 8 hour professionally generated video VCR format shall be provided to the owner at the time of project closeout The training shall include installation programming and operation of the VFD bypass and serial communication WARRANTY The VFD Product Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start up not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment The warranty shall include all parts labor travel time and expenses A toll free 24 365 technical support line
647. vative PID control adjustments current limit accel decel time adjustments and lock and unlock the keypad The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback output speed frequency current in amps torque power kW kilowatt hours resettable operating hours resettable and drive temperature The DDC February 7 2014 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 232923 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 G February 7 2014 shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status digital input status and all analog input and analog output values All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible 5 Serial communication in bypass shall include but not be limited to bypass run stop control the ability to force the unit to bypass and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as current in amps kilowatt hours resettable operating hours resettable and bypass logic board temperature The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relay output status and all digital input status All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible EMI RFI
648. vel control is indicated Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement Sound Rating Class A Total Harmonic Distortion Rating Less than 10 percent Transient Voltage Protection IEEE C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Category A or better Operating Frequency 65 kHz or higher Lamp Current Crest Factor 1 7 or less BF 1 0 or higher unless otherwise indicated Interference Comply with 47CFR18 Ch 1 SubpartC for limitations on electromagnetic and radio frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment CONOAARwWN gt EXIT SIGNS General Requirements for Exit Signs Comply with UL 924 for sign colors visibility luminance and lettering size comply with authorities having jurisdiction Internally Lighted Signs 1 Lamps for AC Operation LEDs 50 000 hours minimum rated lamp life FLUORESCENT LAMPS Lamps shall be as indicted on the drawings with average rated life of 20 000 hours unless otherwise indicated LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS Comply with Division 26 Section Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports Single Stem Hangers 1 2 inch 13 mm steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy Finish same as fixture Twin Stem Hangers Two 1 2 inch 13 mm steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture Finish same as fixture Wires ASTM A 641 A 641
649. ver client architecture designed around the open standards of web technology Approved Manufacturers Siemens Building Automation COORDINATION OF TRADES Mechanical Division installs all wells valves taps dampers flow stations etc furnished by BAS manufacturer Electrical Division provides 1 120V power to all BAS and or Temperature control panels 2 Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motors 3 Wiring of any remote start stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by BAS manufacturer QUALITY ASSURANCE The BAS system shall be designed and installed commissioned and serviced by manufacturer factory trained personnel Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall be manufacturer s latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation Part 15 Section 15 Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled SUBMITTALS Valve and damper schedules Equipment data cut sheets System schematics including 1 Sequence of operations 2 Point names February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 3 Point addresses 4 I
650. vered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig 845 kPa above operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required B Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections C Prepare test 3 9 ADJUSTING and inspection reports A Perform the following adjustments before operation 1 Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings adjustments and operation 3 10 CLEANING A Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows 1 Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered extended or repaired before using 2 Use p urging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction if methods are not prescribed use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 6 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 a Flus
651. ves are installed on AC 1 AC 2 and R 1 Unoccupied Floor Damper Operation 1 In addition to control from FCC provide BAS operator control of smoke dampers on each floor to isolate unoccupied floors for operating efficiency 2 BAS operator shall have the ability to individually close the smoke dampers in the a supply to Induction Units AC 1 and AC 2 perimeter exterior b supply to Interior AC 2 and AC 4 modulating control C return R 1 and R 2 Modulating control and d exhaust E 10 and E 11 e on each of floors 2 26 f Requires four separate output signals for each floor 3 Unoccupied floor damper control shall not override the fire alarm controls 4 AHU speed valve and central damper positions remain normal 5 For this Phase Unoccupied Floor Damper Controls for upper floors will be disabled until variable speed drives are installed on AC 2 and R 1 TERMINAL UNITS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VAV Variable Air Volume VAV Primary air damper shall modulate to maintain space temperature setpoint Primary air damper shall modulate between min and max to maintain cooling temperature setpoint In unoccupied mode operate to maintain night setback and set up temperature Damper Override Minimum velocity or airflow cfm setpoint shall be reset to allow maximum design airflow rate through Terminal Unit when floor commanded to positive pressure mode Adjustable thru BAS Space Cooling Heating setpoints Primary Airflow Min
652. vice protecting the circuit and the load s or outlet s 6 Feeder All circuit conductors between the service equipment the source of a separately derived system or other power supply source and the final branch circuit over current device s re Where shown or where indicated Reference to Drawing s item or items 8 Or equal Shall mean equivalent as approved by the Architect or Engineer February 7 2014 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 1 4 1 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The extent of Division 26 work shall be as shown on the Electrical Drawings This Division includes all the electrical work except that work specifically designated as being specified or required by other Divisions Work is to include all labor and material necessary for the complete electrical installation and proper operation of all electrical systems including but not limited to equipment associated with the HVAC Fire Protection Fire Alarm and Plumbing Systems Drawings The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature except where specific dimensions or specific details are shown Refer to other project drawings for exact locations of equipment building dimensions Architectural details and conditions affecting the electrical work SUBMITTALS General Unless otherwise indicated all submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements as specified herein and in
653. vices 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 30 80 30 90 b Vimasco Corporation 749 February 7 2014 DUCT INSULATION 230713 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 E 96M Procedure B 0 013 perm 0 009 metric perm at 43 mil 1 09 mm dry film thickness 3 Service Temperature Range Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C 4 Solids Content ASTM D 1644 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight 5 Color White 2 4 LAGGING ADHESIVES A Description Comply with MIL A 3316C Class lI Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials jackets and substrates 1 For indoor applications use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D EPA Method 24 2 Products Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following a Childers Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company CP 50 AHV2 b Foster Brand Specialty Construction Brands Inc a business of H B Fuller Company 30 36 Cc Vimasco Corporation 713 and 714 3 Fire resistant water based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation 4 Service Tempera
654. wable re use of existing systems equipment components and materials 1 Outdoor air dampers on units AC 1 and AC 2 are new All damper actuators exist and will be reworked to operate the new dampers 2 Smoke dampers and smoke detectors in medium pressure supply ducts on 7 and 24 are new Smoke dampers on floors 22 and 23 are already installed under a previous contract 3 All sensors controllers control components transformers transducers relays differential pressure switches EP devices switches and PE devices are new 4 Piping pressure differential sensors and controllers for pumps P 6 P 7 P 9 and P 10 speed control shall be new unless noted otherwise 5 Smoke detectors in AC 5 and AC 6 are new 6 VFD s for pumps P 6 P 7 P 9 and P 10 are new 7 VFD s for fans AC 2 AC 4 R 1 R 2 and R 4 are new Static pressure sensors for fans R 1 and R 2 already exist and shall be used in controlling return air fan speed with new VFD s February 7 2014 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 14 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 8 Pumps for new side stream air separators are new 2 14 NORMAL POSITIONS FOR VALVES AND DAMPERS 2 15 A B C 1s Sequences refer to normal valve and damper positions Where valves or damper actuator are reused it is not the intent to modify the valve to achieve the normal position referenced in the sequence If normal position is not as specified
655. when installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency 2 5 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES A B C Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing Glazing cement setting blocks shims and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails 1 Glazing Cement Nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel as standard with manufacturer Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post supported railings Allow 1 2 inch clearance between glass panels 2 6 FABRICATION A General Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design dimensions member sizes and spacing details finish and anchorage but not less than that required to support structural loads February 7 2014 GLASS RAILING SYSTEM 057210 3 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B E F Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation Use connections that maintain s
656. wings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section SUMMARY This Section includes the following 1 Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less 2 Connectors splices and terminations rated 600 V and less ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data For testing agency Field quality control test reports QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components Devices and Accessories Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use Comply with NFPA 70 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following 1 Alcan Products Corporation Alcan Cable Division 2 American Insulated Wire Corp a Leviton Company 3 General Cable Corporation 4 Senator Wire amp Cable Company 5 Southwire Company February 7 2014 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 1 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 B C 2 2 A B Copper Conductors Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN THWN 1 Grounded neutral conductors s
657. xceed all requirements described in this document 1 2 REFERENCES A All work shall be performed in accordance with the following codes and industry standards unless noted otherwise 1 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code current version adopted by local or State AHJ 2 TIA 568 C 2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard current version 3 TIA EIA 569 B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces current version 4 TIA EIA 606 A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure current version 5 J STD 607 A Commercial Building Grounding Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications current version 6 IEEE 241 IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings pertaining to communication systems 1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A This section describes the acceptable products procedures and best practices for the installation of Communications blocks and Patch Panels B Telecommunications contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary for a complete and working system 1 4 WARRANTY A The Telecommunications contractor must be an approved Ortronics Certified Contractor at a Plus tier CIP CIP Gold CIP Platinum or multi site national and Oasis certified The Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the Ortronics Certi
658. y lubricated permanent split capacitor motor E Water Circuit 1 Refrigerant to Water Heat Exchangers a Coaxial heat exchangers with cupronickel water tube with enhanced heat transfer surfaces inside a steel shell both shell and tube leak tested to 450 psig 3102 kPa on refrigerant side and 400 psig 2758 kPa on water side Factory mount heat exchanger in unit on resilient rubber vibration isolators 2 Motorized Water Valve Stop water flow through the unit when compressor is off F Refrigerant to Air Coils Copper tubes with aluminum fins leak tested to 450 psig 3102 kPa G Refrigerant Circuit Components Sealed Refrigerant Circuit Charge with R 410A refrigerant Filter Dryer Factory installed to clean and dehydrate the refrigerant circuit Charging Connections Service fittings on suction and liquid for charging and testing Reversing Valve Pilot operated sliding type valve designed to be fail safe in heating position with replaceable magnetic coil Compressor Hermetic scroll compressor installed on vibration isolators and housed in an acoustically treated enclosure with factory installed safeties as follows AWN or Antirecycle timer High pressure cutout Low pressure cutout or loss of charge switch Internal thermal overload protection Condensate overflow switch to stop compressor with high condensate level in condensate drain pan DD2pgp 6 Refrigerant Piping Materials ASTM B 743 copper tube with wro
659. ype Deep drawn box shaped brass with polished chrome plated finish C One Piece Cast Brass Type With set screw 1 Finish Polished chrome plated D Split Casting Cast Brass Type With concealed hinge and set screw 1 Finish Polished chrome plated PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION A Refer to Division 01 Section Cutting and Patching for general demolition requirements and procedures B Disconnect demolish and remove plumbing systems equipment and components indicated to be removed 1 Piping to Be Removed Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material 2 Piping to Be Abandoned in Place Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material 3 Equipment to Be Removed Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment 4 Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled Disconnect and cap services and remove clean and store equipment when appropriate reinstall reconnect and make equipment operational 5 Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner February 7 2014 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 2 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 C If pipe insulation or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products
660. ype B ASTM B 88 Type M ASTM B 88M Type C cast or wrought copper solder joint fittings and brazed soldered joints 2 Hard copper tube ASTM B 88 Type L ASTM B 88M Type B or ASTM B 88 Type M ASTM B 88M Type C copper pressure seal joint fittings and pressure sealed joints 3 Soft copper tube ASTM B 88 Type L ASTM B 88M Type B or ASTM B 88 Type M ASTM B 88M Type C compression fittings END OF SECTION 221116 February 7 2014 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 7 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 A 1 2 A 1 3 A 1 4 A 1 5 A B SUMMARY Section Includes 1 Pipe tube and fittings 2 Specialty pipe fittings PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Performance Soil waste and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE SEI 7 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data For each type of product indicated INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality control reports QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping materials shall bear label stamp or other markings of specified testing agency Comply with NSF ANSI 14 Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials for plastic piping components Include marking with NSF dwv for plastic drain waste and vent piping and NSF sewer for plastic sewer piping
661. ze trip ratings and conductor material 3 Retain subparagraph below if retaining options requiring integral or remote control power in subparagraphs above and if control power for remote indication or operation is not specified in other Sections See Control Power Options Article in the Evaluations for various sources available for control power Although other voltages are available the Section Text includes only those that are most frequently encountered and listed in manufacturers literature First option below may not be available in all voltages coordinate with manufacturers literature 2 5 ENCLOSURES A Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers NEMA AB 1 NEMA KS 1 NEMA 250 and UL 50 to comply with environmental conditions at installed location 1 Indoor Dry and Clean Locations NEMA 250 Type 1 February 7 2014 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 5 25 Park Place Phase Two HII 12053 02 Georgia State University GSU 080 096 13 2 Outdoor Locations NEMA 250 Type 3R 3 Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations NEMA 250 Type 3R PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION A Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION A Install individual wall mounted switches and circuit breakers wit
662. zing Glass for borrowed lites Section 099000 Painting and Coating Field painting 1 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A ANSI ICC A117 1 American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities International Code Council 2003 ANSI A250 8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2003 ANSI A250 10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames 1998 R2004 BHMA A156 115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 2006 DHI A115 Series Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware Door and Hardware Institute 2000 ANSI DHI A115 Series NAAMM HMMA 840 Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 2007 NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2010 UL BMD Building Materials Directory Underwriters Laboratories Inc current edition UL 10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition Including All Revisions UL 1784 Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies Current Edition Including All Revisions 1 4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data Materials and details of design and construction hardware locations reinforcement type and locations anchorage and fastening methods and finishes and one copy of referenced grade st

Spec

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents